7615 lines
685 KiB
Plaintext
7615 lines
685 KiB
Plaintext
{\rtf1\ansi\deff1
|
|
{\fonttbl{\f0\froman Times New Roman;}{\f1\fswiss Arial;}{\f2\fnil Symbol;}{\f3\fswiss MS Sans Serif;}}
|
|
{\colortbl;\red0\green0\blue255;\red255\green0\blue0;\red0\green0\blue0;}
|
|
{\stylesheet{\fs28 \snext0 Normal;}
|
|
}\pard\plain
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Lotus Suspension Analysis \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 SHARK, Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \uldb Lotus\plain\fs20 Suspension provides a simple to use tool for the design and analysis of suspension geometry. Standard suspension types using individual default pre-filled templates provide easy creation of kinematic models in either \uldb 2D\plain\fs20 or \uldb 3D\plain\fs20 modes.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm0.bmp\}
|
|
\par Creating a new model using pre-defined template types
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Analysis of suspension geometry in Bump, Rebound, Roll and Steering is performed in an interactive environment. \uldb Graphical\plain\fs20 plots of selected derivatives are continually updated as suspension hard points are modified, either singly or as \uldb groups\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm1.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphical Display of Suspension Model
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The inclusion of \uldb bushes\plain\fs20 , \uldb spring properties\plain\fs20 , \uldb tyre stiffness\plain\fs20 and \uldb external forces\plain\fs20 allow \uldb compliant\plain\fs20 response to be calculated, including automatic creation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\uldb \f1 compliance coefficients\plain\fs20 \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 for defined \uldb load sets\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm2.bmp\}
|
|
\par Compliant Suspension Coefficients Display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \uldb Mass properties\plain\fs20 and component \uldb damping\plain\fs20 provide \uldb modal analysis\plain\fs20 capability and the prediction of the \uldb forced damped\plain\fs20 response of the system. Individual mode shapes can be viewed animated on the model. The forced response at specific frequencies can be animated together with the complete speed sweep response.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm3.bmp\}
|
|
\par Modal Analysis Frequencies \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Bar Chart
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Suspension \uldb templates\plain\fs20 can be either corner models or complete axle models. These complete axles may be because they are rigid axle suspension types or because it is required to model the effect of a connecting link such as the rack, sub-frame or an anti-roll bar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm4.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Full Axle Template \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Anti-Roll Bar
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview - Introduction
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\fi-1435 \fs20
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20 Shark provides an analysis tool for calculating the suspension \uldb derivatives\plain\fs20 of pre-defined types of kinematic suspensions, through an interactive \uldb graphical\plain\fs20 interface. The program calculates the suspension derivatives, i.e. camber, castor, toe angle, roll centre height, etc., over three individual or mixed articulation types, bump/rebound, roll and steering, (steering 3D module only).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par It functions either in \uldb 2D or 3D forms\plain\fs20 with increasing level of data requirements and analysis results with the 3D form. All suspension hard points can be \uldb edited\plain\fs20 or \uldb dragged\plain\fs20 through a fully \uldb dynamic 3D viewing\plain\fs20 environment with \uldb graphical\plain\fs20 results updated as the suspension hard points are modified.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Extensions to the integral solver allow for \uldb bush compliant\plain\fs20 effects and \uldb applied external forces\plain\fs20 to be included to understand the impacts of compliance on the suspension characteristics.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Mass and damping properties also allow for the rigid body modes to calculated and the modal shapes viewed. The application of spring forces and external forces allow the forced/damped response to be predicted and the displacements viewed at user defined frequencies.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm5.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example screen shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Overall appearance of application
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview, Modules
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The program has two modules, \uldb 2D\plain\fs20 and 3D. The suspension geometry data used in each module is completely independent of the other module. Switching between modules with the relevant menu or icon will change the display to reflect the model, results and settings of that module.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par It is possible to move a 2D model data into one of the default 3D templates via the \i Solve / \uldb Convert 2D to 3D\plain\i\fs20 \plain\fs20 menu option. You currently cannot automatically simplify 3D data down to 2D, this not considered a likely requirement.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Many of the commands and menu options are identical between the 2D and 3D modules. Where a menu or action is not relevant to that module it will be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 greyed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 out.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Again where possible the same functionality and behavior is common between the 2D and 3D modules.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The 2D module works in the cross car plane only, i.e. Y-Z plane, where Y is cross car and Z is height.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm6.bmp\}
|
|
\par Module Icons in the File toolbar
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A range of displacement \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 modules\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are available. In 2D mode displacement can be in either Bump/Rebound or Roll. In 3D mode displacement can be in Bump/Rebound, Roll, Steer or Combined Motion. All Bump/Rebound motion options can be applied as moving ground or moving body. The 3D combined motion mode allows combinations of bump, roll and steer displacements to be applied to the model.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Bump/Rebound displacement is defined by the vertical displacement (Z direction) of the body (or the ground plane).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Roll displacement is defined by the angle of roll of the vehicle body about the original roll centre axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Steering displacement for the default steering rack is defined by the horizontal displacement (Y direction) of the inner track rod ball joint. With the option of a steering box, displacement is the angular rotation of the steering arm.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The combined mode can mix any of the above three displacements at each calculation position. The bump motion can be different for each wheel.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm7.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par All modules have \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Extended\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 forms. For 3D in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 form you specify the displacement limit and the step size, whilst in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Extended\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 form you specify the number of positions and the displacement value at each position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Note that Vertical displacement modules have separate Bump and Rebound limits and step size for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 form, whilst Roll and Steer modules have a single limit and step size which is mirrored for both +ve and \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve directions. In extended mode the bump/rebound travel is entered as either a positive (for bump) or a negative value (for rebound).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Suspension Types
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par In the 2D module there are only two basic suspension \uldb types\plain\fs20 ;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \b 1) Double Wishbone
|
|
\par 2) Macpherson Strut
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Because in the 2D module no provision is included for the modeling of springs, dampers or steering mechanisms, the majority of the 3D module\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s templates are covered by the two 2D suspension types.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par This does mean that trailing arm type suspensions cannot be modelled in the 2D module.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The 2D module works in the cross car plane only, i.e. Y-Z plane, where Y is cross car and Z is height.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm8.bmp\}
|
|
\par Selecting the 2D Suspension Type
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Suspension Types
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D module has 30 pre-defined suspension types;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \b 1) \uldb Double Wishbone, damper to lower wishbone\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 2) \uldb Lower H frame, single upper link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 3) \uldb Steerable Macpherson Strut\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 4) \uldb Non-Steerable Macph Strut, two lower ball joints, tie to ground\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 5) \uldb 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 6) \uldb Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 7) \uldb Non/Steerable Macpherson Strut, steering arm to lower wishbone\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 8) \uldb 4-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \b 9) \uldb 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 10) \uldb Trailing Arm with Two Cross Car Links\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 11) \uldb Semi/Trailing Arm\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 12) \uldb Steerable Twin Parallel Wishbones with Steering Knuckle\plain\b\fs20 \uldb
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 13) \uldb Double Wishbone, Damper to Knuckle\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 14) \uldb Double Wishbone with Push Rod Suspension\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 15) \uldb Double Wishbone, Rocker Arm Damper\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 16) \uldb Non/Steerable Lower \plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 Arm with Toe Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 17) \uldb Double Wishbone, Push Rod, Mono-shock\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \b 18) \uldb Double Wishbone, Upper Toe Link, Drop \plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 19) \uldb Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin lower Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 20) \uldb Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 21) \uldb 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage)\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 22) \uldb Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Spring Front\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 23) \uldb Double Wishbone, Anti-Roll Bar\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 24) \uldb Steerable Macpherson Stut, Twin Outer Ball Joints\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 25) \uldb Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer Ball Joints\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \b 26) \uldb Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone, Compliant Rack\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 27) \uldb Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 28) \uldb 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 29) \uldb Twist Beam \plain\f0\b\uldb\fs20 \'96\f1 Twin Wheel\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 30) \uldb Generic 5-link Rear\plain\b\fs20 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Some of these suspension types are steerable and in which case will appear as options for both front and rear suspension selections. Whilst non-steerable suspension types will only appear in the rear suspension list. The majority of these templates are just corner models, some axle templates are included. Users can convert these or their own corner templates to axle templates using the menu item \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par For steerable suspension types the steering mechanism type is selected separately from either a rack or steering box.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm9.bmp\}
|
|
\par Selecting the 3D Front Suspension Type
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par It is possible to define your \uldb own 3d templates\plain\fs20 . These can be loaded automatically and either used as additions to the existing hard coded templates, replacements for or modifications of the hard coded ones. Templates that are loaded automatically are referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates. Users can also load additional \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 defined templates by browsing for an external file. All templates loaded from external files, (i.e. both default and user), are loaded into a certain template index. Thus it is possible to overwrite an existing hard coded template with a default or user template having the same index number. Similarly it is possible to overwrite a default template with a user template. The default templates are stored in a text file named \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 _User_Templates.Dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and is searched for in the programs startup folder. It is scanned for a program start-up and if found it is read and any extra templates loaded.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par It is possible to re-run the defaults loading process during a session, (without the need to restart), by using the menu item \i File / Re-Read Default Templates\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Steering Types
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D front suspension templates are restricted to being \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 steerable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . A steerable template has an identified point attached to the body that is articulated in a prescribed manner for the Steering \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 of analysis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Two types of steering type are available;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \b 1) Steering Rack
|
|
\par 2) Steering Box (two types)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The steering rack applies a linear displacement of the nominated track rod end along the Y-axis. Note that if the rack is used in an asymmetric suspension and the two rack, inner track rod points are positioned at different x-positions the rack motion is along the line defined rather than pure y-axis linear motion. No additional data points are required to define the steering rack. The defined steering travel is the linear distance in mm.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The steering box type requires additional geometry points to be added to identify the pitman point and steering arm axis. The defined steering travel for a steering box type is angular rotation of the steering arm. Two steering box types are available, (illustrations of each type are given below).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm10.bmp\}
|
|
\par Steering box graphical display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Box points highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Note that steering is not considered in the 2D module as it is by definition a 3D phenomena.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm11.bmp\}
|
|
\par Selecting the 3D Steering Articulation Type
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The two steering box types are illustrated below. The number of data points are the same but the implied mechanism is different.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm12.bmp\}
|
|
\par Steering Box Type 1
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm13.bmp\}
|
|
\par Steering Box Type 2
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphical Interface
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The graphical interface consists of a conventional Windows style container window, with a top menu bar and a series of status panels along the bottom.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Optional toolbars are drawn by default to the left of the window, containing short cut icons to some of the main menus. The user can specify the visibility of the toolbars together with their position. Additionally the toolbars can be displayed as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 floating\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 rather than anchored to one of the edges.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Floating toolbars can be re-docked to the required edge through picking and dragging to the new position, (note the outline shape will change to indicate docking).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The initial positions of the toolbars can be set via the \i SetUp / Start Options / Default ToolBar Position\plain\fs20 menu item, with \i Top, Bottom, Left \plain\fs20 or \i Right\plain\fs20 options available. This change is saved to the users \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file and will be applied next time the application is re-started. Note that with the introduction of individual user toolbar settings, each toolbar can have its own start position and this setting is only used for the initial definition process.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm14.bmp\}
|
|
\par Confirming the change in toolbar position
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The suspension graphics is drawn in the window titled \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 2D Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 3D Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 as appropriate for the current module setting. This window cannot be closed, but can be repositioned, re-sized and minimized. Only one graphic window can be opened by the application at a time, (i.e. you cannot open different models at the same time using different graphic windows in the way that a multi-document application like Word would).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm15.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example 2D Graphic window
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Results graphs are displayed in individual windows. Each new graph added opening a new window. The graph windows can be moved, re-sized, closed and minimized. The title of the graph window reflects the plotted variable.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm16.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example 3D Graph window
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par By default on start-up only the graphic window and toolbars are drawn, no graphs are displayed until they are added via the \i Graph / New/Open\plain\fs20 menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The settings for window positions, sizes and variables can be saved such that when the application is re-started all windows are re-opened in the same positions, see \i Window / Save Def. Window Settings\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Hard Point Dragging
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The suspension hard points can be selected from the screen via the mouse and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to a new position, the suspension derivatives being re-calculated as the hard point is moved. The selected derivatives that are being displayed graphically are updated during the hard point screen dragging. Point dragging can be in a 2D view along both viewed axes, a single axis or dragging in a 3D view along a selected axis direction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm17.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Dragging mode, tracking lines show Y axis direction.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The majority of the point dragging functionality is performed using a combination of left and right mouse buttons. The mouse buttons are also used extensively for the dynamic viewing option and thus this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sharing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 requires a switch between \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point dragging is one part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode. The other two parts are direct editing and joggle editing.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To indicate when the application is in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode and when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode not only are the relevant menus and icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 but also \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are added to the graphic display when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm18.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Indicating in Dynamic View mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To change to editing mode un-select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 using \i View / Dynamic Viewing / Off\plain\fs20 . Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm19.bmp\}
|
|
\par Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When in point dragging mode \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are drawn to indicate the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 direction(s). To change the current tracking direction the right mouse button will cycle through the available tracking direction options. A similar action is achieved by selecting the mouse icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm20.bmp\}
|
|
\par Mouse Icon \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Cycles through tracking options.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Selecting any of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit icons\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Hard point joggling operates in a similar way to dragging with regard to available directions. The drawn joggle symbol indicates the number of joggle directions available. To use joggle select either Ctrl + Arrow Key for coarse joggle or Shift + Arrow Key for fine joggle. The joggle fine size is a tenth of the coarse size, the coarse size can be set via \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm21.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Screen shot of point joggle
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Point dragging is affected by both Groups and Coincident points. The settings for groups and point coincidence change a single point pick and drag event into a potential single point pick but multiple point drag. In the case of groups, the current groups points are all translated by the same amount. Whilst for point coincidence only the point or points selected from a displayed list are moved, again all selected points are moved by the same amount.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm22.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Coincident point pick
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The coincident point selection feature is switched on via the \i Edit / Point Coincidence Pick\plain\fs20 menu. When switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident can be changed via the \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20 menu. A similar tolerance exists to control whether a point is within the pick region.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The default/standard method of model change during point dragging is to modify the position of a particular point, (or points for the case of a group), to its new position and hence change its relative position to any other point on the same part that hasn\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t been dragged. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode is referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Change Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . An alternative \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode has been added that allows the existing part geometry to be retained. In this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Retain Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode only the hard points attached to the body (i.e. ground) can be selected and dragged, but when dragged all part lengths and hence point relevant positions are retained on each part in the model.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A point may also be dragged along a user defined vector in either the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 retain part\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 methods.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The default tracking style is Linear. That is along the specified direction. In addition both spherical and circular methods are available, where the dragged point is projected back on to a defined sphere or defined circular arc.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Groups
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par In the 3D mode the hard points can be formed into groups such that when one of that group is selected via the mouse and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , the other points in the group are dragged by the same amount, i.e. maintaining their relative positions within the group. This can be used for example to mimic moving a wishbone or suspension upright.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The only visible change to the graphic display when in group mode is that the number of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 pickable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 points is reduced to those in the group. Pickable points are drawn in a different colour and size to the non-pickable ones, (this can also be seen normally on static position versus incremental position, where only the static position can be picked). A further indicator as to the active use of a group is when in edit mode the drag lines are only drawn through the current groups\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm23.bmp\}
|
|
\par Group Selected \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Lower Wishbone Points Grouped
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The user can define any number of groups, a single point can be a member of any number of groups. Only one group can be current at a time. The group relationship is thus only applied when the group is current and the relationship taken from the point of making the group current.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Group data is saved with the model data file for subsequent re-use. Individual groups can be deleted from the model using \i Edit / Groups / Delete \plain\fs20 selecting the required group to delete by its label.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Users can create groups using the \i Edit / Groups / Create...\plain\fs20 menu item. Give the new group a unique label when prompted. A group is associated with either the front or rear suspension, you cannot add points to one group from both ends. Creating a group thus involves identifying how many points and which points are associated with the group.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm24.bmp\}
|
|
\par Group Creation \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Selecting the required points for a three point group
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The contents of an existing group can be edited through the \i Edit / Groups / Edit\plain\fs20 menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Once a group has been created it has no effect on hard point editing until the group is made current. To make a group current select the required group from the \i Edit / Groups / Current\plain\fs20 menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm25.bmp\}
|
|
\par Making a Group Current
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To revert back to conventional data editing with all hard points available \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 cancel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the group setting using the \i Edit / Groups / Cancel\plain\fs20 menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par A temporary group can be created by the selection of a screen area, the created group will include all points within this selected region. A temporary group created in this way is disabled/canceled in the same way as a conventional group, but once canceled is then lost and would need to be re-created if required again.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Dynamic Viewing
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The main graphical window has dynamic viewing via the mouse, that allows translation, scaling and rotation (3D module only), of the suspension graphics.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Dynamic viewing shares the functional use of the mouse and its buttons with the hard point data editing, joggling and dragging functions. Thus to enable both dynamic viewing and editing to use the mouse you switch between the two modes. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 icon together with the associated menus indicate the status of these two modes, when checked the application is in dynamic view mode and the mouse and its buttons can be used to perform translation, scaling and rotation of the graphics model. Additionally the graphic display has symbols drawn in each corner as a visual indication that the application is in dynamic view mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm26.bmp\}
|
|
\par Dynamic Viewing \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Indicators marked
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The dynamic view mode has three options, (two in 2D), being Translation, Scaling and Rotation. Each of these options has its own icon and menu item, \i View / Translate View, View / Scale View \plain\fs20 and \i View / Rotate View\plain\fs20 . Selecting any of these options will enable dynamic viewing (if in data editing mode), or just change dynamic view type, (if already in dynamic view).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm27.bmp\}
|
|
\par Dynamic Viewing \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 View Type Icons
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The dynamic view modes use the motion of the mouse between key down and key release to change the view. The translate view mode simply follows the translation of the mouse within the current view plane. The Scale view mode uses the mouse vertical position to scale the current view plane. Moving the mouse up scales the view out, (i.e. model appears further away), whilst moving the mouse down scales the view in.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The rotate dynamic view, (only available in 2D), has two actions depending on the position of initial mouse selection point. Selecting towards the middle of the image will rotate the line of sight, whilst selecting towards the edge of the view will rotate the view around the line of sight only.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When in dynamic view mode the right mouse button will cycle through the available dynamic view options.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Module
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 2D mode works with reduced hard points, i.e. no springs, dampers, pushrods etc., and is in the cross car view only (Y-Z plane). Construction lines are drawn to show instantaneous centres and kinematic roll centre positions. The user can define the required bump/rebound and roll camber, the bump/rebound and roll centre height and the roll centre lateral motion with roll angle. These are compared on the graphs to the current hard points actual solution or with one of the hard points \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 freed off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are used to illustrate on the suspension graphical display the point location that meets the derivative targets.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Note that steering is not considered in the 2D module as it is by definition a 3D phenomena.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm28.bmp\}
|
|
\par 2D module graphics display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par In most respects the functionality of the 2D module follows that of the 3D module in-terms of windows, graphics and graphs. Where relevant to the 3D module only features and menus will be disabled.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The 2D module is intended to be a simplified analysis approach with both a reduced variable set and a reduced results set. Its restriction to the cross car plane means that it can not be applied to trailing and semi-trailing type suspensions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The 2D module has only two basic suspension types, Double Wishbone and Macpherson Strut.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm29.bmp\}
|
|
\par 2D Module template types \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 New model menu
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The 2D module can be used as a simplified route to a full 3D module. Once you have achieved your required 2D characteristics use the convert to 3D option, \i Solve / Convert 2D to 3D\plain\fs20 , to produce a fully populated 3D single axle model.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Within the 2D module you can use conventional hard point editing, joggling and dragging techniques to modify the suspension derivatives. This the default 2D solve mode as is referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Fix All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , (\i Solve / 2D Fix Option / Fix All\plain\fs20 ). In this Fix mode the suspension is fully defined/constrained and the displayed results are as constrained by the 2D mechanism. A range of alternative Fix modes are available where one of the hard point constraints can be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Freed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 up to allow the required camber curve and roll centre height to define the suspension. These \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 required\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 curves must be defined through the relevant graphs \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 User Line\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data, (use the right mouse menu on the graphs to \i Edit User Line\'85\plain\fs20 .).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The various available \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Fix\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 modes are set via the \i Solve / 2D Fix Option\plain\fs20 sub menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par In the 2D module the point dragging has been extended to include selecting the Kingpin Axis point and changing its angle, selecting the ground offset point to change the Kingpin offset at the ground plane and selecting the tyre contact point to drag and change the track.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm30.bmp\}
|
|
\par 2D Module \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Example Double Wishbone Top Outer \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Free\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \ul
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \plain\b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Suspension Derivatives
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 2D suspension calculated derivatives for bump/rebound articulations are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
|
|
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
|
|
\par 3) Track Change
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Whilst for 2D roll articulation the calculated derivatives are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
|
|
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
|
|
\par 3) Roll Centre Lateral
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\fi-1435
|
|
\par \pard All other suspension derivatives are either fixed, (such as Kingpin Angle), or not applicable to the 2D module, (such as toe angle).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm31.bmp\}
|
|
\par 2D Sample Graph \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Includes User and Scope lines
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Suspension Derivatives
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D mode has four articulation types, bump/rebound, roll, steering and a combined mode. The combined mode allows the user to define a path of combined bump, roll and steering to enable wheel envelopes to be established. The suspension derivatives calculated are split into seven groups;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 1) Standard
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 Wheel Travel (mm)
|
|
\par Camber Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Toe angle (Plane definition) (deg)
|
|
\par Toe Angle (SAE definition) (deg)
|
|
\par Castor Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Kingpin Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Damper 1 Ratio (-)
|
|
\par Spring 1 Ratio (-)
|
|
\par Anti Dive (%)
|
|
\par Anti Squat (%)
|
|
\par Half Track Change (mm)
|
|
\par Wheel base Change (mm)
|
|
\par Damper 1 Travel (mm)
|
|
\par Spring 1Travel (mm)
|
|
\par Ackermann (%)
|
|
\par Castor Trail (hub) (mm)
|
|
\par Castor Offset (grnd) (mm)
|
|
\par Kingpin Offset (at wheel centre) (mm)
|
|
\par Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm)
|
|
\par Mechanical Trail (mm)
|
|
\par Roll Centre Height to Body (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 Roll Centre Height to Ground (mm)
|
|
\par Handwheel Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Roll Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Steer Travel (mm) or (deg)
|
|
\par Position (pseudo time)
|
|
\par Bump Stop 1 Travel (mm)
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par 2) Positional
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 Roll Centre X (mm)
|
|
\par Roll Centre Y (mm)
|
|
\par Roll Centre Z (mm)
|
|
\par TCP X (mm)
|
|
\par TCP Y (mm)
|
|
\par TCP Z (mm)
|
|
\par Hub Centre X (mm)
|
|
\par Hub Centre Y (mm)
|
|
\par Hub Centre Z (mm)
|
|
\par Castored TCP X (mm)
|
|
\par Castored TCP Y (mm)
|
|
\par Castored TCP Z (mm)
|
|
\par Castor Intersect X (mm)
|
|
\par Castor Intersect Y (mm)
|
|
\par Castor Intersect Z (mm)
|
|
\par KPI Normal X (mm)
|
|
\par KPI Normal Y (mm)
|
|
\par KPI Normal Z (mm)
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par 3) Extended
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 Tyre Vertical Force (N)
|
|
\par Swing Arm Length (Front) (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm ctr Y (Front) (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm ctr Z (Front) (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm Length (Side) (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm ctr X (Side) (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm ctr Z (Side) (mm)
|
|
\par TCP dX/dZ Gradient (mm/mm)
|
|
\par Damper 2 Ratio (-)
|
|
\par Spring 2 Ratio (-)
|
|
\par Damper 2 Travel (mm)
|
|
\par Spring 2Travel (mm)
|
|
\par Spring 1 Force (N)
|
|
\par BumpStop 1 Force (N)
|
|
\par Spring 2 Force (N)
|
|
\par BumpStop 2 Force (N)
|
|
\par Turning Circle Radius (mm)
|
|
\par Rack Axis Force (N)
|
|
\par Handwheel Moment (N.mm)
|
|
\par Steering Tie Rod Angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 Roll Steer Coefficient (%)
|
|
\par Roll Camber Coefficient (%)
|
|
\par KPI Length (mm)
|
|
\par Inner Drive Shaft Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Outer Drive Shaft Angle (deg)
|
|
\par Drive Shaft Length Plunge (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm Ctr X \{\-FRONT\'7d (mm)
|
|
\par Swing Arm Ctr Y \{\-SIDE\'7d (mm)
|
|
\par BumpStop 2 Travel (mm)
|
|
\par Opposite Toe Angle (Plane) (deg)
|
|
\par Opposite Toe angle (SAE) (deg)
|
|
\par Ackermann Delta (deg)
|
|
\par Ackermann Average (deg)
|
|
\par Ackermann Error (deg)
|
|
\par Ackermann (%)
|
|
\par Opposite Tyre Vertical Force (N)
|
|
\par Opposite Camber angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 4) Derivative d/dz
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 d/dz Camber Angle (deg/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Toe angle (Plane definition) (deg/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Toe Angle (SAE definition) (deg/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Castor Angle (deg/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Kingpin Angle (deg/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Half Track Change (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Wheel base Change (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Damper 1 Travel (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Spring 1Travel (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Castor Trail (hub) (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Castor Offset (grnd) (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Kingpin Offset (at wheel centre) (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Mechanical Trail (grnd) (mm/mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 d/dz TCP X (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz TCP Y (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz TCP Z (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Hub Centre X (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Hub Centre Y (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Hub Centre Z (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Damper 2 Travel (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Spring 2Travel (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Damper 1 Ratio (1/mm
|
|
\par d/dz Spring 1 Ratio (1/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Damper 2 Ratio (1/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Spring 2 Ratio (1/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz KPI Length (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Drive Shaft Length Plunge (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Castored TCP X (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Castored TCP Y (mm/mm)
|
|
\par d/dz Castored TCP Z (mm/mm)
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par 5) Integral \'a7dz
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \'a7dz Camber Angle (deg.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Toe angle (Plane definition) (deg.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Toe Angle (SAE definition) (deg.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Castor Angle (deg.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Kingpin Angle (deg.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Half Track Change (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Wheel base Change (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Damper 1 Travel (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Spring 1Travel (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Castor Trail (hub) (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Castor Offset (grnd) (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Kingpin Offset (at wheel centre) (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Mechanical Trail (grnd) (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz TCP X (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \'a7dz TCP Y (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz TCP Z (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Hub Centre X (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Hub Centre Y (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Hub Centre Z (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Damper 2 Travel (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Spring 2 Travel (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Damper 1 Ratio (mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Spring 1 Ratio (mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Damper 2 Ratio (mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Spring 2 Ratio (mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz KPI Length (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \'a7dz Drive Shaft Length Plunge (mm.mm)
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par 6) Graphic
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab As relevant to the Model
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 7) User Defined
|
|
\par \tab As added/defined by the user
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The derivatives can be viewed either individually through the results graphs, select \i Graphs / New/Open\plain\fs20 to open a new/additional graph or via the suspension derivative results file (SDF).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The variable actually displayed on the graph is best changed/set by using the right mouse button on the graph of interest and using the \i Y-Variable\plain\fs20 menu list.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm32.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Graph Window \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Showing right mouse button Y-variable menu selection
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The SDF file can be displayed via the relevant icon or the \i Results / Formatted SDF\plain\fs20 menu. The SDF file can be displayed either as a user specified formatted list or as a set of spline coefficients or just as spline data. These last two have a collection of user definable settings that control which articulation types, which results and which ends are shown in the lists.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm33.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Extract of the formatted SDF file display
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 All displayed graphs and SDF displays can be printed to produce hard copy records via the \i print\plain\fs20 menu options provided through the standard Windows\'ae printer dialogues.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm34.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Extract of the SDF splines display
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Limit Boxes
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par For both modes, hard point \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 limit boxes\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 can be switched on, theses boxes are set to allow only a user specified amount of travel in a specific direction. Thus when switched on, a point, (or a group point), cannot be dragged outside of its limit box. These boxes could perform one of two functions, firstly they could be set to represent packaging limitations, or secondly to indicate production tolerances. In the second case the program can run a tolerance analysis for the chosen hard point at all extremes of the limit box, the spread on the chosen derivatives is displayed on the current graphs.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The display of limit boxes have three settings, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 On\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 but visible and finally \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and invisible. There is no functional difference between the last two, it merely assists the clarity of the display by removing the additional graphical lines.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm35.bmp\}
|
|
\par 3D Graphic Display showing Limit Boxes as On
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The behavior and functionality of Limit boxes is identical between the 2D module and the 3D module with the obvious exception of the reduction of tolerances in only two dimensions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To control the status of Limit boxes use the pull down menu \i Graphics / Point Limits \plain\fs20 sub menu to set as \i Visible\plain\fs20 or to set as \i Use\plain\fs20 , (note that in this context use means \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 On\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Un-checking \i Use\plain\fs20 will turn limit boxes off but remain visible, whilst un-checking \i Visible\plain\fs20 will set limit boxes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 irrespective of the current setting).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The first use of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is as a constraint on how far a hard points position can be moved in any direction whilst joggling or dragging.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par If limit boxes are in use then you cannot \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Joggle\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 drag\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 a point such that it is moved outside of the limit box. Limit boxes are defined as separate +/- distances in each of the three axes, (or two for the 2D module), i.e. a total of six values for the 3D module and four for the 2D module.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Note that it is still possible to edit a point to a position outside of the limit box even when limit boxes are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . In this instance the limit box is resized to accommodate the new position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par If limit boxes are not in use, (visible or not), when a points position is changed by any of the edit modes, (edit, joggle or drag), the limit box is enlarged if the new position falls outside the currently defined points limits.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Because of this individual point editing, each suspension hard point has its own \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dimensions. These can be individually re-set using the \i Data / Point Tolerances / Edit Point Tolerances\'85\plain\fs20 menu, identify the required axle and point, and finally edit the values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm36.bmp\}
|
|
\par Selecting the single point prior to editing the limit box settings
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To re-set the limit boxes for all point in one step, select \i Data / Point Tolerances / Set All Point Tolerances To\'85\plain\fs20 menu and edit the required values, (note that you do not need to enter the negative directions as a \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve value, this is assumed).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm37.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the point limit box for all points
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The second use of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is as a design/manufacturing tolerance analysis tool. This is used in conjunction with the \i Data / Point Tolerances / Point Tolerance Analysis\plain\fs20 option to display on the graphs the spread of the current derivative over the defined limit box.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Tolerance analysis is applied to a single point at a time, the suspension being solved for its current position, each corner and each mid point of the limit box cube, (total of 27 positions for the 3D module, but see below about mid points). Before being able to run the tolerance analysis the analysis hard point needs to be identified, (select from tree style selection box). Subsequent tolerance runs will not request for the analysis hard point as by default the previously selected point will be used. To change to a different tolerance point use the \i Data / Point Tolerances / Set Tolerance Point\'85\plain\fs20 menu and identify the new point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm38.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example tolerance analysis Graphics and Graph displays
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par With tolerance analysis switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the model can be dynamically viewed and/or edited in exactly the same way as normally. Because of the increased number of solution loops the refresh time will be significantly increased. Once a tolerance point has been defined you can switch between tolerance on/off either via the menu \i Data / Point Tolerances / Point Tolerance Analysis\plain\fs20 or the equivalent toolbar icon.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm39.bmp\}
|
|
\par Tolerance analysis toolbar Icon
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard Tolerance boxes when visible can be picked and dragged just like a suspension hard point. Select a tolerance box corner point with the left mouse button and drag (or joggle) it to the required position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The mid points on each side can be optionally excluded from a points tolerance analysis. This is controlled by the \i Data / Point Tolerances / Solve Mid-Point\plain\fs20 menu option. When un-selected instead of 27 positions per point, this is reduced to 9 positions. The eight corners and the original position.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphs
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\fi-1435 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard The primary results display method for the application is through the derivatives graphs. Each graph show a single user selected derivative normally over the selected suspension articulation. Graph x-axis can also be set to any selected suspension result. Any number of graphs can be opened and positioned within the display using either the \i Graphs / New-Open\plain\fs20 menu or equivalent icon.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm40.bmp\}
|
|
\par New Graph toolbar Icon
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par In addition to plotting SDF on the graphs users can also plot Results from some of the graphical elements that have been added to the template, such as the distance between two points. These are then displayed and updated in the same way as SDF graphs. The only restriction is that Graphical element results are not involved in user lines and hence the optimizer.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The appearance and settings of each graph can be changed through either the \i Graphs\plain\fs20 pull down menu or the graph\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s right mouse menu. By selecting a graph with the right mouse button this implies that any changes made from the menu items is applied to the selected graph only.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm41.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graph right mouse button menu
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par As each new graph is opened the y-variable is taken as the next in the available list. To change the displayed variable, use the right-mouse menu and select from the available \i Y-Variable\plain\fs20 list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm42.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graph Y-variable list - right mouse button menu
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For a model with both front and rear axles defined, two data lines will be drawn one for each suspension end. They will use different symbols, line colours and show a key to aid identification of the two results. Similarly if both left and right hand wheels are displayed on the graphical display, so both lines will be drawn on the graphs, again using different line colours to identify them.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Eight lines per wheel can be displayed on each results graph, (ignoring repeat lines with tolerance analysis). These lines being the \b Data Line\plain\fs20 the \b User Line\plain\fs20 and 5x \b Scope Lines\plain\fs20 . The data line is the current hard points results. The user line is an editable curve principally for visually identifying the required targets for the derivative. The scope lines are for saving incremental results to enable comparison of subsequent changes to the stored plots.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A number of menus are available to aid moving data between the Line data sets. These include;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 Graphs / Copy Front/2D Data to User
|
|
\par \i Graphs / Copy Rear Data to User
|
|
\par Graphs / Copy Front/2D Scope to User
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 Graphs / Copy Rear Scope to User
|
|
\par Graphs / Clear Current User Line
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The \b Scope\plain\fs20 line data is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 grabbed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 by using the menu \i Graphs / Scope Line Store\plain\fs20 and is cleared by using \i Graphs / Clear Scope Store\plain\fs20 . Scope lines are stored in positions 1 to 5. An exclusive option is available to just store the current to position one and empty all other scope lines as well as an option to grab the current line into scope position one having first shuffled any other scope lines down one position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm43.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example graph showing all three line types displayed
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The deviation between the Data Line and the current Scope and User lines can be listed as a numerical sum. The displayed value is the cumulative sum of the difference for each calculated position. To display these values use \i Graphs / Visibility Deviation Values\plain\fs20 . The scope line used for the difference number can be changed to any of the five positions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm44.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example graph showing all deviation values displayed
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par As a useful aid to identifying suspension characteristics, the gradient of the displayed curves can be listed both next to each individual point and for the ride condition. To turn these on use the \i Graphs / Visibility / Deviation Values\plain\fs20 .\i
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm45.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example graph showing static gradient value highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Additional Graph properties that can be defined are;
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \i Axis Scales\plain\fs20 : Set the minimum and maximum x and y axis values. The autoscale option can also be used to automatically set the scales.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm46.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \i Visibility\plain\fs20 : Set the visibility of individual graph items, Grid Lines, Deviation Values, Point Symbols, Data Values, Derivative Values, Scope Line User Line, Fit Line, Plot Title, Extended Axis Labels and Animated Cursor.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \i Colours\plain\fs20 : Sets the colour of individual graph items, Grid Lines, Background, Axis Lines + Text, Border Region, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm47.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \i Line Markers\plain\fs20 : Set the marker for individual graph lines, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear, User Line 2D and User Line 3D.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm48.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \i Switch x-y\plain\fs20 : Switches the position of the x-y axis from the conventional x horizontal y vertical setup.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm49.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \i Marker Sizes\plain\fs20 : Sets the size of the markers used for each line type, Data Marker, Scope Marker and User marker.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \i Text Sizes\plain\fs20 : Sets the size of the text labels for, Graph Data Values, Compliance Title, Compliance Label and compliance value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \i Decimal Points Display\plain\fs20 : Defines the number of decimal points used to display numerical values. Individual values are X-Data Listing, Y-Data Listing, Derivative Data Listing, Scope Deviation, User Deviation, x-axis label, y-axis label and compliance graph.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \i Plot As Derivative, Plot as Integral\plain\fs20 , changes the drawn lines on the picked graph to instead of being the selected y variable, instead draws it as the derivative or integral as required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \i Plot As Left and Right, Plot As Left \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'96\f1 Right, Plot As Left + Right,\plain\fs20 changes the drawn lines on the picked graph, when showing both sides, to be either individual lines for left and right (default behavior) or Left side minus the Right side or Left side plus the Right side.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Enhanced Graphics
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Enhanced graphical elements can be switched on for improved visualization of the defined model. These options have no impact on the numerical results being just aids to model viewing.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm50.bmp\}
|
|
\par Enhanced Graphics Menu Item
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The elements affected by enhanced graphics are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Spring, Damper, Wheel (and tyre), Pivot Axes, Grid, Body, Tubes, Tri-Facets, Triad Symbol, Origin marker, C of G marker, Moving ground and wheels and Roll Axis. An additional set of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 that indicate a distance measure also form part of the Enhanced graphics function. These provide distance (either in component form or resultant form) from point to point, point to line, line to line etc. Other graphics primitives such as circles, spheres, planes and cylinders also form part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 set.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For the Body element it is not sufficient to turn this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to get the graphical body image drawn, unless a body type has already been defined either in the file or from the \i Data\plain\fs20 menu. To add/modify a default Body to the model use the \i Data / Body Type \plain\fs20 sub menu
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm51.bmp\}
|
|
\par Enhanced Graphics body data menu
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The settings for enhanced graphics visibility are stored to the users ini file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To toggle the enhanced graphics visibility\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s use the \i Graphics / Enhanced Visibility\plain\fs20 menus or the equivalent view toolbar icons.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm52.bmp\}
|
|
\par Enhanced Graphics toolbar icons highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par It is possible to view/edit all graphic settings through one single interface. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 display can be opened via the \i Edit / All Settings\plain\fs20 menu item or the \i Ctrl +E\plain\fs20 shortcut. This provides a single control point for all graphics settings with recourse to a large number of individual pull-down menu selections.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm53.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Graphics Tab Selected
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Defaults
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par All user definable settings are saved by the application when it has a normal program exit to its \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file. The location of this ini file depends on the version of Windows currently being used. The file name is \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 shark.ini\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 and will be saved to either C:\'5cwindows or C:\'5cwinnt. In some installations rather than being saved to the Windows folder it is stored on a by-user basis, in this instance it is stored under the Documents and Settings folder by individual login folder. This file is not directly editable by the user but there are occasions when it is useful to understand where it is and what it stores.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par All colours, symbols, visibility, line types and graphics size defaults that can be set by the user are saved to this file. In addition it will retain window sizes, folder settings, and recent open files.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par At application start-up this file is searched for in the relevant Windows folder and if found read in to overwrite the internal default settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par In some extreme instances this file can become corrupt preventing the application from correctly starting. It may in this instance be thus necessary to delete this file. Deleting this file will return all defaults to the internally \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hard coded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Data Entry
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Data entry is through standard Windows style dialogue boxes. These employ standard text and numeric widgets, together with check boxes and selection boxes. Spread sheet style entry where used supports cut and paste from external applications via the clipboard.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm54.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example spread sheet data entry
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When using \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 paste\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 into a Shark spread sheet it is only necessary to select the location of the top left hand cell of the paste are that the paste is intended to fill, do not drag and highlight the entire target area.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The main data entry to the program will be of the suspension hard points x,y,z co-ordiantes. The normal route to enter this is to select \i File / New \plain\fs20 and identify the required suspension end, (or both) and the required suspension template type(s). Each suspension template has default co-ordiante data associated with it to provide a easy model creation process. These default co-ordinates can be changed singularly through the on screen data edit modes of Edit, Joggle and Drag or be edited collectively through a spread sheet. The suspension data can be edited directly from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 File \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 New\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box at the point of model creation by selecting the relevant icon. Alternatively it can be accessed at any time after model creation via the relevant Data toolbar icon.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm55.bmp\}
|
|
\par Data toolbar icon \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 suspension co-ordinates display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Saving Hard Points
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par In the 3D module the suspension hard points can be saved either to a temporary storage for later recall during the program run, or saved to a new data file to provide a permanent record of the data input for subsequent program runs. The temporary storage facility is not available with the 2D module, the only recourse being to save the to disc as data files.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The menu item \i Data / Coordinates Save\'85\plain\fs20 option will open a text entry box to enable a unique \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 save-set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 label to be entered. This label is how the user can identify, re-load and delete it at a later stage. Coordinate sets saved in this way are only to temporary storage. Once the application is exited all coordinate save-sets are lost.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm56.bmp\}
|
|
\par 3D Save-Set \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Label Entry
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Once a coordinate set has been saved it can be recalled via the relevant menu entry under \i Data / Coordinates / Recall Saved\plain\fs20 sub menu. Additional \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Save-Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu items are available to delete either individual save sets, (\i Data / Coordinates / Delete /\'85.\plain\fs20 ) or all save-sets, (\i Data / Coordinates / Delete All\plain\fs20 ).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm57.bmp\}
|
|
\par 3D Save-Set \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Recalling a saved coordinate set
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Animation
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Both the 2D and 3D modules support animation of the defined models. The suspension system will be animated through a sequence of steps, appropriate to the current view mode. In the simplest mode this is over its current articulation distance, i.e. bump/rebound, roll, steer or combined. During the animation users can continue to edit and change co-ordinates, dynamically view the model or any other menu function as normally. To switch the animation on/off select the menu item \i View / Animation (On/Off)\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm58.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Toolbar icons - Animate Icon highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When in bump/rebound displacement type the animation display is affected by the current setting for ground plane solution type, (\i Solve / Motion / Ground Plane)\plain\fs20 . In one instance the body points are fixed and the ground plane is moved, whilst in the alternative case the ground plane is fixed and the body points are moved. This does not alter the numerical results for the suspension characteristics only the visual appearance of the animation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm59.bmp\}
|
|
\par File Toolbar icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Ground plane Icons highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The animation function also applies to view modes other than displacement articulation. These include deformed geometry, modal shape and Forced-Damped response. A screen display mode tool, \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\'85\plain\fs20 allows control of these display modes.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm60.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the Screen Display Mode
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par An AVI file writer is also available that can be used to save an animation file. Simple options are available to automatically create the animation sequence or users can build up the animation sequence by single frame picking.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm61.bmp\}
|
|
\par AVI file Writer Dialogue Display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Edit Undo
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par After a number of changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to step back through the changes undoing them step by step. The menu item \i Edit / Undo\plain\fs20 can be used for this or more conveniently the equivalent short cut key strokes \b Ctrl+Z\plain\fs20 . If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to undo.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The undo buffer length can be modified from the default value, (20 steps), via the \i SetUp / Undo Buffer Length\plain\fs20 menu item.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm62.bmp\}
|
|
\par Edit undo buffer length setting
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The edit undo buffer is always emptied whenever a model is loaded or saved. Thus either of these actions will lose the stored changes and hence the ability to undo any previous changes.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The undo buffer can be completely disabled if required by setting the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Buffer Length\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to zero. The only conceivable reason for doing this would be if it was causing an unexplained failure or it was required to run two instances of the product on the same machine, (presuming you are licensed to do so), where the undo scratch files would attempt to overwrite each other.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A by-product of the edit undo feature is that it is used to trap for machine / application failures. The temporary undo files are searched for on start-up and if found indicate a improper previous shut-down of the application. If detected the user is notified and the opportunity given to re-store the latest scratch file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm63.bmp\}
|
|
\par \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Data Recovery\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Converting 2D to 3D
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Suspension hard points in the 2D mode can be converted to full 3D data set via a program option. The user selects the 3D suspension type required and gives the additional data requirements requested, i.e. wheelbase, kingpin angle etc. Thus migration from a simple 2D concept suspension model to a full 3D suspension is a simple procedure.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Once the required 2D model has achieved the required suspension characteristics, to convert to 3D select \i Solve / Convert 2D to 3D\plain\fs20 . The displayed dialogue box requires the user to identify which of the valid default template types should be used, (this list will vary depending on the 2D template type used). In addition specific 3D properties need to be entered to assist in defining the properties in the third dimension.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm64.bmp\}
|
|
\par 2D to 3D conversion data
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par It is not possible to add a 2D converted model as the rear axle to an existing 3D model that has a front axle already defined. The existing 3D model data will be lost.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Managing User Lines
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par User Lines are displayed on the \uldb graph\plain\fs20 results to visually identify the required suspension characteristics as hard point geometry is modified. Since these user lines are not considered to be part of the model, they are not saved to the data file. Thus any entered target user lines are lost whenever the application is closed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The mechanism for the creation, saving and data-basing of user lines is the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Manage User Lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 function. Managing user lines is through \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Data Sets\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , any number of data sets can be created on either the local machine or a networked server. Each data set can then contain any number of user line sets, (in this instance a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user line set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 refers to a user line for each possible characteristic over each possible articulation mode).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The data set references are stored in the users \uldb ini file\plain\fs20 such that on program start-up these data sets are searched for and if found added to the menu list. Once on the menu list individual user line sets can be loaded from a data set and hence used within the result graphs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To create a new data set select \i Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Create New DataSet\'85\plain\fs20 and browse to the required file location, (creating a new folder if necessary).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm65.bmp\}
|
|
\par Creating a new Data Set
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par As part of the data set creation you will be required to define a unique label for the data set. This unique label is how the data set will be referred to when selecting sets from, sets to, or deleting from the list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm66.bmp\}
|
|
\par Defining the data set label
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Creating a data set will automatically add it to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 loaded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data sets list. If you require to pick up a data set created by an other user, (and perhaps saved to another networked machine/server), use the \i Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Include DataSet\'85\plain\fs20 use the browser in the conventional way to locate the required data set.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par When initially created a data set will have no saved user line sets. You must subsequently add your user line sets to the required data set to make it available on subsequent re-use.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm67.bmp\}
|
|
\par Adding the current user lines definition to a data set.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Once a data set contains user lines these can be subsequently used by selecting \i Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Load From\plain\fs20 and then select the required data set and user line set, (remember that one data set can contain many user line sets).
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Compliance Solving
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The standard solution technique within SHARK is for rigid body kinematic motion only. A separately licensed feature enables a linear compliant analysis to be superimposed on top of the incremental kinematic solutions. This allows users to perform modal analysis and Forced-Damped response.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To invoke the compliant solution select the \i Solve / 3D Compliance\plain\fs20 menu option, (note that the compliant solver is not available in the 2D module). If this menu item is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 greyed out\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 you are not licensed for this feature, (check with your software vendor or local support staff).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm68.bmp\}
|
|
\par File toolbar icon - Enabling the compliant solver
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par In its simplest form the compliant solver requires no additional data to be added to the model, (default values are assumed for tyre vertical stiffness and suspension spring rate and preload). It will treat all connection points as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 spherical rigids\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . In this form the rigids do have a stiffness value, but a high value. The default value for the rigids can be modified by the user, see \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm69.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rigids\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 stiffness value
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par With all rigid joints in the model, the only significant deflection will be caused by the flexibility of the tyre vertical stiffness. The deflection is caused by the suspension spring load. Tyre vertical stiffness values can be accessed through the \i Data / Compliance Data / Tyre Properties\'85\plain\fs20 menu (when in compliant mode) or through the equivalent \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graph + Data\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar icon. Whilst the spring properties are accessed through the \i Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties\'85
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm70.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the compliance data spring properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Additional graphical display features are used within the compliant solver, the visibility of which is set under the \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility\plain\fs20 sub menu and their properties under the\i Graphics / Compliance Colours \plain\fs20 and \i Graphics / Compliance Sizes\plain\fs20 sub menus.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm71.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 all-rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 compliant model graphical display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par With the compliance model enabled additional results options are available. These include deflections and forces of the joints. Whilst deflections of the joints will be small, until we add compliant bushes, the joint forces can be used to list forces in the system due to the spring load.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par All rigid joints can be edited to have \uldb compliant bush\plain\fs20 properties with three translation and three rotation stiffnesses defined. The orientation of the bushes can be aligned along any user specified local coordinate system.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Additional \uldb external forces\plain\fs20 can be applied to the model, any number of forces can be attached to individual parts under user defined magnitude and direction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The majority of the kinematic plotting, editing and viewing functions are unchanged when using the compliant solver. The only exception involves the data editing of a suspension hard point. With the compliant solver on the data edit window is extended to include the points bush properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par You can toggle between kinematic and compliant solver types with no loss of data. Compliant bush properties and external forces are all saved as part of the model. Note that even if a model contains compliant data when it is first loaded into the application it will appear in kinematic mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The Advanced analysis options for modal analysis and forced-damped response are also packaged under the compliance module, and thus you must be both licensed for and using the compliance module to be able to view these options.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Compliance Bushes
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The joints in a compliant model can be either rigid, (in which case they use the default high stiffness value), or bushed. Bushed joints require the user to define three translational stiffness rates values and three rotational stiffness rates, (although some may be zero, particularly the rotational rates).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par In compliant solver mode picking a suspension hard point to edit will display not only the points coordinates but also its bush properties. To switch between a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Ball Joint\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 (rigid) and a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 (compliant) check the required box in the edit display. When set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the bush properties can then be edited.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm72.bmp\}
|
|
\par Bush Editing display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Compliant option ringed.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The bush definition requires a local coordinate system to be defined and then three translation stiffnesses and three rotational stiffnesses. The stiffnesses are defined in this local bush axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Bush coordinate systems have their origin at the suspensions hard point coordinates. The local z-axis is then defined as either, an absolute position, a position relative to the origin, or as another point in the model. In the case of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 point in the model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 this is a continuous setting such that if the reference point is moved the bush coordinate system is automatically modified.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To complete the axis definition a second point is defined that is assumed to lie in the x-z plane. The point in a plane approach is used rather than a second axis point as it is easier to identify a plane rather than an orthogonal axis. This x-z plane point can be either in absolute coordinates or relative coordinates, (note relative to the origin not relative to the z-axis point).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The defined bush coordinate system can be seen on the 3D graphics display. Both the definition points and the actual orthogonal axes are drawn, subject to separate visibility switches. To ensure both are visible use \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Bush Axis Points\plain\fs20 and \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Bush Local Axes\plain\fs20 . When these items are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 they will be drawn on the 3D display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm73.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the visibility options for the Bush axes.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par If the bush axes definition points are visible they can be dynamically picked and edited on screen just like any hard point, (the only difference is that to avoid cluttering the display, the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are not drawn through them). Remember that if a z-axis point is defined as a model point then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragging\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the hard point will also drag the z-axis definition point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par If using coincident points, bush axes definition points will appear on the point lists as model hard point number + 1000 or model hard point number + 2000. The +1000 point is the z-axis point whilst the +2000 point is the x-z plane point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm74.bmp\}
|
|
\par 3D Display - Bush axes visibility
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The bush axes definition points are displayed with labels Pz and Px-z, The local axis points have labels X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To enable a Forced-Damped response to be predicted in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliance\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode, damping values for each bush need to be defined. Default values are applied in a similar manner to stiffness, the setting for which can be edited through \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\plain\fs20 . Note that for a bush the damping is defined in terms of a loss angle (deg). Damping is also included for the damper(s), this is editable as a property of the damper and is defined in conventional damping terms (N.s/m).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm75.bmp\}
|
|
\par Damping \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Editing the Damper Value
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Compliance External Forces
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par External forces can be applied as part of the compliant model. External forces are defined in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sets\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The external forces can be applied either in isolation or in addition to the defined spring force. It is also possible to switch all external forces off, or individual force sets, (note you could turn both spring and external forces off and thus have no forces or compliant displacements in the model).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm76.bmp\}
|
|
\par Controlling the inclusion of the Spring Force
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The force set intended for interactive user use is the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 zero\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 position set. By default an additional 7 further force sets are pre-filled to simulate Lotus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 analysis load cases. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 sets are saved to the users ini file such that they may be modified to suit particular end users requirements. /users can add/delete user force sets as required. Each force set can contain any number of forces, each force having a defined magnitude attachment point and orientation. To edit the external force data select \i Data / Compliance Data / External Forces\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The edit display shows one force set and one force in the set at a time to view the properties of other forces or sets use the two sets of arrow keys to migrate through the defined forces.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Each force is associated to a suspension corner of the model, and a part of the model for that corner. Its properties include a magnitude and a direction defined by two points. The two points define the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 head\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tail\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 of the force. Head and tail definitions can be in absolute coordinates or relative coordinates. The relative coordinates being relative to a chosen hard point, (note that added to the hard points list is the tyre contact point).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm77.bmp\}
|
|
\par External Force Data Edit \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Add force to set highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Each force set has its own \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on/off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 setting, likewise each individual force within a force set has a separate \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on/off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 allowing complete customisation of the defined forces.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm78.bmp\}
|
|
\par External Force 3D Display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Longitudinal Force to TCP
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par External forces are displayed on the 3D graphical display. The display shows both the definition points and the force vector. The external force visibilities are set via \i Graphics / Compliance Visibilities\plain\fs20 individual menu items are available the force vector and the force definition axis. External force vectors can be drawn either in fixed length form or at a scaled length, (scaled length based on magnitude). To change the fixed length size, or the magnitude scalar, edit the relevant fields in \i Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Edit Sizes\'85\plain\fs20 Note that changing the visibility setting of forces to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 does not imply that they are not used in the calculation of forces.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm79.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting external force visibilities and style
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par If the force axis definition points are visible they can be dynamically picked and edited on screen just like any hard point, (the only difference is that to avoid cluttering the display, the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are not drawn through them). Remember that if an axis point is defined as relative to a model point then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragging\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the hard point will also drag the axis definition point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par If using coincident points, force axes definition points will appear on the point lists as force number + 3000 or force number + 4000. The +3000 point is the head axis point whilst the +4000 point is the tail axis point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Only one force set can be displayed on the 3D display at any one time. By default this is the zero set. The results displayed in the graphs will also be those of the currently displayed force set. Thus when changing to a different force set both the 3D display and the graphs change to reflect the new load set.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The main use of multiple load sets is to provide a set of \uldb compliance coefficients\plain\fs20 based on standard analysis cases. These can show at a glance the overall compliant response of the suspension model.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Compliance Coefficients
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The compliance coefficients function is aimed at providing a single display of the overall compliant behavior of the vehicle model when subjected to a series of standard forces.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par A number of \uldb external force\plain\fs20 sets are defined that together specify a series of tests. Each force set can contain a number of different forces that are applied to various parts with defined magnitude and direction. To assess the compliant response to these force sets using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graphs is time consuming and not immediately visual. The compliant coefficients display provide a overall user definable summary of the compliant response.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To display the coefficients display select \i Results / Compliance Bar Values\'85\plain\fs20 The display shows for each force set, (including force set 0), a series of bar charts. The number of bars displayed on each forces sets chart depends on both the number of axles modelled and the number of variables selected.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm80.bmp\}
|
|
\par Compliance Coefficients display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Each bar represents the difference between the kinematic value and the compliant value of the chosen variable at the static ride condition. The compliant value can optionally include the spring force, (see right mouse menu on display).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The height of the bar is controlled by a notional scalar, each variable in each force set has its own full screen deflection scalar. To edit the scalar values select the required variables bars with right mouse button and select \i Edit Scale Setting\plain\fs20 . Note that the right mouse menu will appear in either \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 brief\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 long\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 form depending if the right mouse pick is on a bar area or just on the chart.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm81.bmp\}
|
|
\par Compliance Coefficients \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 long\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu form
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Variables can be added to or removed from a individual load sets display using the \i Add Extra Variable \plain\fs20 and \i Remove Selected Variable\plain\fs20 right mouse menu items.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Each bar can have its own guide limit line added to its display, (by default all values are set as 0 and hence don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t appear). This is intended to provide a visual guide to the target curve without needing to read the numerical values of each bar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm82.bmp\}
|
|
\par Guide Lines Added to Set 1 display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par By default, force set zero is the set displayed on the 3D display and in the graphs. This is indicated on the Compliance display by the red box around its chart. To change the display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s to show one of the other force sets use the \i Make Force Set Default\plain\fs20 option from the right mouse menu. The red highlight will then indicate the change and the displays refreshed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The right mouse menu also provides an easy method for turning individual force sets \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , (\i Turn Force Set \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\f1 )\plain\fs20 , gaining access to the external force data, (\i Open External Force Edit),\plain\fs20 make all force sets on, (\i Turn All Force Sets On\plain\fs20 ) and toggle the inclusion of the spring force in the compliance calculations, (\i Include Spring force in Set)\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Compliance coefficients can also be listed in textual form, \i Results / Compliance Text Values\'85\plain\fs20 . This text listing can be modified in a similar way to the original bar chart display by positioning the cursor at the relevant point in the text, (ensure you actually select the position), and using the right mouse button to pull up the appropriate menu options. This gives access to the same functionality as the bar charts.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm83.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Compliance Coefficients Text Listing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Deformed Geometry Animation
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par As with the kinematic solution the compliant model can be \uldb animated\plain\fs20 over the currently specified articulation. The additional feature of animating the displacements of the compliant model is the inclusion to the display of the calculated forces. To set the visibility of the calculated forces set \i Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Calculated Forces.\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The additional animation type that can be applied to a compliant model is that of the deformed geometry. This is similar in concept to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mode shape\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 animation used in Finite Element packages.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm84.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Deformed Geometry Plot
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Deformed geometry animation, cycles through a series of display steps between the kinematic solutions positions and the compliant position. This animation is performed for a specific articulation position, (normally the ride position), although the user can select which animation position to animate at, (\i View / Set Display Mode Tool\plain\fs20 ). Where 0 is the ride position 1 is the first bump/roll or steer position, (as appropriate). If the position number entered is greater than the number of increments it will be clipped to the maximum.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Because the deformations can be small animating in steps between kinematic and compliant may need scaling to enhance visualization. The deformed geometry scalar can be set by \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\plain\fs20 . The setting of this will distort all displayed 3D compliant images, so should be set back to 1.0 when not required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm85.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the deformed geometry scalar
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Deformed geometry animation can be turned \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 with one of two options, \i View / Animation (On/Off), \plain\fs20 with Screen Display Mode set to \i Deformed Geometry\plain\fs20 . The two options are with or without spring forces. Whilst both options function in the same way the second option will illustrate the bush deflection due to the applied external forces only and not the combination of external forces and spring force. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set Display Mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tool allows a convenient single point to control animation and display modes, \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm86.bmp\}
|
|
\par Specifying Deformed Geometry Display via the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 display mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tool.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Hard Point Joggle
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The suspension hard points can be selected from the screen via the mouse and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 joggled\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to a new position, the suspension derivatives being re-calculated as the hard point is moved. The selected derivatives that are being displayed graphically are updated during the hard point screen joggling. Point joggling can be in a 2D view along both viewed axes, a single axis or joggling in a 3D view along a selected axis direction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm21.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Joggling mode, tracking lines show Y axis direction.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The majority of the point joggling functionality is performed using a combination of left and right mouse buttons. The mouse buttons are also used extensively for the dynamic viewing option and thus this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sharing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 requires a switch between \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point joggling is one part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode. The other two parts are direct editing and point \uldb dragging\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To indicate when the application is in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode and when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode not only are the relevant menus and icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 but also \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are added to the graphic display when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm18.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Indicating in Dynamic View mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To change to editing mode un-select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 using \i View / Dynamic Viewing / Off\plain\fs20 . Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm19.bmp\}
|
|
\par Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When in point joggling mode \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are drawn to indicate the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 direction(s). To change the current tracking direction the right mouse button will cycle through the available tracking direction options. A similar action is achieved by selecting the mouse icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm20.bmp\}
|
|
\par Mouse Icon \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Cycles through tracking options.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Selecting any of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit icons\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The joggle symbol indicates the number of tracking directions available and also which of the four arrow keys, (left, right, up and down), is likely to be used. To use joggle select either Ctrl + Arrow Key for coarse joggle or Shift + Arrow Key for fine joggle. The joggle fine size is a tenth of the coarse size, the coarse size can be set via \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm87.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the default Coarse Joggle Step Size
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Point joggling is affected by both \uldb Groups\plain\fs20 and \uldb Coincident points\plain\fs20 . The settings for groups and point coincidence change a single point pick and joggle event into a potential single point pick but multiple point joggle, (using a temporary group). In the case of groups, the current groups points are all translated by the same amount. Whilst for point coincidence only the point or points selected from a displayed list are moved, again all selected points are moved by the same amount.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm22.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Coincident point pick
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The coincident point selection feature is switched on via the \i Edit / Point Coincidence Pick \plain\fs20 menu. When switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident, can be changed via the \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20 menu. A similar tolerance exists to control whether a point is within the pick region.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Point Coincidence
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Point Coincidence function controls the modification of hard point coordinates. When enabled selecting a point that is in close proximity to another the user is prompted to identify, which of the points within the coincidence tolerance is to be edited. To enable point coincidence select \i Edit / Point Coincidence\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm88.bmp\}
|
|
\par Enabling point coincidence
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Coincidence tolerance defines the radius in the view plane from the picked point that is used to check for coincident points. If coincident points are found a menu is displayed listing the points found. You can then either select one of the identified points or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Selecting \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 all points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is equivalent creating a temporary group, all points are then moved by the same amount, (note that this does not make them coincident).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm22.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Coincident point pick
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When the coincident point function is switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident, can be changed via the \i SetUp / Gen Defaults\'85\plain\fs20 menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm89.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the Coincident point tolerance
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Data File Text Editor
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Data file text editor is a dialogue box that can be used to view and edit data files in a purely textual environment. This is an advanced user feature only that is primarily intended for debugging use and is not recommended as a normal working practice. This is primarily because the data file format is not formally declared.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To load a saved data file into it use the local menu \i File / Open\plain\fs20 alternatively to load the current model into the display select from the local menu \i File / Load Current\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Any edited changes can either be saved to a file , \i File / Save \plain\fs20 or \i File / Save As\plain\fs20 or the current model can be updated with the contents of the text display using \i File / Make Current\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Note that the current model and the data text display are only synchronized when a \i Load Current \plain\fs20 or \i Make Current\plain\fs20 command has just been made. Once a data change in either has been made they will only then be synchronized when the change is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 made current\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to the other.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm90.bmp\}
|
|
\par Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Text Data File Editor
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Hard Point Editing
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Hard point editing is the simplest method of editing single suspension hard points values. In the 3D \uldb module\plain\fs20 complete display and editing of the hard points can be carried out via the alternative \uldb spread sheet display\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The mouse buttons are used extensively for both editing and the dynamic viewing option and thus this \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sharing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 requires a switch between \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Direct editing is one part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode. The other two parts are point dragging and joggle editing.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To indicate when the application is in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode and when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode not only are the relevant menus and icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 checked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 but also \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are added to the graphic display when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm18.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Screen \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Indicating in Dynamic View mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To change to editing mode un-select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 using \i View / Dynamic Viewing / Off\plain\fs20 . Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm19.bmp\}
|
|
\par Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When in edit mode \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking lines\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are drawn to indicate the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tracking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 direction(s). This is not relevant to the hard point-editing mode as tracking only applies to the dragging and joggle edit modes.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Selecting any of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit icons\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dynamic view\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par When in direct editing mode to edit a point select it with the left mouse button on the graphics display. The displayed dialogue box will be different if in the 2D module or the 3D module.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm91.bmp\}
|
|
\par 2D Direct Data Editing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par 3D data editing lists the selected hard points x, y and z co-ordinate. To change simply edit and select \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Ok\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Note that the cancel button or the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Esc\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 key will close the edit box and ignore any changes. To subsequently undo a change, use the \uldb undo\plain\fs20 function.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm92.bmp\}
|
|
\par 3D Direct Data Editing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For the 3D module, in addition to the points x, y and z co-ordinates, other properties are also displayed that can be edited. These include;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point Long Label\plain\fs20 , the long-label used in graphics, menus and listings to identify this point. Maximum of 80 characters long.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point Short Label\plain\fs20 . the alternative short-label or point No. used to identify this point. Can be numeric or textual up to a maximum of 8 characters.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Co-ordinate\plain\fs20 , note that the co-ordinates may be either global or local values, depending on the definition co-ordinates system. If local values they will have the string \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 (local)\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 on their description.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Definition Coordinate System\plain\fs20 , identifies if the point is in the default global co-ordinate system or one of the optional user defined local axis systems.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Optionally visible variables
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Part 1 for Point\plain\fs20 , identifies the first part that the point is associated with. A point must be associated with at least one part and a maximum of two parts. (a point associated with two parts indicates the connection point between these two parts, i.e. a joint. Normally the association of points to parts is made directly by the template definition or by graphics picking when the point is created.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Part 2 for Point\plain\fs20 , identifies the second part that the point is associated with. A point must be associated with at least one part and a maximum of two parts. (a point associated with two parts indicates the connection point between these two parts, i.e. a joint. Normally the association of points to parts is made directly by the template definition or by graphics picking when the point is created. For a point associated with only one part this option would be set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 None\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Import and Export to Adams Sub Systems
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par A utility routine is provided that enables suspension hard point coordinates to be transferred to and from an Adams sub-system model. This transfer is facilitated by the use of a supplementary text string that can be assigned to each hard point within Lotus Suspension Analysis (LSA). This text string is the label that is used within the Adams sub-system (and thus relies on consistent naming within your Adams sub-systems). The routine works on one end at a time since an Adams sub-system model would normally only have a single suspension corner modeled. Thus if the LSA model is a full vehicle, the user needs to identify which LSA end is to be used. See local menu setting under \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Data / Import to Front\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Data /Import to Rear\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The same setting is assumed on Export only the local menu text changes.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm93.bmp\}
|
|
\par The Import/Export Display , Shown for Import, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 switch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 items highlighted.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The import and export routine also has the option to shift the values, scale the values and switch the axis order. On import the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is added to the value in the Adams sub-system, whilst on export the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is subtracted from the LSA value. A shift value can be defined independently for x, y and z. A similar editing display is provided for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 settings, the default values for which are 1.0.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm94.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values for Import and Export.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The axis switch settings are set through a selection display. The default setting is for direct association of equivalent axes, i.e. x with x etc. This can be changed should a switch be required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm95.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Switch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 settings for Import and Export.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The individual point text strings are stored as part of the template descriptions. Thus they can either be edited through the normal template editor dialogue display on the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tab or they can be edited from within the Import/Export window via the \i Data / Edit Point Label Strings\plain\fs20 menu option. In both case these settings would need to be saved either with the data file, (by enabling template save to the data file, see settings menu options) or by saving the modified template as a user defined or custom template. Each point can have three associated text strings, the first is for the point position whilst two others are provided to identify local bush axis positions. All text fields are optional and can be set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Not Defined\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if not required or unknown. A special text description \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 DERIVED\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is used for some points such as the stub axle point and the strut lower slider axis point. These are not extracted directly from the sub system file but are calculated either in the case of the strut point from the other points or as in the case of the stub axle point, from additional extracted data values. The point strings can also be math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s functions such as [(P1+P2)/2.0]. The use of a math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s function is indicated by the use of square brackets [ ] to bound the string. This indicates that the point string should be treated as a math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s string with reference to other points via their position in the template i.e. P4 is the fourth point in the template. As points are processed in order it is possible to use this sequence to use a math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s function to define point 5 and then reference point 5 in a latter points definition, say point 8. Note that the point number is position in the template and not the local \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 point number\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 as defined in column 1 of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tab of the template editor. The math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s function reader is loosely based around Fortran syntax. Key intrinsic functions recognized include, SQRT, SIN, COS, TAN, SIND, COSD, TAND, ASIN, ATAN, ACOS, ASIND, ACOSD, ATAND, LOG10, SINH, COSH, TANH, LOG, EXP AND ABS. The standard symbols +, -, * (for multiply), /, **(for power) are used whilst simple round ( ) brackets can be used within the string to force computation sequence.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm96.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Text \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Strings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 through the Template Editor.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par From within the Import display three menu items are provided to access the three text fields, \i Data / Edit Point Label Strings, Data / Edit Bush Z-axis Label Strings\plain\fs20 and \i Data / Edit Bush X-Z Plane Label Strings\plain\fs20 . These provide a local means of editing the template settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm97.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the point label strings from the import display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Additional strings are used to identify supplementary model data. They also provide a means by which \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is identified since this may be subject to local language issues. The \i Data / Edit General Label Strings\plain\fs20 menu item displays these current settings. Because they are considered local user settings rather than model specific they are saved as part of the users ini file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm98.bmp\}
|
|
\par Changing the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 General\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Settings Strings.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To import hard points from a sub model first ensure that the relevant point strings and general strings are correct for the current template. Open the import display and use the \i File / Open (sub system) \plain\fs20 to locate and load the required sub system model. The data extraction can be previewed in the lower display section using the \i File / Import Hard Points (Preview)\plain\fs20 menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm99.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Hard Point Import, template type 1.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To populate the current LSA model with the values extracted from the sub-system use the \i File / Import Hard Points.\plain\fs20 If settings have been changed from the default for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 switch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 they are applied in the order \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Shift\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Scale\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Switched\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The Export function works in the same manner as Import but the order of shift, scale and switch is reversed.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Adding a Hard Point to a Model
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The number of hard points in a model is controlled by the appropriate template. Points can be added by modifying the template using the standard template editor, see \i File / Edit Templates\plain\fs20 menu item. Additional points can be added to a model directly through the graphical viewer via the \i Edit / Add to Model / Add Point\plain\fs20 menu items. These added points would not normally be used to modify the overall connectivity but more likely be used to add additional user graphics.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm100.bmp\}
|
|
\par Adding a Hard Point to the existing model, add options highlighted.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Points can be added through the menu either to ground (i.e. the body) or to any picked part. When adding to the body the user must provide the new position in global coordinates. A point added to an existing part can be added in absolute coordinates, relative to a point or between two points. When adding points to a part, once the part is picked the display will switch to just show that part and its associated points in a similar manner to the free body display. When in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Part\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 pick mode, the part labels are made visible and the part \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 centre\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 points drawn.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm101.bmp\}
|
|
\par Adding a Hard Point via the template editor, .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Adding Graphics to a Model
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Graphical elements are stored as part of the template structure and control the visual appearance of a model. The user can add additional graphics elements by direct editing of the template through the standard template editor, see \i File / Edit Templates\plain\fs20 menu item. Additional graphical elements can be added to a model directly through the graphical viewer via a series of menu items under the \i Graphics / Add Graphic\plain\fs20 and \i Graphics / Add Measure\plain\fs20 sub-menus.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm102.bmp\}
|
|
\par Adding a Graphical Element to the existing model, add options highlighted.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Each added element is appended to the current template list, thus by adding graphics from the menu the user is modifying the template. To retain these changes users need to ensure they save the modified template either by inclusion into the data file, or by saving the template to a custom or user template file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Graphical elements can be picked on screen and deleted if required. Again this will remove them from the current template and permanent changes would need to be saved as indicated above.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The list of available graphical elements is broken down into seven sub sections listed below;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Line
|
|
\par \tab Cylinder
|
|
\par \tab Circle
|
|
\par \tab Sphere
|
|
\par \tab Facet
|
|
\par \tab Plane
|
|
\par \tab Components
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The list of available measure elements is broken down into two sub sections listed below;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \tab Distance
|
|
\par \tab Angle
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Each sub section has a number of specific ways of defining the associated primitive.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b \tab Lines:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Vector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required, a line is drawn through the first point who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s direction is set by the vector defined by the second and third picks, points need not be on the same part. The first and second picks can be the same point. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Xvector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global X axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Yvector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Y axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Zvector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Z axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \cf1 Pnt-Plane-Norm:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction normal to the selected plane. The plane is identified by three point picks. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \cf1 Pnt-UserVector:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by a user vector. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \cf1 Pnt-Vector^Vector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the cross product of two user defined vectors. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b \tab Cylinders:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pivot:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Pivot graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Tube:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Tube graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Vector-Radius-Length:\plain\fs20 Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the second and third point picks. The radius and length of the cylinder are defined directly.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b \tab Circles:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required through which is drawn a circle, both the circle centre and radius are calculated and displayed as part of the graphical display.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Cntr-Rad-Norm:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point of a defined radius and who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s normal is defined by the second and third picks. The first and second picks can be the same point.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Cntr-Pnt-Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point and is drawn through the second point, (i.e. defines the radius), in a plane that contains the third picked point. All picked points must be different.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Normal:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn through the first point about the defined normal vector. All picked points must be different. The derived circle centre and radius is drawn as part of the graphical element display.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b \tab Spheres:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the first pick and the radius is set by the second pick.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required. The sphere is centered at the pick and given the radius specified by the user.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Dia:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the mid point of the two picks, the radius being half the distance between them.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Four unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is drawn through the selected four points. Four points will define a unique sphere who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s calculated radius and centre position is identified as part of the drawn graphical element.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b \tab Facets:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Triangular Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Four noded Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Four unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. Whilst points need not be in a plane, any facet drawn of non-planar nodes is not fully defined.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b \tab Planes:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds a plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-X-Y Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an X-Y plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-X-Z Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an X-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Y-Z Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an Y-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-UserVector Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. The orientation of the plane is controlled by two user defined vectors. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b \tab Distance
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the total distance between the two points.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Line Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the total perpendicular distance between the point and the line.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Line-Line Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines as a total distance.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Plane Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane as a total distance.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b \tab Components
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the distance between the two points in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Line Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the perpendicular distance between the point and the line in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Line-Line Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Plane Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b \tab Angles:
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \plain\fs20\cf1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between three points graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The middle picks is the point for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the three point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Z-Axis Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global Z-axis vector. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Z-Axis X-X component Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global Z-axis vector but only the component around the X-X axis. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Z-Axis Y-Y component Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global Z-axis vector but only the component around the Y-Y axis. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt X-Axis Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global X-axis vector. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt X-Axis Z-Z component Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global X-axis vector but only the component around the Z-Z axis. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt X-Axis Y-Y component Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global X-axis vector but only the component around the Y-Y axis. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Y-Axis Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global Y-axis vector. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Y-Axis Z-Z component Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the global axis vector. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\fi1415\tx355 \cf1 Pnt-Pnt Y-Axis X-X component Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between a vector and an axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The two picks define a vector, (the first point being the start of the vector) and the angle is relative to the appropriate global axis vector. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Individual graphical element types have their own specific data requirements some are unique to each element and others are relevant to each class of element. These settings and values can be edited by picking the relevant element. Hint, hover over the approximate centre of an element and check the status bar prompt to confirm required element will be selected.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm103.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 A \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Pnt-Plane Dist\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Graphical Element added to a type 1 model.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Free Body Graphical Display
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The free body display mode can be switched on via the \i View / Free Body Diagram\'85 \plain\fs20 pull down menu. When enabled the display changes to show only the selected part and it\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s associated points, graphical elements and forces. In this mode the interface functions exactly as normal, i.e. dynamically viewed, animated, edited etc but only that parts elements are involved. A small selection box is used to control the free body mode enabling the user to select the required corner and part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm104.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the Part for Free Body Display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The free body mode can be cancelled either by un-checking the menu item that was used to enable it, or by closing the free body selection box.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm105.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example free body display for a lower wishbone in compliant mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Kinematic Sum Display
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The kinematic sum display is a means by which the weighted sum of the deviations of selected results when compared to a target value can be displayed. This single value allows a simple metric to be used to compare a change in a particular suspension property effect over a whole range of results.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm106.bmp\}
|
|
\par Kinematic Sum Display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Results that can be included into the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sum\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 include all graphs results, (visible or otherwise), and all compliance bar graphs. Individual weighting factors can be applied to each selected result. A number of convenience functions are provided to automatically set these weighting values mostly based around the current display axes settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The sum value is the cumulative of all individual deviations from target. In the case of the compliance coefficients these targets are set by selecting each bar chart in turn and defining the required value. In the case of the characteristic graphs, (i.e. toe, camber castor etc.), the target line is the user line set for each graph. The deviation is then the difference between either the single target value (for the compliance coefficients) or the average of the differences of the actual curve from the defined line for a characteristic graph.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm107.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Characteristic Graph, showing its contribution to the sum.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The importance of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Kinematic Sum\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is that since it can be used by the user to view the impact of a single change on a set of potential compromise results, it can also be used by an optimization routine as indicating the direction of change for achieving an optimum design. This optimization potential is covered in the next section.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 The Internal Optimizer
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The kinematic sum is used to apply a sensitivity-based optimization to the model. Parameters are defined that have a start value, range and increment. Parameters can be point position, bush stiffness and bush orientation. The Kinematic sum as discussed previously can optionally include any characteristics graph or compliance coefficient.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm108.bmp\}
|
|
\par Expanded Optimizer Display, \i View / Details\plain\fs20 option checked.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The settings for the optimization are editable through a single display. With sections for defining which results to include, weightings to apply and settings for parameters.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm109.bmp\}
|
|
\par Optimizer Parameter Summary.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Parameters are applied in reverse sensitivity order, the most sensitive applied last. A sensitivity threshold value is applied such that parameters that do not significantly affect the sum can be automatically screened. As the optimization is proceeding the graphical display is updated and a rolling display shows the changes to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sum\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm110.bmp\}
|
|
\par Optimizer Rolling Sum Display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Once the optimizer run has finished the user is asked to confirm acceptance of the changes. Selecting \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 no\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 will return the model to the pre-run condition. User can stop a run early either through manual interjection or through a software defined minimum target value.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Display Units
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The units used in the display of both the data and the results can be changed from the default settings of Angle - deg, Length \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 mm, Mass - kg and Force - N to other available options. The options are given below for each variable type. A user defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 unit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option is also available for each parameter.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Angle:\tab Radian
|
|
\par \tab \tab MilliRadian
|
|
\par \tab \tab Degree (default)
|
|
\par \tab \tab Minutes
|
|
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \tab Length:\tab Meter
|
|
\par \tab \tab milliMeter (default)
|
|
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \tab Mass:\tab Kilogram (default)
|
|
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \tab Force:\tab Newton (default)
|
|
\par \tab \tab decaNewton
|
|
\par \tab \tab User-Defined
|
|
\par
|
|
\par It must be remembered that this is a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 viewing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option only and data files will always be saved using the original \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 unit settings. This also applies to the text editor within the program since this is merely an editor of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 saved\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data files.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par The units can be set either from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 New Model display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or directly from the menu items \i SetUp / Change Units\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm111.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Opening the units Tool from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 New model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 display.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The settings for each unit includes a scale factor, the number of decimal points (to add or remove compared to the default settings) and the label.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm112.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Changing the units display.
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 These view unit settings are saved as part of the users configuration \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file and are not saved with the data file. Whilst the units can be changed at any time, it should not be carried out when you have a data display window open as this could lead to incorrect data unit conversions.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Modal Analysis
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Modal analysis can be applied to any compliant model. To correctly predict modal frequencies and shapes the part masses and bush stiffness\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 must be defined. The modal analysis calculates as many natural frequencies as there are degrees of freedom in the model. Frequencies are sorted into ascending order and the user can select an individual mode to view/animate. Mode shapes can be selected and animated via the \i View / Set Display Mode Tool\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm113.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the display mode to Mode Shape \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 8th mode Selected.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The required mode shape can either be set via the selection box to the right of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mode shape\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toggle or through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Modal Frequencies\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 results plot. To display the Modal Frequencies results plot select \i Results / Modal Analysis Display\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm114.bmp\}
|
|
\par Modal Frequencies Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 8th mode Selected.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard The selected modal shape is also shown drawn or animated in the main 3d view with an associated scalar. This allows the user to view each mode shape in turn.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm115.bmp\}
|
|
\par Modal Frequencies Main View \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 5th mode Selected.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Forced-Damped Analysis
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Forced damped analysis takes a compliant modal and calculates the amplitudes of all points in the model over a specified frequency range under the current force set. Defining the required force set is important as this controls which natural modes will be excited. The force can optionally include the spring force(s). Damping is added to the model for both the damper elements and the bushes. Bush damping is defined by a loss angle setting whilst the damper elements have their damping directly defined.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm116.bmp\}
|
|
\par Changing the View to Forced Damped \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 15.4 Hz selected
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The forced-damped display can be for any specified frequency. This can be set either via the slider in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 set display mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box or directly in the value entry. In addition the response of the system through a complete frequency sweep can be displayed, \i Results / Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display\plain\fs20 . The displayed graph can be control to set the required range and amplitude scales. Because this speed sweep is relatively time consuming to perform, (in Shark terms at least), this speed sweep display is only updated when first opened or when the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 refresh\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option is selected.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm117.bmp\}
|
|
\par Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 15.4 Hz point shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par As with the modal analysis the forced-damped response for the current frequency can be viewed/animated in the main window with a defined scaler.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Creating a Full Axle Model
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The simplest type of template is for an independent suspension based on a single corner, (one wheel). For some suspension types such as rigid axles you will always need to model both wheels in the initial template. Whilst with independent suspensions you have the option to make them single wheel or double wheel template. If it is required to analyze the impact of suspension parts that connect both corners together such as steering rack, anti-roll bar and sub-frames then a full axle model would be required.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To convert a corner template to a full axle you can either edit the template directly through the template editor, \i File / Edit Templates \plain\fs20 or use the convenience data menu options. If you edit the template directly you will need to duplicate all the existing points changing the default Y co-ordinate to be the mirror of its partner, tag the specific points such as upper ball joint(2) and set the point symmetry options. Far simpler is to use the convenience function \i Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model\plain\fs20 which completes all this for you.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm118.bmp\}
|
|
\par Default Template 1 converted to full axle model
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Once converted to a full axle template you can now add features such as the compliant rack and anti-roll bar. Further convenience functions are available to simplify these tasks. The compliant rack add menu \i Edit / Add to Model / Two Part Rack to Model\plain\fs20 option requires the user to identify which part the roll-bar drop link should be attached to. Once selected the user is prompted for a point position and then all necessary modifications are made to the template. It should be remembered that this template modification needs to be saved, either as a custom template, user template or saved with the data file (\i Setup / Include User Templates In Data Files).
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm119.bmp\}
|
|
\par Anti-roll Bar Added to Full axle version of Default Template 1.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To add a compliant rack to the template use \i Edit / Add to Model / Two Part Rack\plain\fs20 , this just requires both the left and right steering attachment points have been tagged in the template so that the rack can be correctly included into the model.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 User Defined Custom Controls
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Users who wish to build their own custom displays can do so through the \i Window / Open New Custom Control Display\plain\fs20 menu option. Dialogue boxes created in this way can be distributed to other users as saved specification files. Individual user settings are saved as part of the ini file such that they are available for repeat use.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm120.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example custom template dialogue box- showing data sliders
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par These custom displays are completely editable not only in terms of widget content but also the associated commands, data values and results. Thus a custom display can be used to group a set of specific data variables together into a single window with some specific menu commands. Alternatively they may provide a collection of results graphs for standard results viewing.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm121.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example custom template dialogue box - showing data and results options
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To create your own custom display, select the \i Window / Open New Custom control Display\plain\fs20 menu option. This will display a new empty display, (save for simple text widgets). To change the display, select the 'Edit' option. You can modify, add and delete widgets from the display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm122.bmp\}
|
|
\par New display in 'edit' mode
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To delete an existing widget(s) select the widget with the mouse and 'delete'. The right mouse menu has a number of functions that allow you to align widgets to improve appearance.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Widget types that can be added include, Buttons, Toggles, Sliders, Text Display/Entries, Value Display/Entries, Icon Buttons, Gauges, SDF Graphs, Bar charts and Bars. Each has a set of properties that can be edited via the 'Properties' option. The properties specific to the dialogue box can be edited through the right mouse menu.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm123.bmp\}
|
|
\par Properties display for dialogue box
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Users can save the settings for a particular display such that it can be shared with other users. Custom control settings are automatically include in a users ini file for future use. To save it for use by other users, in 'Edit' mode select the save option and define the required file name and location. Users can then use the 'load' option to use this file to create their own copy of it. A custom control display is not lost by simply closing the display, its settings are saved and is available from the list of displays at any time in the future. To permanently remove a custom display from the list you must use the 'WinDelete' option whilst in 'Edit' mode.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Auto-Search and Load
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The \i Auto-search and load\plain\fs20 facility provides a semi-automatic means by which the current models hard point positions can be modified by an external application during a live Shark session. This facility uses an intermediary shared text file, Shark checks the status of this file at a pre-defined time interval to check for changes. If the file has been modified since last read then its contents are checked and any identified co-ordinates extracted.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm124.bmp\}
|
|
\par Activating the Auto Search and Load facility
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par This facility can be run in one of three modes. The first is a single Scan, \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'91\f1 Scan Once\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 . On selection it will scan for the defined file and attempt to identify and extract hard point data irrespective of the files last modification status. The second is a repeated scan but with a prompt and confirmation from the user before any updating is applied. The third is a fully automatic repeated scan that will apply any changes it identifies without requesting user authorization or announcing a change.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm125.bmp\}
|
|
\par Auto-load prompt for option 2 new points found
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The repeated scans, (options 2 and 3) are performed at a prescribed interrupt time interval. The default value for this is 3000 mSecs but the use can edit this through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Edit Timer\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm126.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the interrupt time
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par No restrictions are placed on the position of intermediate text file, thus it could be on the local disc or even a shared network drive. The menu option \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Edit File Name\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 provides a simple file dialogue box with browser to define/locate the shared ASCII text file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm127.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the shared file name and location
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The format currently used in the shared file is one based on simple ASCII text. Each line contains a record that is read as a string and then that string checked for a match against the point labels used in the current models template(s). If a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 full\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 match is found, (note partial matches are ignored), then the string is re-read to identify the number of values on the line. They are assumed to be global co-ordinates in the order of X, Y and then Z.. It is not necessary to have all three values present but the X, Y, Z order is always applied. As well as looking for a match with the template \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i point labels\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Adams Point import label\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is also checked for a match.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm128.bmp\}
|
|
\par Matching Labels with the Current model Template
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par An example of what the shared file may look like is given below for a simple two-point example. Note that the first record is a simple version flag, (currently set as 1). This is to allow for future expansion with potential expansion into user specific formats and greater data options, (i.e. bush properties, graphics etc.).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm129.bmp\}
|
|
\par Sample shared file format
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To stop the repeating auto-search and load options either select the cancel option when the relevant prompt is displayed or use the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i Off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu option.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Component-Setup Toolbox
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Component toolbox is a utility that allows the user to create a library of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 alternatives for each part in the current models template(s). Each part in the toolbox has a characteristic length and the alternatives have different length properties. The parts that can appear in the toolbox are Wishbones, Tie Rods and Spacers, (currently uprights with their potential for up to six defining lengths are not included). The toolbox can thus be used to investigate the effect on suspension derivatives when mixing these alternative standard components.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm130.bmp\}
|
|
\par Initial Opened empty Toolbox \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Select to Add Parts
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To open the toolbox utility select the appropriate menu from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 data\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 pull down menu. On initial opening it will be empty. You can add as many or as few of the current parts to the toolbox. To add parts to the toolbox select on the top horizontal panel with the left mouse. Here you can select individual parts from a list or use the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Auto-load all Parts and Spacers\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option to load all valid parts.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par This is initial add will place the part in the toolbox and add one \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 alternative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 for each added part, this alternative being the baseline as extracted from the current model. If you select on the parts top header box menu options are given to Remove the part from the toolbox (and any alternative options of it), Edit the label used for the part, add an option to the part or Auto-create a range of alternative options for this part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm131.bmp\}
|
|
\par Parts Added \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Alternative options menu shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Along the bottom of the toolbox can be seen the current model the values for Toe, Camber and Castor angle for each corner and the total deviation from any defined/open SDF graph user lines. These values are given to assist in later options presented that include running the optimizer to minimize the deviation or auto-setting a part length to match static angles.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Adding an option to a part places a new entry in the column beneath the default option. Each option has the same set of menu options, to modify its label, its value, to remove it from the toolbox, to make the option current or to auto-adjust its length to match the target static value for either Toe, Camber or Castor. Users can thus add as many options as required to Parts with the properties perhaps that reflect the physical alternatives available, and then mix these options to assess overall impact on all relevant suspension derivatives.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par As an alternative to adding parts to the top list users can also add graphical elements that themselves control part sizes. These are manipulated in exactly the same way with alternative options.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To make a particular part option current, pick it with the mouse and select the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i make option current\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 menu item. This option will then be shown as indented and in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\cf2 red\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm132.bmp\}
|
|
\par Making a Part option current
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par After a number of part option changes you may require to adjust a tie-rod or toe-link to reset one of the main static angles. To do this pick an option from the required part with the left mouse and select the \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'91\f1 Adjust Option length to re-set static Toe\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 . Note that at the end of the menu option is the target static value for this particular angle. Similar menus exist for camber and castor. The current static angles are displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the dialogue box. Obviously using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 adjust option length\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 on a parts option will change its length property.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The component toolbox utility can be left open whilst the existing model is modified in the normal ways. This can lead to the situation where the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 baseline\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 part options no longer have the correct length properties. If required they can be re-aligned using the local menu option \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i File / Align (All) Baseline Length Properties with Model\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 . This will reset the baseline option lengths as necessary for all loaded parts.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The internal optimizer can be used to sort through the available part options to identify which combination of options gives the best (lowest) score. The scoring is performed in exactly the same way as the normal optimization process, see \uldb The Internal Optimizer\plain\fs20 . To run through this loop, (in which every permutation is tried), select the local menu item \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i File / Run Optimizer Scoring on Toolbox Options\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Definition Values
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The usual way in which a suspension model is modified is by changing part positions or part lengths and then reviewing the resulting suspension derivatives and their static values. Whilst users can use the \i Data / Set Static Angles\plain\fs20 menu option to directly set Static Toe and Static Camber all other static values must normally be achieved by manipulating the point positions to achieve a particular required value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm133.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting Static Toe and Camber \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Original Approach
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par This iterative loop is not in keeping with the approach of LSA and thus an additional facility is provided where users can set static angles and offsets directly, the model hard points being adjusted accordingly. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 definition values\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 options are shown graphically on the model when in one of the three orthogonal views. To turn on use the \i Graphics / View Definition Values\plain\fs20 menu option. Depending on the current orthogonal view changes which particular static values can be seen and edited. The static values that can be edited in each view are;
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Y-Z plane: (front view)
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Camber Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \tab Kingpin Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \tab Kingpin Offset (wheel centre), (mm)
|
|
\par \tab Kingpin Offset (ground), (mm)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par X- Z plane: (side view)
|
|
\par \tab Castor Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \tab Castor Trail (hub), (mm)
|
|
\par \tab Castor Offset (ground), (mm)
|
|
\par \tab Mechanical Trail (ground), (mm)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par X-Y plane, (plan view)
|
|
\par \tab Toe Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm134.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Screen shot for the three orthogonal views \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Definition values visible
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The definition values points are drawn with a small \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spot\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 box and the associated value alongside. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spot\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is the position to pick rather than the value. Using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spots\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 these definition values can be edited, joggled or dragged in the same way as any hard point.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The changes to static angles and offsets involves modifying a number of hard point positions. The actual hard points modified depend on the particular definition value and the current settings for that definition values. The particular method used to achieve the required value is changed via the \i View / SetUp Definition Values\plain\fs20 display. Each definition value has its own \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tab\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 which identifies if the change method is a translation, axis rotation or complete part rotation. Then a series of relevant sub options are given to define how a axis or part may be rotated.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm135.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Joggling the Static Kingpin Angle
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Drive Shafts
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par To extend the compliant analysis capability, drive shaft loads can be included in a simple to use manner. This is done such that rather than users needing to calculate the resulting loads applied to the upright, they can specify gearbox output torques and the drive shaft geometry such that LSA \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Shark can determine the actual loads applied to the upright. The drive shaft type that is modeled is one with three shafts and two constant velocity (CV) joints.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The automatic option provided within LSA for adding drive shafts to a model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s template, use menu option \i Edit / Add to Model / Drive shaft(s)\plain\fs20 , does not add parts and joints to represent the drive shafts instead it adds a number of points and graphics. These points are tagged within the template to be identified as the outer drive shaft centre, the inner drive shaft centre and a point on the inner drive shaft axis. By default when you add the drive shaft the outer CV centre is placed at the currently defined wheel spindle point, (thus no new point is added for this position).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm136.bmp\}
|
|
\par Drive shaft Added to Model
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For full axle models drive shafts are added to both wheels, the second sides\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 points having point tag types that indicate they are for the other wheel.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The objective of the drive shaft points are to take a user defined torque,( gearbox/differential output), that is applied to the inboard end of the drive shafts. Using the drive shaft geometry this torque is calculated through the system to identify forces and moments at each joint and hence the forces and moments applied to the upright. Remember that this is a compliance mode calculation and thus you are required to be in compliance mode to view the calculated loads. In addition there is a separate solver switch to enable/disable drive shaft loads, \i Solve / Drive Shaft Loads\plain\fs20 , this will be checked when drive shaft loads are included.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The loads applied to the upright include. A fore/aft reaction force at the tyre contact patch, a drive torque along the axis of the stub axle, a torque applied at the outer CV centre and a force applied to the outer CV centre. The orientation of these outer CV forces and torques is dictated by the shaft geometry.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The loads applied to each drive shaft are edited via the \i Data / Compliance Data / Drive Shaft Torques\plain\fs20 menu. A single number is available for each corner to allow asymmetric loading effects to be investigated. The sign of the loads is important and is based on the right hand grip rule for the relevant drive shaft inboard axis, (from inner axis point to inner drive shaft centre).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm137.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Drive Shaft Loads
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Joint losses can be included as a function of the joint angle. An optional look-up table is available for each joint listing % loss against joint angle. This is enabled once you define a number of points in the table. To edit the joint loss table select \i Data / Compliance Data / Drive Shaft Losses\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm138.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing Drive Shaft Losses
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 User Defined SDFs
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Whilst the number of SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s available directly continues to increase with each new release, users will always require the option to create their own. The User Defined SDF dialogue box allows users this option. They are constructed as a semi-formatted text string that the solver can interpret and solve in a structured way. The string can be made up of existing SDF results, point positions, or point forces. Additionally a selection of standard maths functions are recognized and can thus be interspersed within the text string.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm139.bmp\}
|
|
\par User Defined SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s edit display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par User defined SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s once created are available to be plotted on the x-y graphs or added to any of the text results listings. They are saved as part of the users ini file and can even be shared with other users via an external data file transfer.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To create a new SDF select the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 button, this will increase the counter by one a display a default title and an empty function string. Set the title as required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To add a field to the function string either enter directly or use the supplied selection boxes to locate required field. Note that square brackets [ and ] are used extensively to identify the start and end of a field. Available fields are grouped into a number of sections;
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Standard SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s, example [Castor Angle]
|
|
\par \tab Front Point by Label, example [Lower wishbone front pivotX]
|
|
\par \tab Rear Point by Label, example [upper wishbone rear pivotZ]
|
|
\par \tab Front Point by Number, example [frontP2Y]
|
|
\par \tab Rear Point by Number, example [rearP5X]
|
|
\par \tab Front Graphic, example [frontG3]
|
|
\par \tab Rear Graphic, example [rearG1]
|
|
\par \tab Front Force by Label, example [Outer track rod ball jointFZ]
|
|
\par \tab Rear Force by Label, example [Inner track rod ball jointFR]
|
|
\par \tab Front Force by Number, example [frontP6FY]
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Rear Force by Number, example [rearP1FX]
|
|
\par \tab Point type, example [Twheel centreY]
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Fields are built up into more complex functions using the supplied maths functions, such as +,-,*,/. For more complex functions the standard brackets, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 )\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , should be used to confer solution precedence. Other trigonometric maths functions such as COS, SIN, TAN etc are available in both degree and radian forms.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par An example of a fictitious function string might be;
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \tab COSD(\f3 [TWheel centreX]/[frontG8])\f1
|
|
\par
|
|
\par A subset of supported maths functions are specifically aimed at vector calculations. They all start with the letter \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to indicate this. Some produce a vector output whilst others produce a scaler output. Vector functions should only use vectors as arguments, (see example below).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \f3 VCROSS([Wheel spindle pointV],[Wheel centre pointV])
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \f1
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Control Elements
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Control elements provide users with the opportunity to change a part length or point position with an actuator. The actuator changes the selected property using a sensor. The sensor returns the change in length of a specified point to point distance, (e.g. damper length), and based on a look-up table identifies the required actuator change.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par As indicated above two actuator types are available, the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Length Actuator\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Position Actuator\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The length actuator replaces the fixed length between two points, (which must be on the same part), with a varying length element. The position actuator turns a hard point, (which must be attached to ground), plus an optional additional point, (e.g. on a wishbone both attachment points to ground), into a point(s) that can be moved along a particular defined axis.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm140.bmp\}
|
|
\par Adding a Control Element- menu options
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To add a length control element to the model, use the appropriate menu and select the two points that define a distance you wish to replace with a length actuator. The graphics will change to reflect the addition of the actuator, (note that by default the input sensor distance for the added actuator will be set to the damper1 points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm141.bmp\}
|
|
\par Length Control Element added to Lower Wishbone
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The relationship between the change in length of the transducer and the actuator is defined in a look-up table the values for which can be edited, (as well as the other properties such as transducer points), by editing the element in the same way as you would for any graphical element, change to edit mode and select the length transducer \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spot\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm142.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing Length Actuator Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Table and transducer points indicated
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To add a positional control element to the model select the appropriate menu and then pick the relevant hard point, (remember that it must be attached to ground). By default the optional second point is not added and the motion vector is aligned along the y-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm143.bmp\}
|
|
\par Position Control Element added to Upper Wishbone, single point and second point shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The properties of the positional transducer are edited in the normal way, in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode pick the transducer. This allows you to change the secondary position, the vector and the look-up table.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm144.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing Position Actuator Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Because of the potential for solution instability, control elements have a one step delay. This means that they use the length change of the previous calculation step. This may be an issue when running the solver in combined mode with large jumps between successive points.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Spacers
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Spacers can be added to a model in the same way that they are used in a motorsport application. They are added either to a point between parts, or at a point to ground. Spacers have a length property and an initial vector orientation. Spacers can be included in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Component toolbox\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 utility and thus have length options created for them and used to adjust static settings. They can also be modified via the standard edit, joggle and drag options.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm145.bmp\}
|
|
\par Adding Spacers \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Menu Selection
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To add a spacer to the model select the appropriate menu option, then select the part you require to add the spacer too, (pick the part centre). The display will change to just show the selected parts and its points. Now pick the part you require to add a spacer too. You are then prompted to define the initial orientation of the spacer in global co-ordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm146.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the Spacer Global Orientation
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For some instances such as wishbone pivot points, the application will identify that there is a second point that is associated with this connection, (i.e. for a suspension wishbone the two pivots points would be considered as associated), and you are given the option of including the this associated point with the spacer. Points connected in this way will work as a pair such that you only need to change the length property for one and this is reflected in the other. This is required if the original part is to remain correct, since changing only one spacer on a wishbone would lead to a corruption of the original parts geometry, (i.e. it is no longer the same part).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm147.bmp\}
|
|
\par Including the 2nd Point for a Spacer
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Finally you are asked to define the initial spacer length.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm148.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the Initial spacer Length Property
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Once a spacer has been to the model it is drawn as a cylinder with its length property drawn and an arrow indicating the orientation vector.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm149.bmp\}
|
|
\par Spacer to Ground Added to Wishbone Pivots \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Secondary point Shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To edit the properties of the spacer either drag/modify the associated vector to re-define the orientation. To change its length either change to edit mode and select the spacer graphic in the normal way or you could joggle the length when in one of the relevant \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change modes\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm150.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Spacer Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Spacer Length Shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Batch Mode
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Normal use of the Shark module of LSA is via the full graphical interface. Within the application is support for a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 batch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode. Use of the batch mode can vary from within the graphical interface running a script file in batch mode through to running the entire application in batch mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The Batch mode uses user entered text commands rather than graphical menu selections, and it is these graphical commands that can be buffered into a simple ASCII text file and then used as a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 script file\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Most relevant pull down menu entries in the graphical interface have an equivalent batch short text command. Batch commands are also arranged into groups that match the pull down menu groups. For example the main pull down menus are arranged under \b File, Module, Data, Edit, View, Tracking \plain\fs20 etc. and the batch commands are grouped in the same way.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A short 2/3 letter text syntax is used for the batch commands. So for File you would type FI, for Module you would type MO. Note that because of duplication not all commands are simply based on the first two characters of the full menu and example of this is that for Graph you would type GP as GR is already used for Graphics.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm151.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Batch Commands- Top level commands shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Special text commands are available to migrate up a command level \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 /\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 list a description of the current available commands \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ?\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , quit the application \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 QU\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Batch commands can also be strung together such that the equivalent of the pull down menu \i File / New \plain\fs20 would be FI NE. Some batch commands also support arguments, the case of the File / New (FI NE) command is one of these. Where it does support additional arguments the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ?\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 listing will indicate this as bracketed terms [ ] after the menu command, (see below).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm152.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Optional Arguments \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 File / New example shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To open the application in Batch mode use the appropriate desktop shortcut icon. This should have been added as part of the install and labeled as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Shark (Batch)\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The properties of the shortcut are set such that the command line argument has the string \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 BATCH\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 added to it. This then causes the application to open in Batch mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm153.bmp\}
|
|
\par Desktop Top Icon Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Batch\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 argument ringed
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The batch mode display opens as a simple scrollable text window. It will open in top level and wait for commands to be entered. You can switch at any time into the full graphical interface by entering INT at the top level.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The batch mode can also be started from within the graphical interface via the appropriate menu File / Manage Batch Files / Open Batch Command Window\'85
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm154.bmp\}
|
|
\par Opening the Batch Command Window from the Interface
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Batch commands can be assembled into an ASCII text file and run as a script file. Thus complete procedures can be fully automated. It is important with script file to ensure that commands placed on subsequent lines have sufficient \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 /\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 characters to return to the top level before moving down another command tree. An extract of a simple script file is shown below.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm155.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Script File \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Batch commands used
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par This script file illustrates the use of the ! character to indicate that this line is a comment line, it then uses the File / Open command with the optional Filename argument. If the filename had been omitted a file browser would appear to prompt for the missing argument. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 //\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 lines are inserted to ensure the position is moved back to the top level prior to moving down a different command tree. The SO BU command runs the solver in bump articulation, whilst the final line lists the Fitted SDF Results.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A simple tool is provided to allow the user to manage script files. To add, remove, edit and run from a single dialogue box.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm156.bmp\}
|
|
\par Managing the Script Files from within the Interface
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For a full list of the supported batch commands and their equivalent short string see \uldb Batch Commands\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 User Language
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The default language for the interface of Lotus Suspension Analysis is English. An option to switch the language to a user defined set is made through the menu \i SetUp / Language / User defined\plain\fs20 . This setting is saved to your INI file. To take full effect the application needs to be restarted.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Please note some customer sites have a customized approach to the editing and storing of the custom dictionary and may thus differ from the locations and approach outlined here. They may also be protected by a local password file, (please refer to your local system support).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The user defined approach allows for as many (or as few) \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 string\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 elements to be defined. It is applied on a string by string replacement basis. Thus a user would need to create this library from user input. The user-defined library is stored in the file \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 _Custom.dic\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 which is saved to the startup folder.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The editor in the software, allows the authorized user to sort through each string entry and enter a replacement. The entries are given a short and a full equivalent. Normally only the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 short\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 string is used. The full menu is a guide to indicate where it is used. Some common words appear in both the UPPER case and lower case if not part of a menu.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Search provides a way of find/repeat default English words. If an entry is left blank the English word is used, thus only partial language definition can be implemented or added to at a later date.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm157.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the user language Entry for Camber Angle
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Reports
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Report Files\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , are script files that allow a user to formulate the process of generating consistent reported output from the program. They rely on batch commands and batch files so users should be familiar with these. By combining the functionality of batch commands with additional format statements such as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new page\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 different report formats can be merged into a single report document. In a similar way to batch files report files are run, edited and managed through a utility tool. Report files can be shared between users either through common file location or local copies of the same files. \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 report files can added to interface menus and lists by and these lists are saved as part of the INI file. Reports created in this way can be sent straight to printer or file, alternatively they can be displayed in a rich text editor that provides the opportunity to edit/format the content before printing.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm158.bmp\}
|
|
\par The Reports Display
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Report files are used to standardise and streamline the process of producing reports from the suspension analysis. They make use of batch commands and files to load solve and list results, whilst additional formatting options such as line feed and new page are included to allow the creation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 report formats.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Report files are ASCII text files which whilst they are similar in form to Batch files have some specific layout and formats and thus would not normally be edited through a simple \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 text\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 editor. The interface provides a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mange\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tool just as with batch files but the edit option opens a unique spreadsheet editing tool.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par As mentioned above report file can reference existing batch files, whilst in turn batch file can run/reference report files so users should ensure that recursive loops are avoided.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Report files are made up of a sequence of lines, each line defines an action a result or some other relevant action. The following list the available items and their associated arguments.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Single Line of Text:\plain\fs20 Adds a single line of text to the report document. Arguments are; text string, font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Line Feed and Font type.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Text file:\plain\fs20 Adds the contents of the supplied text file to the report document. Arguments are; file name, font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Line Feed and Font type.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Single Blank Line: Adds a blank line (hence implied line feed) to the report document. No arguments.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Single Space:\plain\fs20 Adds a single blank space to the report document at the current position. No arguments.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Single Character:\plain\fs20 Adds a single character to the report document at the current position and using the current font attributes. Single argument, the Character.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b New Page:\plain\fs20 Adds a page break to the report document. No arguments.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Single Batch Command Line:\plain\fs20 Performs a batch command or series of batch commands. It does not add results to the report, it just allows for the required data changes, solver changes etc that may be required to enable the required results to be subsequently included. Arguments are; batch command string.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Batch Command File:\plain\fs20 In the same way as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 single batch command line\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 this does not add results to the report. The defined batch file will contain command strings necessary to make data changes solver changes etc, so that the required results can subsequently be added to the report. Arguments are; batch command file.\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Formatted SDF:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners Formatted SDF results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number and format set number.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b SDF Spline Fits:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners SDF Spline fits results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number and format set number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b SDF Spline Data:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners SDF Spline data results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number and format set number.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Bush Deflections:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners Bush Deflection results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type and Corner number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Joint-Bush Rotations:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners Joint-Bush Rotation results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type and Corner number.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Bush Forces:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners Bush Force results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type and Corner number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Formatted Point Forces:\plain\fs20 Includes the specified corners formatted point force results in the report document using the defined format set. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number and format set number.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b List All Point Coords for User Position:\plain\fs20 Includes a list of all points for the specified corner at the defined user position. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number, bump travel, steer travel and roll travel.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b List a Point Coords at All Positions:\plain\fs20 Includes a list of specified point for the required corner at all current solution points. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number and Point label (or point No.).
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b List All Point Coords at a Position:\plain\fs20 Includes a list of all points for the specified corner at the identified position. Arguments are; font colour, font size, Bold on/off, Italic on/off, Underline on/off, Strikeout on/off, Superscript on/off, Subscript on/off, Justify, Font type, Corner number and Position label (or position No.).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Insert User Window:\plain\fs20 Inserts a user window/control as an embedded image in the report. Arguments are; User Window No. (or User window label), Line feed and Justify.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Insert Visible Graph:\plain\fs20 Inserts a visible graph as an embedded image in the report. Only currently open graphs are available, so batch commands will need to be used to ensure they are open before being included. Arguments are; Graph No. (or SDF Label), Line Feed and Justify.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Insert Current Graphics:\plain\fs20 Inserts the current graphical view as an embedded image in the report document. Arguments are; Line Feed and Justify.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Insert Current AVI as File:\plain\fs20 Inserts the current animation sequence as an embedded AVI object in the report document, (included like this within a word document it can be viewed/animated directly from Word when the document is distributed). Arguments are; Line Feed and Justify.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm159.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing a Report File
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Report files can be run from within the application whilst in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Command Mode\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 (not to be confused with the Windows Command Prompt). For example you would enter the following short command, \cf1 RE RE RU report1.rpt \plain\fs20 or \cf1 RE RE RU <install>report1.rpt\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The Run (\cf1 RU\plain\fs20 ) option does just that in command mode, it will only run the report file. If you want to subsequently view the report file you will need to open the rich text display (\cf1 DI\plain\fs20 ) or to print the current report select the print (\cf1 PR\plain\fs20 ) command. Note that you can give both the display and print commands an optional filename so that it will open or print using the new report file. (Note that display and print does not currently support file number it must be the file name).
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par The application provides a list of standard \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 report\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 files. These can be added to/organised via a tool in the main graphical interface. In the command mode you can list the standard files via the \cf1 RE RE LI\plain\fs20 short string command. They are listed by number and can then be run either by using the filename or more simply by its number, (see comment above on display and print options).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Within the command mode options are provided to browse (\cf1 BR\plain\fs20 ) for a report file, list (\cf1 DIR\plain\fs20 ) current directory contents or change (\cf1 CD\plain\fs20 ) the current directory. Note that for specific server based installations the use of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 <install>\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 string is supported as part of the file name where \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 <install>\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is automatically replaced by the software with the actual software installation folder location.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Printing is control by local printing properties which can be edited through the local printer setup \cf1 (SE)\plain\fs20 command.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Report files can be run directly from the \i Results \plain\fs20 menu. In the same way as with running in command mode a list of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 report files is given together with the option to browse for a file. Running a results file from the graphical interface will cause the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 results report\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 rich text display to be opened and the created report document displayed.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Once the report file has finished the displayed report can be edited using the functionality of the rich text editor. Alternatively it can be sent to a printer, saved to a rich text document or opened directly in Word.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To add an existing report file to the defaults list either use the main menu option \i Results / Manage Report Batch Files / Add File to List\'85\plain\fs20 and use the browser to locate the required file or from the same sub menu open the \i Report Batch File List Status\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Report Batch File list \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 status\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 display allows you to add other report files in the same way as the previous item via a conventional browser. It also provides access to a number of other report file features. These include changing the order of the files in the list, Remove (All) file, Edit a file from the list, Run a file from the list or create/edit a new report file.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm160.bmp\}
|
|
\par The Report \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 status\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Display
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Flexible Parts
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The basic compliant module within LSA is based around rigid parts joined to each other by 6 dof bushes. A rigid part is usually taken as the complete part i.e. a wishbone, arm or upright. This concept of rigid parts can be extended to consider an individual suspension link as being made up of a sequence of rigid parts again connected by bushes. In this way the structural flexibility of a suspension link can be modeled by converting the single part to a series of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 meshed parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A part meshing tool is available that will automatically convert a single part to a user defined group of parts. This involves changes to the template which are made by this utility as part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 meshing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 process.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The template modifications include the use of special tags to indicate that these points and parts are purely for compliant use. This is so that the kinematic solution is not burden with any additional constraint equations, only the burden of post calculating the new kinematic positions of the mesh node points is involved.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Parts to be meshed need a minimum of three \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 connection\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 points to enable them to be meshed using this utility.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The utility, \i Edit / Mesh Rigid Part\plain\fs20 , needs the user to pick the required part and the three points on the part. The mesh is applied from the vector between the first two points, progressing towards the third point. Thus the new meshed parts are four-sided with the last mesh being triangular. The meshed parts compliant connections rather than being at the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 nodal\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are made via a third point placed mid way between the two nodal points. This is to allow the flexibility of the part to be defined more in the style of a series of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 beam\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 elements than actual plate style finite elements.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par The screen shot below shows the lower wishbone of a conventional double wishbone suspension that has been meshed from the inboard pivots out to the lower ball-joint with six meshed parts replacing the original one part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm161.bmp\}
|
|
\par Flexible Part - Example
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Each connection between the mesh parts is made by three points, two of them are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tagged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 in the template as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 zero stiffness mesh point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and the third point is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tagged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 structural mesh point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The compliant solver then adds a zero stiffness bush at the first and uses the default rigid stiffness values for x, y and z and the default value for compliant rotation stiffness for x-x, y-y and z-z. These can be individually re-defined by the user in the same way as any other bush.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par It should be noticed that when you mesh a part the connection of the suspension spring will be modified if it was attached to the original part prior to meshing. Its connection is moved to the nearest part, (note that the co-ordinates of the connection are not changed only the associated part). If you subsequently alter the spring attachment points position, it will still be associated to the original nearest meshed part. Thus it may be necessary to re-assign the associated part to reflect the new position.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Overview \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Interactive Template Builder
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Most users will find that LSA with its 30+ standard templates will have one that suits their requirements. There are cases where you may wish to make small changes to templates to meet a particular requirement. In the first instance these simple changes can be incorporated using the range of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu options provided that enable points, graphics and standard items such as roll bars to be simply included.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par For users wanting to make greater changes or need to build a template from scratch the 3D template builder module provides a fully interactive tool for adding parts, making connections etc. The alternative to the Interactive method would require using the template spread sheet tool, \i File / Edit Templates\plain\fs20 . The two methods are interchangeable in that you can work in both interactive template mode and then review settings in the spread sheet, make changes as required and then return and continue in the interactive template module.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To enter the interactive template builder mode select the \i Module / Shark / 3D Template Builder\plain\fs20 menu. Alternative pick the equivalent icon from the Template builder toolbar. These toolbars by default are turned off. Use the \i SetUp / Toolbar Visibility\plain\fs20 menus to make the two Template Builder Toolbars visible.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Once In the Template builder mode the graphics display changes to indicate this change showing the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Template Builder\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 text around the periphery. The display also includes a series of selectable lists for \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Tag Type\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Status\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Each of this lists can be moved, re-sized or have their visibility toggled on and off. The lists also provide a series of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spots\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 that enables position sensitive right mouse pop-up menus.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par To start building a new template select the \i File / New\plain\fs20 menu in the normal way\'85 Then select if this is going to be a steerable, non-steerable or copied from an existing template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm162.bmp\}
|
|
\par New Template Menu
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard You are also offered the chance to specify the label for this new template, (note that the label entry dialogue indicates the slot number that the template is using.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm163.bmp\}
|
|
\par New Template Label Entry
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 You can now start to build your new template adding parts by selecting the relevant icon from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 parts bin\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar. You then join parts together by merging two points or attach a part to ground a selected point. These builder \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 actions\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are available either from the second template toolbar or through the \i Edit / Template Builder Actions\plain\fs20 menu entries.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The current builder actions include;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Join Part to Part (at Mean of Two Points)
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 Join Part to Part (at Point 1)
|
|
\par Join Part to Part (at Point 2)
|
|
\par Join Point to Part (at the Point)
|
|
\par Join Point to Ground (at Point)
|
|
\par Split Parts (at Point)
|
|
\par Split Part from Ground (at Point)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Once Parts and Points have been added to the template, additional builder actions are available through the context sensitive right-mouse menus. These include:
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Delete Point
|
|
\par Delete Part
|
|
\par Delete Graphic
|
|
\par Flip this Parts Points in Y
|
|
\par Mirror this Part across in Y
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The normal process of building the template is to add parts, join them together as required, whilst checking the number of unknowns and number of equations shown in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 status\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 section. Once all parts/points are added (and assuming the no. of equations equals the no. of unknowns) then the final stages of the build is to add any extra graphical elements for visualization and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tag\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 any points that may have special functions, such as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 lower ball joint\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 steering attachment\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 etc.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par At this stage the template can be used by simply switching to one of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 active\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 3D modules, such as 3D Bump but it is good practice to ensure you save the template first using the \i File / Template File options\plain\fs20 sub-menus.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Start-up Steps
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Starting the program can be considered to consist of the following steps;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 1) Start the executable, locate either from the \b Start\plain\fs20 menu, (normally \i Start / Programs / Lotus Engineering Software / Lotus Suspension Analysis\plain\fs20 ), or through explorer. Browse to the installed folder (normally c:\'5clesoft), and run the suspension analysis executable \b shark.exe.\plain\fs20 (note that an alternative executable \b sharknonVc.exe\plain\fs20 is also available that whilst identical in functionality/results etc. does not make use of virtual memory and is sometimes required rather than the default virtual common version.)
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par 2) Select the solution module required from either 2D or 3D, and the required articulation type. The default is to open in the 3D module under bump/rebound articulation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 3) Set the required display units.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 4) Optionally load any required user defined templates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par 5) Enter the required suspension data, either from an existing saved file or through the new file options.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm164.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Program Start-up
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par During program start-up a number of system checks are performed. The users ini file is searched for and if found, loaded to overwrite the internal defaults. User line data bases if referenced are also checked for and added to the relevant menus.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Start-up Errors
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par During program start-up the searching for a subsequent loading of the \uldb users \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 ini\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 file\plain\fs20 can in exceptional circumstances, results in an error message. This implies a corrupt ini file possibly due to a previous partial save or inappropriate editing, (the ini file should not be edited by hand).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm165.bmp\}
|
|
\par Error message ini file read failure
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Selecting okay will continue to start the program, but with only a partial reading of the ini file, (partial up to the point of read error). Partial reading of the ini file may cause problems which may require the program to be closed and restarted. If the problems persists, (as it may, since the invalid settings will be written back into ini file when the program has a normal exit), the only option may be to delete the ini file, see \uldb Defaults\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Whilst strictly not a start-up error, the other possible start-up event that may occur is the detection of a previous runs temporary scratch file. This is interpreted as a previous run incorrectly shutting down, as these temporary scratch files used for the undo feature, are deleted on normal program exit.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par If a scratch file(s) is identified, the user is given the option of recovering the one before the most recent file and thus avoids potential data loss. The reason for selecting the one before the most recent rather than the most recent, is that this may simply re-apply the same conditions that caused the original crash.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm166.bmp\}
|
|
\par Data Recovery Message
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphics Frame Types
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The interfaces main \uldb graphics\plain\fs20 display has two alternative drivers. The default device driver is a Windows GDI, (\i Setup / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI),\plain\fs20 which whilst it works with all Hardware options does so at the expense of both speed and capability. The GDI driver is unable to support depth buffered display and hence the view styles \i View / Fill Style / Hidden Line \plain\fs20 and \i View / Fill Style / Depth Buffered (Flat shaded )\plain\fs20 do not function correctly. The alternative device driver is Open GL, (\i Setup / Graphics Frame Type / Open GL\plain\fs20 ), which is both faster and supports depth buffering/hidden line display types.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Not all hardware is able to use the Open GL device type, typical failures are inability to refresh and lack of correct hidden line display. This can normally be fixed using the two options \i Setup / Use Segment Display\plain\fs20 and \i Setup / Use Software Double Buffer\plain\fs20 . Alternatively some users may wish to resolve issues by changing the level Hardware acceleration used by the graphics card. Moving towards \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 None\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 in incremental steps can identify how much hardware acceleration can be successfully used.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The OpenGL graphics frame is preferred not just because it enables shaded image displays to be used, but also because it provides the option of using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Segmented Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option, (menu \i Setup / Use Segment Display\plain\fs20 ). Segmentation significantly improves animation and viewing refresh speeds since rather than having to re-calc and redraw all the graphics primitives only the viewing matrix is refreshed and then the existing saved graphics segment re-drawn.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Window Descriptions
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The application window layout utilizes a Multi Document interface (MDI) style. Where display and graph windows are displayed as children of the main window. The main window has a top menu bar and four toolbars which have optional positions. The graphical display is drawn in a 3D viewing window, whilst individual \uldb graphs\plain\fs20 have separate windows.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm5.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example screen shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Overall appearance of application
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Module Type
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par On program start-up by default the application will go into the 3D module, and in bump/rebound articulation mode. Since the 2D and 3D module data sets are completely separate, change to the required module before starting data entry.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm167.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the application module \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Toolbar Icons
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The menu entry \i Module / Shark \plain\fs20 sub menu can be used to select the required module and articulation type.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm168.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the application module \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 pull-down menu options
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Note that it is possible for the application to detect that a data file being loaded is a 2D or 3D data file and if necessary it will switch to the appropriate module.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Data Entry
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par At start-up the main form of data entry to the program is the suspension hard points coordinates, (irrespective of module). To load an existing data file use the \i File / Open...\plain\fs20 menu item, (note that the five most recently opened files are appended to the \i File\plain\fs20 menu). To create a new model select the \i File / New\plain\fs20 menu item set the required suspension end(s) to model and the required \uldb suspension type\plain\fs20 . All new models created in this way will be fully populated with default values, not only for the suspension hard points but also all other data requirements, (i.e. tyre sizes).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm169.bmp\}
|
|
\par Creating a new model
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par These default values can now be edited whilst still within the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box by selecting the relevant icon. Alternatively the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Done\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option can be selected to view the new model and the main \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 functions used to revise the data.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm170.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the default co-ordinates data
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par It is possible to have an asymmetric model. If this is required then the check box at the top of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue should be un-selected. This switch between symmetric and asymmetric (and back again) can be applied at any time not just at the creation of a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . To do this simply pull up the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box and change the setting of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Symmetric Suspension\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 check box, no existing model data is lost by this change other than the asymmetric information if switching to symmetric.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Should it be preferred users can select to have the default for a single corner model to be in \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve Y rather than the default +ve Y. The check box at the top of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box can be selected if this is required.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Getting Started \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Exiting the Program
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The close the program select the \i File / Exit\plain\fs20 menu item, and then confirm the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 okay to exit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 prompt. Alternative methods to close the application include the conventional \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 from the windows top right corner, Alt+F4 or close from the main windows top left menu. In addition the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 esc\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 key will close the application, (subject to accepting the prompt).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm171.bmp\}
|
|
\par Okay to exit prompt
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - File
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 File / New:\plain\fs20 Creates a new model. Opens the new model dialogue box to create a new suspension model. This is also the route to adding a new front or rear suspension to the current model file, i.e. convert a single axle model into a full vehicle model.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Open:\plain\fs20 Opens the standard Windows file browser to locate the required existing file to load. Note that file open will lose the current model data. The file reader is able to identify the difference between a 2D and 3D data file and will if necessary change module.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Close:\plain\fs20 Closes the current model, but leaving the application open.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Add End from File:\plain\fs20 Opens the standard Windows file browser to locate the required existing file to load the suspension end from. This 3D only option allows the user to add to a single end model the other suspension end from an existing saved file. Only the suspension geometry and compliance properties are loaded from this second file. You cannot use this option if you already have both ends defined. If you have a full vehicle model and want to switch one end to a saved model you must first remove one the required end by using the File / New menu and un-checking the relevant selection box.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Import Hard Points from / Adams Sub System:\plain\fs20 Opens a split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an Adams Sub System model file and extract the hard point geometry directly from it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the identified Sub System sections to be viewed and the hard point values found.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Import Hard Points from / User \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 Format:\plain\fs20 Opens a split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an User specific model file and extract the hard point geometry directly from it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the identified Sub System sections to be viewed and the hard point values found.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Export Hard Points from / Adams Sub System:\plain\fs20 The reverse of the previous Adams menu item. Opens the same split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an Adams Sub System model file and populate it with the current hard point geometry directly to it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the modified Sub System to be viewed prior to applying the extraction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Export Hard Points from / User \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 Format:\plain\fs20 The reverse of the previous User A format menu item. Opens the same split screen text editor window that allows the user to load a User specific format model file and populate it with the current hard point geometry directly to it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the modified Sub System to be viewed prior to applying the extraction.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Save:\plain\fs20 Saves the current model to the originally opened file name or the latest subsequent Save As file name.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Save As:\plain\fs20 Opens the standard Windows file browser to enable the current model to be saved to disc. Browse to the required folder and enter/select the required file name.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Auto Search and Load / Off:\plain\fs20 The Auto search and load utility provides a method by which an external application can automatically update the hard point position of points in the current model. For the defined event timer the shared data file is checked for and if modified since last read is opened and data scanned for. If the scanning successfully identifies a point by its text \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 label\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and associated coordinates values found then these new positions are applied to the model. This auto-search and loading behavior is controlled by a number of menus, (see below). They control if this feature is on, whether to prompt before loading data changes, where to look and how often to look. This particular menu switches the auto search to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The text label matching is based on the point labels as set in the template. In addition the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Adams Import Point Label\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is also used in the attempt to identify a match.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Auto Search and Load / Scan Once:\plain\fs20 Performs the Auto-search and load function once only based on the defined file name.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Auto Search and Load / On \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Prompt before Load:\plain\fs20 Turns the Auto-search and load function on. At the currently defined time interval, the specified file is searched for and if modified since last read new values will be loaded but only on user confirmation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Auto Search and Load / On \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Auto Load:\plain\fs20 Turns the Auto-search and load function on. At the currently defined time interval, the specified file is searched for and if modified since last read new values will be automatically loaded in with no message given to the user.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Auto Search and Load / Edit Timer\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a simple edit box to allow the auto-search timer interval to be edited. Default setting is 3000 mSecs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Auto Search and Load / Edit File Name\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a simple edit box with browser icon to allow the auto-search file name to be edited.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Re-Read Default Templates (Skip All User):\plain\fs20 This menu option will remove all currently defined templates and revert back to the hard coded default template definitions. The user templates file is not loaded even if it exists.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Re-Read Default and All User Templates:\plain\fs20 This menu option remove all currently defined templates and revert back to the hard coded default template definitions. It will then search for and if found re-read the data file that contains the user defined additional 3d kinematic template information. It is defined as additional since the original hard coded templates are always available, (unless overwritten by the external defaults file or a user loaded set).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Add Custom Templates from File:\plain\fs20 This option allows a user to read a separate templates file. This file can either add to or overwrite the currently defined templates. This potential to overwrite includes both the hard coded defaults and any loaded from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 users\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file. Templates are identified by a position index, thus if you load a template as index 4 it will replace the hard coded default template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Edit Templates:\plain\fs20 Opens a multi-panel spread sheet display that allows the user to edit and create templates. The user can view the settings of the existing templates, (including hard coded templates) and use the existing templates as a start point for a new template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / INI Files / Re-read <install> INI File:\plain\fs20 Re-read the INI file and it associated settings from the <install> folder. The <install> folder is the location of the original executable.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / INI Files / Save INI File to <install> Folder:\plain\fs20 Writes the INI file and the current settings to the <install> folder. The <install> folder is the location of the original executable. The access rights are as set by the local admin rather than the application.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard \cf1 File / INI Files / Re-read <database> INI File:\plain\fs20 Re-read the INI file and it associated settings from the <database> folder. The <database> folder is set either by a local variable or the setting in the <install> INI file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / INI Files / Save INI File to <database> Folder:\plain\fs20 Writes the INI file and the current settings to the <database> folder. The <database> folder is set either by a local variable or the setting in the <install> INI file. The access rights are as set by the local admin rather than the application.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / INI Files / Read INI File from\'85:\plain\fs20 Read an existing INI file from a user selected location.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / INI Files / Save INI File to\'85:\plain\fs20 Writes the INI file and the current settings to a user selected location and file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / File Text Edit\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the Data file text editor. This dialogue box can be used to view and edit data files in a purely textual environment. This is an advanced user feature only that is primarily intended for debugging use and is not recommended as a normal working practice. This is primarily because the data file format is not formally declared.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Run Batch File / Browse for File\'85\plain\fs20 Opens the file browser to allow the user to locate and run a batch file. Selecting a batch file will open the Batch file dialogue box to which all batch commands in the file will be echoed along with any batch output. Appended to this menu will be a list of batch files already added via the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Manage Batch Files\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 command, (see below).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Manage Batch Files / Add File to List\'85\plain\fs20 Opens the file browser to allow the user to locate an existing batch file, once selected it is added to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Run Batch File\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu, (see above).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Manage Batch Files / Batch File List Status\'85\plain\fs20 Opens a dialogue box that lists the current batch files available from the menus. From this dialogue box batch files can be added and removed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Manage Batch Files / Open Batch Command Window\'85\plain\fs20 Opens the batch command window. This allows a batch session to be performed. Having been opened from the graphical interface graphical changes made to the model will still be seen. This is unlike when the application is opened directly into batch mode where no model graphics are visible.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Set Batch Record Control Keys\'85:\plain\fs20 Simple selection display to identify which keys are used to Start, Pause/Resume and Stop the recording of key strokes entered into the text window whilst in the command mode. Recorded key strokes can be saved to a text file for later use as the basis of a batch file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Run Report Batch File..:\plain\fs20 Either browse for or select from the list a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Report Batch File\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . These batch files contain a sequence of commands that replicate user entry to load models run analyses and compile a report containing the specified data and results. The resulting report text file is loaded into the report viewer for subsequent viewing, editing and printing.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Manage Report Batch Files / Add Report File to List..:\plain\fs20 Use the standard file browser to locate report batch files that are added to the file list for the preceding menu entry.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Manage Report Batch Files / Report Batch File List Status..:\plain\fs20 Opens the report batch file status display that enables the user to manage the file list and run selected report files. The run options for the produced report file include displaying, write as rich text file, open in word or directly print.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Manage Report Batch Files / Open Report Display Window..:\plain\fs20 Opens the reports display window. This scrollable rich text display will contain the last report file generated, (if any) and enable it to be viewed, edited or printed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 File / Exit:\plain\fs20 Closes the application, subject to confirmation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 okay to exit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Appended to the bottom of the \cf1 File\plain\fs20 menu, is a list of the last five (max) opened files.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Module
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 2D Bump:\plain\fs20 Changes to the 2D module in Bump articulation mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 2D Roll:\plain\fs20 Changes to the 2D module in Roll articulation mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Template Builder:\plain\fs20 Changes to the 3D template builder module.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Bump:\plain\fs20 Changes to the 3D module in Bump articulation mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Roll:\plain\fs20 Changes to the 3D module in Roll articulation mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Steer:\plain\fs20 Changes to the 3D module in Steer articulation mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Shark / 3D Combined Motion:\plain\fs20 Changes to the combined Bump, Roll and Steer articulation mode. This allows a user defined combination of bump travel. roll angle and steering lock to be specified for analyzing items such as ball joint travel and wheel envelope
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Module / Raven / STD Interface:\plain\fs20 Changes to the Raven module. This will only be available if you are licensed for this full vehicle-handling module, (licensed separately from Shark).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Model Properties:\plain\fs20 Edit model properties via the tree structure display window. Expand required sections to locate individual data fields. Select required data field and edit displayed value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Coordinates / Use Open List:\plain\fs20 This option when checked uses the alternative \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 open\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point coordinates listing display. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 open\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 display can be left on screen throughout the program use. When unchecked point list/display reverts back to the original \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 close before continue\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Coordinates / 2D:\plain\fs20 Displays 2D model coordinates for viewing and editing in a simple single column spread-sheet, (only available in 2D module).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Coordinates / Front:\plain\fs20 Displays 3D model front coordinates for viewing and editing in a multi column spread-sheet, (only available in a 3D module with a front axle included).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Coordinates / Rear:\plain\fs20 Displays 3D model rear coordinates for viewing and editing in a multi column spread-sheet, (only available in a 3D module with a rear axle included).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Tolerances / Point Tolerance Analysis:\plain\fs20 Performs a \uldb Tolerance analysis\plain\fs20 for the specified point. Open graphs indicate the range of displayed variable due to the limit box size.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Tolerances / Set Tolerance Point:\plain\fs20 Set the suspension hard point to be used for any subsequent \uldb Tolerance analysis\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Tolerances / Edit Point Tolerances:\plain\fs20 Lists the model hard points in a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tree\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 type view environment, to locate the required point and view/edit its current limit box settings. Limit box settings define the allowable +/- distances along each axis from the defined position.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Tolerances / Set All Point Tolerances to\'85:\plain\fs20 View/Edit routine to set all suspension hard points to the same values in one go. Opens a simple edit box with six values, one for each tolerance \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 x, +x, -y, +y, -z, +z. These will be applied to each point in the model.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Point Tolerances / Solve Mid Point:\plain\fs20 This switch controls whether the points at the middle of each side of the tolerance box is included in the tolerance positions. When unchecked only the corner points and the original position are solved for.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Parameters:\plain\fs20 Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parameters\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data set for viewing and editing. This data set includes the values controlling the articulation limits, overall vehicle properties such as wheelbase, C of G height, brake split, drive split and brake type.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Raven Conversion Parameters:\plain\fs20 Lists the static values used when populating the virtual SKCMS data file. These single values are not calculated as part of the test nor are they part of the Shark data file, hence these editable default values are used.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Raven Corner Parameters:\plain\fs20 Lists the corner values used when populating the virtual SKCMS data file. These corner values are not calculated as part of the test nor are they part of the Shark data file, hence these editable default values are used.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Body Type:\plain\fs20 Defines the body graphics used in the 3D display. Options currently limited to the internal options or none. Envisaged expanding to include user defined body sets. Current options include, none, Saloon, Open sports, Old Single Seater, Single Seater, Utility, Super Saloon, Minivan and user defined. Select the required option. Visibility controlled by separate visibility switch.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Edit User Body Data:\plain\fs20 For the user defined body option this menu is enabled to allow direct editing of the lines and facets used to define the body. This allows existing default types to be modified and/or import of STL files to represent the body.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Tyre Sizes:\plain\fs20 Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Tyres\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data set for viewing and editing. In kinematic mode this lists the rolling radius for the front and rear axles, together with the width. The tyre width value is purely for graphical visualization, it does not alter the analysis results. When in compliant solver mode two additional values are listed, these being the tyre vertical stiffness settings.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Steering Type:\plain\fs20 For front suspensions this defines if the steering mechanism is a rack or one of the two steering box types. The steering box systems require additional hard points to be defined. When first changing a model from rack to steering box, the application will prompt for the coordinates of the steering box.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Steering Type / Edit Box Coords\'85:\plain\fs20 Only enabled when steering type is set to one of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 steering box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 types. This displays the current steering box hard points coordinates in a simple spread-sheet display. For an asymmetric model both sides are given.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Steering Type / Edit Rack Pinon Radius\'85:\plain\fs20 This displays the current steering rack pinon radius value. This value is used to derive hand wheel angle from rack travel and derive hand wheel moments from rack axial forces.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Model Comments:\plain\fs20 Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Titles\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data set for viewing and editing. These comment have no visual impact within the interface merely act as text labels within the data file. Little used feature of limited use included for backwards compatibility.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Model Graphics:\plain\fs20 Opens the model graphical edit display. Existing individual graphical elements can be viewed and edited through this display. New graphical elements should be added through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graphics / Add Graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menus.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Model Control Elements:\plain\fs20 Opens the model control elements edit display. Existing individual control elements can be viewed and edited through this display. New control elements should be added through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit / Add Spacer to model\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Bush Properties (All):\plain\fs20 Opens the \uldb Bush data\plain\fs20 display section. All joints can be edited from this display both in terms of their kinematic coordinates and their compliant properties. The compliant bush properties include the definition of the bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s local coordinate system as well as the bush stiffness properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Bush Properties (Stiffness):\plain\fs20 Opens the \uldb bush stiffness\plain\fs20 display window. It consists of a series of sliders that allows the selected bushes individual stiffness properties to be changed via sliders updating both the calculations and the displayed images simultaneously.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties:\plain\fs20 Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Spring\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data set for viewing and editing. The spring properties control the spring force applied to the compliant model through defining the free length, fitted length and linear rate. Note that the visual appearance of the spring is set under the \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Sizes\cf3 section.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Damper Properties:\plain\fs20 Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Damper\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data values for viewing and editing. This lists the Damper rate used for the front and rear dampers. Note that damper1 would be that normally used for the single damper in a corner model. Damper2 would be that used either for a second damper in a corner model or the damper for the second corner in a full axle model. Note that Individual damper properties can be altered by selecting them via the 3d view whilst in edit mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm172.bmp\}
|
|
\par Damper Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Tyre Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Tyres\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 data set for viewing and editing. This lists the rolling radius for the front and rear axles, together with the width. The tyre width value is purely for graphical visualization, it does not alter the analysis results, also given is the tyre vertical stiffness values.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / External Forces\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the \uldb external force\plain\fs20 display window. This enables all external force data sets to be edited. Properties include magnitude, part attachment, orientation by \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 head\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tail\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 definition and each force/sets on/off setting.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Roll Bar Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists the roll bar properties for front and rear suspensions, used in the compliant model if a roll bar has been included. Properties are for the roll bar rate in terms of N.mm/Rad.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Linear Rack Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists the properties for the rack bush lateral stiffness. This value is applied to the model at the bush(s) identified by the template as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rack Lateral Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm173.bmp\}
|
|
\par Linear Rack Bush Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Non-Linear Rack Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the display for the non-linear rack axial stiffness properties. If defined the non-linear rack stiffness replaces the Linear rack stiffness property identified in the preceding menu. It is an optional compliant data variable. Its definition is by a spline of displacement against force. The inclusion of the non-linear rack property causes the solver to perform an additional iterative step that identifies the rack axial force and applies a corrective force to achieve the correct rack axial displacement.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Bump Stop Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists the optional properties for the Bump stops. Positions 1 and 2 are given for full axle models. For a single corner model normally only BumpStop1 is used. The properties of the bump stop are Force against displacement. Displacement is from the static position and is based on the motion of the Spring1 points. The force of the bump stop would usually be zero until some point in the +ve displacement is reached. The solver uses this curve to also derive the local bump stop stiffness for optional inclusion into the model stiffness matrix when solving compliantly.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm174.bmp\}
|
|
\par Bump Stop Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Drive Shaft Torque\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 s\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists the optional properties for the drive shaft Torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. This is only relevant if the drive shaft elements have been added to the model. The torque values are applied to the inboard ends of the drive shafts. The sign convention is based on the right hand grip rule, with the axis direction taken from the inboard point to the inboard joint center.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Drive Shaft Losses\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists the optional properties for the drive shaft Losses. This is only relevant if the drive shaft elements have been added to the model. Losses are given as a table of % loss against joint angle. Separate tables are given for the inner and outer joints. These loss tables are used by the solver to factor the calculated torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s down by the relevant loss values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / Drive Shaft Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Lists individual data variables associated with the drive shafts. Currently only lists the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Radius\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 of the drive shaft joint. This is used to calculate the amount of cross car travel of the rollers associated with the inner drive shaft joint.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85:\plain\fs20 Displays the values used for default stiffness\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The first is the singularity stiffness required by the solver for parts such as tie rods that mathematically have a degree of freedom, and secondly the stiffness used for \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ball joint. Mathematically the ball joints are not treated as rigid but bushes with very high stiffness in all three translation directions.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Mass Data / C of G Properties:\plain\fs20 Displays the defined Mass properties of the current model. The mass properties specify the C of G values for each part in terms of magnitude, position and orientation. Its layout/requirements are similar to those used for the definition of bush stiffnesses.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Local Coordinate Systems:\plain\fs20 Opens the local coordinate system data display. This allows users to add, modify and delete local coordinate systems. These local coordinate systems can be used to define suspension hard points. Definition of the local system is by an origin, local axis and local plane. Options are given to provide alternative methods of defining these three items. Local axes systems can be visible on the graphical display and are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 editable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 dragable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 through the graphical display. Hard points can be switched to use this local system by editing the hard point and selecting the required coordinate system. The hard points coordinates are automatically re-calculated in the new coordinate system to retain the same global position.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Save:\plain\fs20 Saves the current suspension hard points to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved coordinate sets are lost when the application is closed. Any number of sets can be stored.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Recall Saved:\plain\fs20 Recalls a saved hard point sets, replacing the current values with those in the temporary store. Saved sets identified by their label.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Delete Saved:\plain\fs20 Deletes a saved hard points set from the temporary store. Only valid use is the simplifying of the displayed options through reduced menu list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Coordinates / Delete All:\plain\fs20 Deletes all saved hard point sets from the temporary store. Quicker than deleting one at a time if looking to start the storing from scratch.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Set Static Angles\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a simple data entry window that allows the user to set the static camber and toe angles directly. By defining the angles the stub axle points position is modified to obtain the required angles. The co-ordinates of the wheel centre are left unaltered.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Use Extended Bump Travel:\plain\fs20 Enables the extended bump/rebound travel option. If unchecked the program solves at even increments of bump travel as specified by the increment value within the defined limits. When checked the solver runs through a specific prescribed list of bump positions. Note that -ve is rebound +ve is bump. The individual values are set through the following menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Edit Extended Bump Travel\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a data list dialogue box to display/edit the extended bump travel data. These values are only used when the above option is checked. Each bump position can be given a label. This label is used within graph x-y listing for recognition by appearing on the status bar when 'hovering' over a plotted point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Use Extended Roll Travel:\plain\fs20 Enables the extended roll travel option. If unchecked the program solves at even increments of roll travel as specified by the increment value within the defined limits. When checked the solver runs through a specific prescribed list of roll angles. The individual values are set through the following menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Edit Extended Roll Travel\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a data list dialogue box to display/edit the extended roll travel data. These values are only used when the above option is checked. Each roll position can be given a label. This label is used within graph x-y listing for recognition by appearing on the status bar when 'hovering' over a plotted point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Use Extended Steer Travel:\plain\fs20 Enables the extended steer travel option. If unchecked the program solves at even increments of steering travel as specified by the increment value within the defined limits. When checked the solver runs through a specific prescribed list of steer positions. The individual values are set through the following menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Edit Extended Steer Travel\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a data list dialogue box to display/edit the extended steer travel data. These values are only used when the above option is checked. Each steer position can be given a label. This label is used within graph x-y listing for recognition by appearing on the status bar when 'hovering' over a plotted point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Use Extended Combined Motion Travel:\plain\fs20 Enables the extended combined motion travel option. If unchecked the program solves at even increments of bump travel and steering travel as specified by the associated increment value within their defined limits. This effectively equates to a the perimeter of a displacement box in bump and steering. When checked the solver runs through a specific prescribed list of bump, roll and steer positions. The individual values are set through the following menu option.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Edit Extended Combined Motion Travel\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a dialogue window for the display and editing of the extended combined bump/rebound, roll and steering envelope. This profile is used for identifying limits of ball joint articulations and future uses will include wheel envelopes.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Data / Component-Setup Toolbox\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the component toolbox display. This utility allows users to build up a library of components for the current loaded model/template. Each component in the table has a defining dimension. Changing the selected option for each part updates all calculations and plotted graphs such that the impact of mixing \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 components can be instantly analyzed. The toolbox also has options to auto-adjust components to restore static toe, camber or castor values. The internal optimizer can be used to identify the best mix of defined components when compared to specified targets.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Edit
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Edit Menu Tree:\plain\fs20 Displays a tree based display list of the Edit commands. Such that users can optionally select actions from a menu tree rather the individual pull down menus. This menu tree also includes the Add Graphics menus.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Undo (Ctrl+Z):\plain\fs20 \uldb Edit undo\plain\fs20 provides a function that after a number of changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to step back through the changes undoing them step by step. This menu can be used or often more conveniently by using the equivalent short cut key strokes \b Ctrl+Z\plain\fs20 . If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to undo.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Redo (Ctrl+Y):\plain\fs20 provides a function that after a number of undo changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to reapply the the changes that have been undone. This menu can be used or often more conveniently by using the equivalent short cut key strokes \b Ctrl+Y\plain\fs20 . If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to redo.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Modify Mode:\plain\fs20 Sets the \uldb data edit\plain\fs20 mode as either Edit, Joggle or Drag. More normal to use equivalent convenience \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 File\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 toolbar icons.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Change Mode:\plain\fs20 Sets the \uldb change mode\plain\fs20 as either \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Change Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Retain Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 change\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode is to change the lengths and relationships between points on a part as a hard point is modified. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Retain Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option restricts the pick-able points to just those that are connected to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ground\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 but retains the defined part lengths as a point is modified. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode retains hard point positions and allows the user to modify a part by directly changing one or more length properties of the part. With the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set Part Lengths\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode pnt-pnt graphical elements become editable as do pnt to line graphical elements.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Symmetric Suspension:\plain\fs20 Switches the suspension type between symmetric and asymmetric. This affects both corner models and full axle models. When set to symmetric points that are identified as symmetric pairs by the template are kept symmetric when one of the pair is modified.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Point Coincidence Pick:\plain\fs20 Enables \uldb Point Coincidence\plain\fs20 checking. With Point Coincidence on, editing hard points checks for more than one hard point within the pick tolerance and presents a list for selection, including \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Selecting all points creates an equivalent temporary group during any subsequent change.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / All Settings (Ctrl+S):\plain\fs20 Opens a single display window that allows a single point of access to a large number of the graphical, graph and setup settings. This consolidated display supplements the existing individual menu structure to provide quicker overall control of the display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 2 Point Link:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 2 Point Link is a simple part having two connection points, such as a track rod or tie rod.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 3 Point Wishbone:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 3 Point Wishbone is a simple part having three connection points, normally two to ground (or sub-frame) with the third being a ball joint.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 4 Point Wishbone:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 4 Point Wishbone is a simple part having four connection points, normally two inboard connected to ground (or sub-frame) with the outer two being ball joint connections to a hub/stub axle.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 3 Point Stub Axle:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 3 Point Stub Axle part has three connection points, normally these would be an upper and lower ball joint and a tie rod connection. This part also adds a wheel centre and stub axle point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 4 Point Stub Axle:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 4 Point Stub Axle part has four connection points, normally these would be a combination of wishbone ball joints and a tie rod connections. This part also adds a wheel centre and stub axle point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 5 Point Stub Axle:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 5 Point Stub Axle part has five connection points, normally these would be a combination of wishbone ball joints and a tie rod connections. This part also adds a wheel centre and stub axle point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 3 Point Strut:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 3 Point Strut part has three connection points, normally these would be the strut top, lower ball joint and a tie rod. This part also adds the wheel centre, stub axle and slider points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 4 Point Strut:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a new part to the current template. The 4 Point Strut part has four connection points, normally these would be the strut top, and a combination of ball joints and a tie rods. This part also adds the wheel centre, stub axle and slider points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Add Damper:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a Damper to the current template. Technically the Damper is not a part but two points tagged to identify the damper upper and lower attachment points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Add Spring:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a Spring to the current template. Technically the Spring is not a part but two points tagged to identify the spring upper and lower attachment points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Add Spring-Damper:\plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a co-axial Spring-Damper to the current template. Technically the Spring-Damper is not a part but two points tagged to identify the spring-damper upper and lower attachment points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Add Bump Stop: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a Bump Stop to the current template. Technically the Bump Stop is not a part but two points tagged to identify the Bump Stop upper and lower attachment points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Add 3 Point SubFrame: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a part to the current template. The 3 point sub frame has three attachments points that would normally be connected to ground. Suspension links could then be attached to this sub frame rather than directly to ground.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Add 4 Point SubFrame: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a part to the current template. The 4 point sub frame has four attachments points that would normally be connected to ground. Suspension links could then be attached to this sub frame rather than directly to ground.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Semi Trailing Arm: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a part to the current template. The Semi Trailing Arm has two attachment points that would normally be connected to ground. This part also adds the wheel centre and stub axle points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / Twist Beam: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds two parts to the current template. The Twist Beam has two attachment points that would normally be connected to ground. This part also adds the wheel centre and stub axle points for both sides.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 1 Part Rigid Axle: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds a part to the current template. The 1 Part Rigid Axle has four attachment points that would normally be connected to tie rods. This part also adds the wheel centre and stub axle points for both sides.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Part / 2 Part Rigid Axle: \plain\fs20 When in template builder mode adds two parts to the current template. The 2 Part Rigid Axle has five attachment points that would normally be connected to tie rods. This part also adds the wheel centre and stub axle points for both sides.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Add Point / to Ground, Abs Position\'85:\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. A new point is added to the template and attached to the ground. The user is then presented with the current properties for editing.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Rel to Point Pos (Cartesian)\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined in Cartesian coordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Rel to Point Pos (Spherical)\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined in Spherical coordinates.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Rel to Point Pos (Cylindrical)\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined in Cylindrical coordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Between Points\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select two points on the part between which is added the new point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Abs Position\'85:\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once selected a point is added at the user defined absolute position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Rel to Point Pos. (Cartesian):\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined in Cartesian coordinates.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Rel to Point Pos. (Spherical):\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined in Spherical coordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Rel to Point Pos. (Cylindrical):\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined in Cylindrical coordinates.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Part, Between Points\'85:\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select two points on the part between which is added the new point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / to Graphical Element (Pick)\plain\fs20 Adds a new point to the template who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s position is based on the selected graphical element. Graphical elements can have one or more \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point such as sphere centre which can be selected. Use the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hover over\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 functionality to indicate the graphical element that will be selected.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Point / Calculated Point\'85:\plain\fs20 Adds a new \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 calculated\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point to the current template. These calculated points are a series of pre-defined positional points that can be optional included in the template. The different points range from the Tyre Contact Point (TCP) through to the damper normal. These calculated points whilst their position can\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t be edited (as they are calculated points), they can be set as visible and used in the drawing of graphics and in user defined SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. A brief description of each is given below:
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b TCP\plain\fs20 \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 The tyre contact point, the point on the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tyre disc in contact with the ground plane.
|
|
\par \b Castored TCP\plain\fs20 , The position that the original \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 static\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 TCP point moves to under the prescribed articulation.
|
|
\par \b Steer Axis (Virtual) upper\plain\fs20 , An upper point placed on the derived steering axis. Together with the equivalent lower axis point this can be used to graphically show the virtual steering axis.
|
|
\par \b Steer Axis (Virtual) lower\plain\fs20 , A lower point placed on the derived steering axis. Together with the equivalent upper axis point this can be used to graphically show the virtual steering axis.
|
|
\par \pard \b KPI Normal\plain\fs20 , The intersection point on the kingpin axis from the normal to the spindle axis.
|
|
\par \b Castor Intersect,\plain\fs20 The intersection point of the castor axis and the ground plane.
|
|
\par \b Spindle Normal,\plain\fs20 The intersection point on the spindle axis from the normal to the steering axis.
|
|
\par \b Spindle/Damper Normal,\plain\fs20 The intersection point on the spindle axis from the normal to the damper axis.
|
|
\par \b Damper Normal,\plain\fs20 The intersection point on the damper axis from the normal to the spindle axis.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Spring 1 (pick two points):\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a spring to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two spring end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20 menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Spring 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Spring 2 (pick two points):\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a spring to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two spring end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20 menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Spring 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Damper 1 (pick two points):\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a damper to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two damper end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20 menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Damper 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Damper 2 (pick two points):\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a damper to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two damper end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20 menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Damper 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / BumpStop 1 (pick two points):\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a bump stop to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two bump stop end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20 menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the BumpStop 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor. Its properties are set via the Bump Stop data menu.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / BumpStop 2 (pick two points):\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a bump stop to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two bump stop end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and \i Add Point / to Ground\plain\fs20 menu options to do this if they don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the BumpStop 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor. Its properties are set via the Bump Stop data menu.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Two Part Rack:\plain\fs20 This function provides a simple single click method of adding a two-part compliant rack to the template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs both steering attachment points to have already been defined in the template. This option adds two parts, (the rack cross-link and the rack bush), six new points, (including both connection points and C of G points), four new bushes and associated graphic elements. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Roll Bar (pick part):\plain\fs20 This function provides a simple method of adding a roll-bar to the current models template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs to connect to both suspension sides. The type of roll\plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 bar it adds uses two points to ground and drop links from the bar ends to the suspension part. Thus the user must pick the attachment part and define a point on this part for the drop link to attach to. You do not pre-define this connecting point but enter its global position as part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add Roll Bar\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 function, (it is automatically mirrored across to the other side). This function adds three new parts, ten new points, seven new bushes and associated graphics. The reason for the odd number of bushes is because the roll bar stiffness is defined through a revolute bush placed such that it joins the two halves of the roll bar. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Roll Bar (pick point):\plain\fs20 This function is similar to that above in that it provides a simple method of adding a roll-bar to the current models template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs to connect to both suspension sides. The type of roll\plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 bar it adds uses two points to ground and drop links from the bar ends to the suspension part. Thus the user must pick the attachment point for the drop link to attach to. (the attachment is automatically mirrored across to the other side via the symmetric point function). This function adds three new parts, eight new points, seven new bushes and associated graphics. The reason for the odd number of bushes is because the roll bar stiffness is defined through a revolute bush placed such that it joins the two halves of the roll bar. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Compliant Hub(s):\plain\fs20 This function provides a simple single click method of adding a compliant hub element to the template. This existing upright part is detected and replaced by two parts, the upright and the hub. A compliant bush is placed between the two and tagged such that in compliant mode it picks up the default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 stiffness unless specifically defined by the user.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Drive Shaft(s):\plain\fs20 This function provides a simple single click method of adding the drive shaft geometry to the template. It does not add parts and joints to the model only graphical points to represent the drive shaft joint geometry. This drive shaft geometry is then used to calculate the forces and torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s applied to the upright due to the supplied input drive torques. Two drive shaft types are available a fixed length drive shaft where the inner joint accommodates the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 plunge\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or a vary length drive shaft where the shaft is assumed to be two part with its own splined sliding joint.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / SubFrame Part (pick Points):\plain\fs20 This function provides a method to modify the current template by adding a subframe part. This part is connected to ground at the selected existing ground points. Individual points are then selected to switch from being connected to ground to connected to this new subframe part.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Length Actuator:\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a specific control component to the model. The Length actuator combines a distance sensing change input with a change in length setting output. The input distance is set as the incremental distance between two points. On add, by default this is set to the spring1 points, but can be post edited by the user. The user is required to pick the two points for which the length is controlled by the actuator. The two points must be different but on the same part. The relationship of sensor displacement and change in picked length is based on a user editable look-up table. Each length actuator has its own look-up table. The application of these length actuators is based on a one step delay, this is because with a directly coupled solve the kinematic solutions will tend not to converge due to the coupled nature. To edit the properties of an actuator, ensure visible via \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solver\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option and then when in edit mode pick the actuator required to edit. Its graphical properties are displayed with the look-up table being editable via a further icon selection.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Position Actuator:\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a specific control component to the model. Similar to the Length actuator above it combines a distance sensing change input with a change in position setting output. The input distance is set as the incremental distance between two points. On add, by default this is set to the spring1 points, but can be post edited by the user. The user is required to pick a point for which the position is controlled by the actuator. A user defined global vector passing through the picked point defines the position change. The point must be attached to ground. The relationship of sensor displacement and change in picked position is based on a user editable look-up table. Each actuator has its own look-up table. The application of these position actuators is based on a one step delay, this is because with a directly coupled solve the kinematic solutions will tend not to converge due to the coupled nature. To edit the properties of an actuator, ensure visible via \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solver\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option and then when in edit mode pick the actuator required to edit. Its graphical properties are displayed with the look-up table being editable via a further icon selection.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Abs Pos:\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. The user then specifies its actual location in absolute global co-ordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Rel to Point Pos:\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. To define its location the user must then pick a point on this part and specify its location relative to the selected point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Between Points:\plain\fs20 Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. To define its location the user must then pick two points on this part the C of G is then positioned midway between these selected points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add to Model / Steering Effort Points + Force Set:\plain\fs20 Provides a simple single click method of adding a set of points to the steerable hub that can be used for attaching a force set that moves with the steered hub. This menu includes the creation of this new force set, added after the last of the currently defined force sets. The points are defined in a local coordinate system that is also added as part of this menu action.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Part:\plain\fs20 In template builder mode allows for parts and associated points to be deleted from the current template through on screen picking.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Point:\plain\fs20 In template builder mode allows for points and associated graphical elements to be deleted from the current template through on screen picking.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Graphic or Measure:\plain\fs20 In template builder mode allows for graphical and measure elements to be deleted from the current template through on screen picking.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Spring 1:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the spring 1 definition from the current selected models template. Note that the spring 1 element tags two end points as being associated with the spring. On deletion of the spring 1 element the two points remain defined in the model template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Spring 2:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the spring 2 definition from the current selected models template. Note that the spring 2 element tags two end points as being associated with the spring. On deletion of the spring 2 element the two points remain defined in the model template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Damper 1:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the damper 1 definition from the current selected models template. Note that the damper 1 element tags two end points as being associated with the damper. On deletion of the damper 1 element the two points remain defined in the model template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Damper 2:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the damper 2 definition from the current selected models template. Note that the damper 2 element tags two end points as being associated with the damper. On deletion of the damper 2 element the two points remain defined in the model template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / BumpStop 1:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the bumpstop 1 definition from the current selected models template. Note that the bumpstop 1 element tags two end points as being associated with the bump stop. On deletion of the bumpstop 1 element the two points remain defined in the model template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / BumpStop 2:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the bumpstop 2 definition from the current selected models template. Note that the bumpstop 2 element tags two end points as being associated with the bump stop. On deletion of the bumpstop 2 element the two points remain defined in the model template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Two Part Rack:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the Two Part Rack parts and points from the current selected models template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Roll Bar:\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the Roll Bar parts and points from the current selected models template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Compliant Hub(s):\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the Compliant Hub(s) parts and points from the current selected models template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Delete from Model / Drive Shaft(s):\plain\fs20 Provides a convenience function that automatically removes the Drive Shaft(s) parts and points from the current selected models template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model:\plain\fs20 In some instances even for an independent suspension it is required to model a complete axle rather than a corner model. This may be because it is required to include a compliant rack, anti roll-bar, sub-frame or any connecting part. This can either be done by hand through the template editor or by using this convenience function. This single click operation will review the current template and then add the necessary parts, point, connections and graphics to produce a full axle template. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Add Spacer to Model:\plain\fs20 This function provides a simple \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 pick to add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 method of adding a spacer to the template. Spacers can either be between two parts or between a part and ground. Spacers are added with properties of length and orientation. The orientation being defined by a global vector. Spacers can then be modified in the usual ways, edit drag, joggle etc. They can also be added to the component toolbox as a variable property part.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Mesh Rigid Part:\plain\fs20 This \uldb \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91 meshing\'92\plain\f0\fs20 \f1\uldb utility allows the user to split a single part into a series of smaller sub-parts to provide a technique for including component flexibility\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Convert Ball Joint to Slot:\plain\uldb\fs20 This utility allows the user to convert a simple ball joint such as the outer track rod into a slotted joint. The slotted joint is effectively a special case of a universal joint. A special case in that one of the points defining the 2nd axis lies on the line of the 1st axis. This utility modifies the template by the addition of a part to represent the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 spider\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 of the joint and makes connections between this part and the two original connecting parts. The orientation of the slot is controlled by the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 normal\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 axis marker point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Merge Spring1 > Damper1:\plain\uldb\fs20 This simple function conveniently merges the point definitions of spring 1 and damper 1. In this case the Spring 1 points are changed to be the same as Damper1\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 s. In addition if the Spring 1 points are no longer referenced by another other special element or solver they are removed from the template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Merge Damper1 > Spring1:\plain\uldb\fs20 This simple function conveniently merges the point definitions of spring 1 and damper 1. In this case the Damper 1 points are changed to be the same as Spring1\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 s. In addition if the Damper 1 points are no longer referenced by another other special element or solver they are removed from the template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Merge Spring2 > Damper2:\plain\uldb\fs20 This simple function conveniently merges the point definitions of spring 2 and damper 2. In this case the Spring 2 points are changed to be the same as Damper2\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 s. In addition if the Spring 2 points are no longer referenced by another other special element or solver they are removed from the template.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Merge Damper2 > Spring2:\plain\uldb\fs20 This simple function conveniently merges the point definitions of spring 2 and damper 2. In this case the Damper 2 points are changed to be the same as Spring2\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 s. In addition if the Damper 2 points are no longer referenced by another other special element or solver they are removed from the template.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Convert Damper1 to Parts:\plain\uldb\fs20 This simple function converts the Damper 1 to parts. Two parts are added to represent the upper and lower portions of the damper. Local coordinate axes systems are added to define the associated points and mimic the behavior of a slider.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Convert Damper2 to Parts:\plain\uldb\fs20 This simple function converts the Damper 2 to parts. Two parts are added to represent the upper and lower portions of the damper. Local coordinate axes systems are added to define the associated points and mimic the behavior of a slider.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Set Ride Height - Bump:\plain\uldb\fs20 A utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height by simple change in the bump height. The value required is a delta from the current position. A positive value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\uldb\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Bump + Pitch:\plain\uldb\fs20 A utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height by a combination of bump height change and pitch angle. The values required are the deltas from the current position. A positive bump value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height and a positive pitch angle rotates towards the rear. For a full vehicle model the pitch rotation is about the front wheel center axis. For a single end model the pitch is rotation about the modeled suspension end.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\uldb\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Adjust Springs:\plain\uldb\fs20 A utility function that will reset the vehicle spring fitted lengths such that the spring forces balance the defined unsprung weight split. This results in no change in ride height, just changes to the relevant spring fitted length(s). The user must provide values for the unsprung mass and the percentage of the unsprung weight on the front axle.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\uldb\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Match to Springs:\plain\uldb\fs20 A utility function that will reset the vehicle ride height such that the spring forces balance the defined unsprung weight split. This results a both bump and pitch changes in ride position, (only pitch if full vehicle model). The relevant spring fitted length(s) are also changed. The user must provide values for the unsprung mass and the percentage of the unsprung weight on the front axle. This allows the user to have spring properties dictate the ride height position.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Set Ride Height \plain\f0\uldb\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Match to Weight Change:\plain\uldb\fs20 A utility function that will reset the vehicle ride height based on a change in vehicle unsprung weights. It is not assumed that the initial vehicle ride position balances the current spring settings, (this can be checked/set first using one of the two options above), but effects the change in ride position based purely on the difference between the two defined weight conditions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Groups / Current:\plain\uldb\fs20 Makes a previously created points group\plain\fs20 \uldb the current group. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list. Groups limit edit functions to just hard points that are members of the group. Edited points then move as a group, i.e. same translation applied to all.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Groups / Cancel:\plain\uldb\fs20 Cancels the current group\plain\fs20 \uldb selection, returning back to all hard points accessible for individual editing.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Groups / Delete:\plain\uldb\fs20 Deletes the selected group\plain\fs20 \uldb . This does not delete any points from the model, (as you can\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 t do this at any level other than template editing), merely removes the group association. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Groups / Create\'85:\plain\uldb\fs20 Creates an new points group. A new group must be given a unique label to identify it. The number of points required to add to it set and each required point picked from the available suspension end lists.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Groups / Pick Temporary\'85:\plain\uldb\fs20 Creates an new temporary points group . The points are added to this group by selecting a displayed screen region. All visible points within the region being added to it. Unlike the conventional groups this does not need to have a label nor does it need to be \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 made current\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 , once the points have been picked it will automatically be set to current. Temporary groups are not saved and when made non-current using the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 delete\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 option they are lost and would need to be re-created.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit / Groups / Edit:\plain\uldb\fs20 Provides an editing option to existing point groups. The points in the group can be changed, added to or removed from. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \plain\b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - View
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Refresh:\plain\fs20 Updates all graphical displays, both \uldb Graphics\plain\fs20 and \uldb Graphs\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Dynamic Viewing:\plain\fs20 Menu option to switch between \uldb dynamic viewing\plain\fs20 and \uldb edit\plain\fs20 modes. Either by a toggle action or by specific selection..
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Translate View:\plain\fs20 Sets the \uldb dynamic view\plain\fs20 mode to translate. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Translation by left mouse button hold and move.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Scale View:\plain\fs20 Sets the \uldb dynamic view\plain\fs20 mode to scale. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Scale by left mouse button hold and drag vertically.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Rotate View:\plain\fs20 Sets the \uldb dynamic view\plain\fs20 mode to rotate. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Rotation by left mouse button hold and move.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Pick View Centre:\plain\fs20 Allows the view centre to be picked. The pick is based on the nearest picked hard point. The current view is translated such that picked point becomes the view centre, no change is made to either the scale or orientation of the view. Subsequent view rotations will be about this new \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 object\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Zoom:\plain\fs20 Pick the area of the display to zoom to fit current window. The zoom function can accommodate either a two press approach to area selection or a single press, hold and drag selection, a simple time delay trap being used to identify which type is being used. The zoomed view will retain the correct aspect ratio, (i.e. no distortion is allowed), and thus the final displayed region will include additional regions at either the top and bottom or both sides.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Autoscale (Ctrl+A):\plain\fs20 Resets the graphical view such that all drawn components appear within the display window. Note that this is only applied to the graphics window and not the \uldb graphs\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Fill Style:\plain\fs20 Sets the fill style to be used in the graphics display. Not all the fill style options are supported by every machine. Two \uldb graphics frame\plain\fs20 driver options are used one of which will not correctly support two of the fill styles. The fill styles available are, Wire Frame, Filled, Hidden Line and Depth Buffered (flat shaded). The later two will not work correctly unless the graphics frame type has been set to OpenGL
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Std Views:\plain\fs20 Three orthogonal views are offered to aid simple planar viewing of the 3D model. The std views are y-z (front view), z-x (side view) and x-y (top view). Equivalent view toolbar icons are also available. An additional ISO view is available, this does not have an equivalent toolbar icon.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Save\'85:\plain\fs20 Saves the current 3D view settings to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved views are lost when the application is closed. Any number of views can be stored.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Recall Saved:\plain\fs20 Recalls a saved view, replacing the current view with that in the temporary store. Saved views are identified by their labels.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Delete Saved:\plain\fs20 Deletes a saved view from the temporary store. Only valid use is the simplifying of the displayed options through reduced menu list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Saved Views / Delete All:\plain\fs20 Deletes all saved views from the temporary store. Quicker than deleting one at a time if looking to start the storing from scratch.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 View / Set Display Mode Tool\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the display mode tool. This provides a single dialogue box that can be used to control all 3d view display modes. The four available display modes are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Articulation Display
|
|
\par \tab Deformed Geometry (compliance mode only)
|
|
\par \tab Mode Shape (compliance mode only)
|
|
\par \tab Forced-Damped (compliance mode only)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Each of the four display modes can be animated. The speed of animation since the introduction of segments requires a speed of refresh value. This can be edited directly via the relevant menu or changed via the slider given on the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Display Mode Tool\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 just beneath the animate icon.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The articulation display can be set as one of the following;
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \tab Full + Half + Static (normal articulation displacement display)
|
|
\par \tab Full + Static (normal articulation displacement display)
|
|
\par \tab Static Only (normal articulation displacement display)
|
|
\par \tab All Steps (normal articulation displacement display)
|
|
\par Single Step (define which step from current articulation list)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm175.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 The Display Mode Tool.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The compliant deformed geometry is shown for a specified articulation position and for a defined scaler. This scaler is applied to the actual compliant displacements to enable small displacements to be visualized.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The compliant Mode Shape display is for a selected mode. The modes are identified by number rather than by frequency, (although the frequency value is shown on the 3d view). A scaler is also applied to modal displays to enable small modal displacements to be visualized.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The Forced-Damped display shown for a specified frequency. A scaler is applied to the amplitudes to enable small displacements to be visualized.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 As an alternative to using the display mode tool, individual menus can be used to set the display mode and associated properties.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Full+Half+Static:\plain\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and will show the suspension at full travel, mid travel and static. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Full+Static:\plain\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and will show the suspension at full travel and static. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Static Only:\plain\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and will show the suspension at static position only.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / All Steps:\plain\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and will show the suspension at all calculated travel points. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Single Step:\plain\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Articulation Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and will show the suspension at a specified single travel step. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 travel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode. A number greater than the actual available steps will be clipped to the limiting value.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Deformed Geometry:\plain\fs20 Sets the display mode to \uldb \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91 Deformed Geometry\plain\f0\fs20 \uldb \'92 showing the suspensions compliant deformation at a specified single travel step. The currently specified scaling factor will be applied to all displacements.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \f1\cf1 View / Screen Display / Mode Shape:\plain\uldb\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Mode Shape\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 showing the suspensions modal shape for the static position for the currently specified mode number. The currently specified scaling factor will be applied to all modal displacements.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Screen Display / Forced-Damped:\plain\uldb\fs20 Sets the display mode to \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Forced-Damped\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 showing the suspensions forced response for the static position for the currently specified frequency. The defined scaling factor will be applied to all amplitudes.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Animate (On/Off):\plain\uldb\fs20 Switches on animation\plain\fs20 \uldb of the suspension(s) for the currently defined display mode. All standard viewing and editing functions can still be used whilst the animation is on. The actual display mode, position, articulation type etc are controlled through other menu settings, (see above).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Free Body Diagram:\plain\uldb\fs20 Changes the graphical display to just show the points, forces and graphical elements associated with a single part. The selection menu allows the user to pick for the selected corner any available part.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / Definition Values:\plain\uldb\fs20 A utility is available that allows the user to graphically modify the model through basic angles and offsets. This menu option switches the visibility of the \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Definition Values\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 which when in an orthogonal view indicate main angles (i.e. Camber Castor) and offsets. These can be edited, joggles or dragged in the same way as conventional hard points, leading to an alternative method of rapidly defining model points.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \cf1 View / SetUp Definition Values:\plain\uldb\fs20 The \plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'91\f1 Definition Values\plain\f0\uldb\fs20 \'92\f1 utility can be structured by the user to vary how the methods are applied. In particular which points remain fixed and which are modified to meet the defined angles/offsets.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \plain\b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Tracking
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Toggle:\plain\fs20 Not strictly a toggle, but a cycle through the available tracking options. The available tracking options change depending whether the current view is orthogonal or not.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / All:\plain\fs20 Only applicable if in an orthogonal view. \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 actually means two axis, i.e. all axes in the current orthogonal view.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / X:\plain\fs20 Changes the tracking direction to the x-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the y-z orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Y:\plain\fs20 Changes the tracking direction to the y-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the x-z orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Z:\plain\fs20 Changes the tracking direction to the z-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the x-y orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / User Vector:\plain\fs20 Changes the tracking direction to the user defined vector. The user vector is defined elsewhere either through point picking or by directly editing the vector values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Include User Vector on Cycle:\plain\fs20 When checked, the user vector will be included in the cycling through the tracking direction options, i.e. All, X, Y, Z, (User), All, X\'85.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Edit User Vector:\plain\fs20 Direct editing of the user vector direction. Based on three components, X Y and Z.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Pick User Vector:\plain\fs20 The user vector will be defined by a current graphical line direction. Picking of the required line sets the user vector components. If the following option is set as this graphical line is changed (through model modifications) the user vector is similarly changed.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Lock to Picked User Vector:\plain\fs20 When checked the user vector when picked will be locked to the picked vector, such that if the model hard point positions are altered and the picked vector direction changes then the user vector will be changed to this new orientation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Tracking Style / Linear (default):\plain\fs20 The original (and thus default) method used for tracking was along one (or more ) linear directions. When this option is checked a point will track along a linear direction (or possibly within a 2-D plane when using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option). Other tracking options have been added, see below.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Tracking Style / Spherical:\plain\fs20 The spherical tracking style will modify the points position when dragged such that it will be put back on to the surface of a user specified sphere. The sphere being set by a previously selected centre point and the sphere radius being the original distance of the modified point from the sphere centre. This modification of the points position after it has been dragged means that whilst the tracking direction might be set to just one axis (i.e. Z) it could be modified in the other two directions when put back on to the sphere\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s surface.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Tracking Style / Circular:\plain\fs20 The circular tracking style will modify the points position when dragged such that it will be put on the arc of a user specified 3d circle. The circle being set by a previously selected centre point and point in the plan of the circle. This modification of the points position after it has been dragged means that whilst the tracking direction might be set to just one axis (i.e. Z) it could be modified in the other two directions when put back on to the sphere\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s surface.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Pick Spherical Tracking Centre:\plain\fs20 Single screen pick of the centre of the tracking sphere for future use of the spherical tracking style.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Pick Circular Tracking Centre and Plane:\plain\fs20 Two point screen picks of the centre of the tracking circle and a point in the plane of the circle, for future use of the circular tracking style.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Visible:\plain\fs20 Sets the visibility of the tracking lines. Note that tracking lines are only visible when in dynamic view mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Tracking / Length:\plain\fs20 Tracking lines are drawn on the display to a fixed length. The size of this graphical length can be changed from the default value through the opened edit box.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Graphics
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Graphics Switches Menu Tree:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of a tree structure dialogue box that includes the menus for all graphics settings. Provides an alternative method for users to control graphics visibility\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s without having to use the individual pull down menu entries.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Short Labels:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the template short labels on the graphical display. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file. The short labels have previously been referred to as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 point nos\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 this is historical in that originally that had to be an integer. This has changed such that they are latterly 8 character strings.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Long Labels:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the template point long labels on the graphical display. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file. They are referred to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 long\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 to distinguish them from the previous menus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 short\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 label.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Template Nos:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility for point labeling on the graphical display, showing the points number in the template. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file. These are the actual point position in the template and are not connected to any user defined label.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Limits / Visible:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the \uldb Limit\plain\fs20 boxes. If this turns the visibility to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 it will also if necessary set the Use to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , i.e. the limit boxes can only be in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if visible. Toggling the visibility to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 does not make them in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , i.e. limit boxes can be visible but not in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 setting is controlled by the next menu item.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Limits / Use:\plain\fs20 Toggles the point \uldb limit\plain\fs20 boxes \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 setting. When in use they limit the joggling or dragging of hard points to within the limited region. Limit boxes are also used for tolerance analysis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Point Values:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the x,y and z coordinates for the suspension hard points. When \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the static coordinates are drawn adjacent to each hard point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Template Part Nos:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the template part numbers. When \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the template part numbers are drawn at the geometric centre of each part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part Labels:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the template part labels. When \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the template part labels are drawn adjacent to the geometric centre of each part.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Marker:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the part C of G markers. Part C of G\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s can only be drawn when in compliant mode. Part C of G markers are drawn as green and black quadrant style images similar to the body C of G marker.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Axes Points:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the part C of G axis points. Part C of G\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s can only be drawn when in compliant mode. Part C of G axis points can be picked and dragged as well as edited to re-define the C of G axes. C of G axes are used to orientate local mass properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Local Axes:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the part C of G local axes. These graphic axes show the current local axes as defined by the local axis points. Part mass properties are defined relative to these local axes.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Visibility:\plain\fs20 Controls the visibility of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graphics items. Options are given to switch individual graphic types on and off, Toggle all enhanced graphic types, set them all to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or set them all to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . For the purpose of this menu the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Enhanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graphics items are, Spring, Damper, Wheel, Bushes, Grid and Body. The other items in this visibility list are not affected by the global \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 enhanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 status changes, only they\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 re own individual settings. These are; Triad, Origin Marker, C of G marker, Moving Ground/wheels and Roll axis.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Display Ends:\plain\fs20 Sets the visibility switch for each suspension end. This enables the display to show both, front only or rear only, in a model that contains two axles. Menu has no relevance to a single axle model.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Display Both Sides:\plain\fs20 For visualization enables the viewing of both suspension sides on an axle when the template is defined as a single corner. For full axle templates this switch will have no effect on the graphics display but will change the graph displays. Menu acts as a toggle, so un-check menu to disable viewing.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Colours:\plain\fs20 Provides control over individual plot element colours. Modified colours settings are stored to the users ini file. The elements that can be defined via this menu include; Static Links, Incremental Links, Static Points, Incremental Points, Picked Points, Static Roll Centre Position, Incremental Roll Centre Position, 2D Axis Lines, 3D Drag Lines, Triad, Static 2D Construction Lines, Incremental 2D Construction Lines, Limit Lines (on), Limit lines (off), Point Values and Point Nos.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Colours / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Colours:\plain\fs20 Provides control over individual Enhanced plot element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The elements that can be defined via this menu include; Static Spring, Incremental Spring, Static Damper, Incremental Damper, Static Wheel, Incremental Wheel, Wheel Fill, Static Bushes, Incremental Bushes, Grid, Static Body, Incremental Body and Body Fill.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Colours / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant enhanced graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Sizes / Edit:\plain\fs20 Displays the Enhanced graphics element sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Spring Diameter, No of Spring Coils, Lower Damper Tube Diameter, Upper Damper Tube diameter, Damper No. of Facets, Pivot Diameter, Pivot No. of Facets, Tyre No. of Facets, Tyre Diameter Shoulder ratio, Tyre Width Shoulder Ratio, 3D Tracking Line Length, Joggle Symbol Size, C of G Symbol Size and Ground Plane Grid Size.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Enhanced Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant enhanced graphics element sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Label Sizes / Edit:\plain\fs20 Displays the current Label sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the user ini file. Sizes that can be changed are the hard point values size and the hard point number size.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Label Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant label sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Colours:\plain\fs20 Provides control over individual compliance plot element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The compliance elements that can be defined via this menu include; Ball Joint (Rigid), Bush (Compliant), Tyre Spring, External Force and Calculated Force.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Colours / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant compliance graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Edit:\plain\fs20 Displays the compliance graphics element sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Ball Joint Diameter, Ball Joint Circumferential Complexity, Ball Joint Height Complexity, Bush Radius, Bush Length, Bush Circumferential Complexity, Bush Height Complexity, Bush Axis Length, Tyre Spring Diameter, External Force Head, External Force Fixed Length and External/Internal Force Scaled Length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant compliance graphics element sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Visibility:\plain\fs20 Controls the visibility of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graphics items. Options are given to switch individual graphic types on and off. For the purpose of this menu the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graphics items are, Ball Joints, Bushes, Tyre Spring, Bush Axis points, Bush Local Axis, External Forces, External Force Axis, Calculated Forces and Calculated Force Values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Visibility / External Force Type:\plain\fs20 Three types of compliant external force display are available. A fixed length arrow and a fixed size head that does not change with its magnitude or a scaled force vector whose magnitude is multiplied by a graphical length scalar but still with a fixed size head or finally both a scaled length and a scaled head size.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Calculated Force Type:\plain\fs20 Three types of compliant calculated force display are available. A fixed length arrow and a fixed size head that does not change with its magnitude or a scaled force vector whose magnitude is multiplied by a graphical length scalar but still with a fixed size head or finally both a scaled length and a scaled head size.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Copy to Clipboard:\plain\fs20 Copies the current graphical display to the Windows clipboard such that it can be pasted into other applications. Cannot be used with the OpenGL graphics frame.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Save to File:\plain\fs20 Saves the graphics display to a file. Three file formats are supported, bmp, jpg and png.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Print / Current View:\plain\fs20 Prints the current graphics display to a selected printer. The user is prompted, via the standard Windows printer, to identify from the available printers the required settings. This option is currently not available for the OpenGL graphics frame. Only the current view is printed.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Print / 4x View:\plain\fs20 Prints the current graphics display to a selected printer. The user is prompted, via the standard Windows printer, to identify from the available printers the required settings. This option is currently not available for the OpenGL graphics frame. This option prints 4 images on the same page, one for each of the standard views, three orthogonal and the ISO view.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Print (to default printer) / Current View:\plain\fs20 Prints the current graphics display to the current default printer. This option is currently not available for the OpenGL graphics frame. Only the current view is printed.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Print (to default printer) / 4x View:\plain\fs20 Prints the current graphics display to the current default printer. This option is currently not available for the OpenGL graphics frame. This option prints 4 images on the same page, one for each of the standard views, three orthogonal and the ISO view.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / AVI File Writer\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the AVI file write dialogue. This provides a set of simple to use methods for creating AVI files. Users can create an AVI based on the currently defined displacement, animating over the defined range. Or creating an animation sequence from a series of individual screen shots. The AVI file can be for the full graphics screen or a selected portion. No compression is currently used so whilst file sizes are larger, the issue over LCD projectors being unable to show due to unsupported compression is avoided.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Pnt Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Vector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required, a line is drawn through the first point who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s direction is set by the vector defined by the second and third picks, points need not be on the same part. The first and second picks can be the same point. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Xvector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global X axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Yvector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Y axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Zvector Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Z axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Plane-Norm:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction normal to the selected plane. The plane is identified by three point picks. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-UserVector:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by a user vector. The line is drawn to a global clipped length
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Vector^Vector :\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the cross product of two user-selected vectors. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Vector-Vector Int X-Vector:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn along the x-direction through the intersection point of two vectors. Each vectors being defined by two points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Vector-Vector Int Y-Vector:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn along the y-direction through the intersection point of two vectors. Each vectors being defined by two points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Vector-Vector Int Z-Vector:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. A line is drawn along the z-direction through the intersection point of two vectors. Each vectors being defined by two points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Line Perp Vector-Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. An extended line is drawn through the picked point and a point on the picked line. This second point being the position of a normal to the first point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Line / Pnt-Pnt Vector-Line:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. An extended line is drawn through the two picked points. This differs from the earlier option of Pnt-Pnt line in that it is extended to a user specified distance beyond the picked points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Cylinder / Pivot:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Pivot graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Cylinder / Tube:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Tube graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Cylinder / Vector-Radius-Length:\plain\fs20 Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the second and third point picks. The radius and length of the cylinder are defined directly.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Cylinder / Pnt-Vector-Radius-Length:\plain\fs20 Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined directly by the user defined vector and of defined cylinder radius and length.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Circle / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required through which is drawn a circle, both the circle centre and radius are calculated and displayed as part of the graphical display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Circle / Cntr-Rad-Norm:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point of a defined radius and who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s normal is defined by the second and third picks. The first and second picks can be the same point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Circle / Cntr-Pnt-Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point and is drawn through the second point, (i.e. defines the radius), in a plane that contains the third picked point. All picked points must be different.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Circle / Pnt-Normal:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn through the first point about the defined normal vector. All picked points must be different. The derived circle centre and radius is drawn as part of the graphical element display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the first pick and the radius is set by the second pick.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Sphere / Pnt Radius:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. One hard point pick is required. The sphere is centered at the pick and given the radius specified by the user.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt Dia:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the mid point of the two picks, the radius being half the distance between them.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Four unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is drawn through the selected four points. Four points will define a unique sphere who\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s calculated radius and centre position is identified as part of the drawn graphical element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Facet / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Triangular Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Facet / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20 Adds a new Four noded Facet graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Four unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. Whilst points need not be in a plane, any facet drawn of non-planar nodes is not fully defined.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Plane / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds a plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Three unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Plane / Pnt-X-Y Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an X-Y plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Plane / Pnt-X-Z Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an X-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Plane / Pnt-Y-Z Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an Y-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Plane / Pnt-UserVector Plane:\plain\fs20 Adds an plane graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template drawn through the selected pick. The orientation of the plane is controlled by two user defined vectors. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Components / Pnt-Pnt Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the distance between the two points in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Components / Pnt-Line Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the perpendicular distance between the point and the line in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Components / Line-Line Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Graphic / Components / Pnt-Plane Comps:\plain\fs20 Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane in its x, y and z components.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Distance / Pnt-Pnt Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the total distance between the two points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Distance / Pnt-Line Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the total perpendicular distance between the point and the line.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Distance / Line-Line Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines as a total distance.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Distance / Pnt-Plane Dist:\plain\fs20 Adds a points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane as a total distance.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between three points graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The middle picks is the point for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the three point picks in degrees.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt Z-Axis Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the Z-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt Z-Axis X-X Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the Z-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template, only the angle component about the X-X axis is given. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt Z-Axis Y-Y Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the Z-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template, only the angle component about the Y-Y axis is given. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt X-Axis Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the X-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first picks is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt X-Axis Z-Z Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the X-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template, only the angle component about the Z-Z axis is given. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first picks is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt X-Axis Y-Y Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the X-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template, only the angle component about the Y-Y axis is given. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt Y-Axis Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the Y-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt Y-Axis Z-Z Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the Y-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template, only the angle component about the Z-Z axis is given. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Add Measure / Angle / Pnt-Pnt Y-Axis X-X Angle:\plain\fs20 Adds an angle between two points and the Y-axis graphical element to the selected ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 template, only the angle component about the X-X axis is given. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The first pick is the start of the vector for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the two point picks and the relevant axis in degrees.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Limit Box Corners:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit Box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 corners.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Bush Definition Points:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the Bush definition points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / C of G Definition Points:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the C of G definition points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Local coordinate Axis Definition Points:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the Local coordinate axis systems definition points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / External Force Definition Points:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 External Force\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 definition points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Pnt-Pnt Line:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the Pnt-Pnt Line graphical type.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Pivot:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the Pivot graphical type.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Tube:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the Tube graphical type.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls the pickability of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Pnt-Pnt-Pnt\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Facet graphical type.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphics / Pick Visibility / Skip All Graphics:\plain\fs20 To aid in picking data points in more complex models this menu option together, with other similar ones, enable certain graphical entities to be un-selectable. This menu controls all the graphical types.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Graphs
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / New-Open:\plain\fs20 Opens a new \uldb graph\plain\fs20 window. Each new graph will by default take the use y-variable from the available list. To change the y-variable once opened use the mouse right button menu options.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Visibility:\plain\fs20 Controls the visibility of the graph items. Options are given to switch individual graph items on and off. For the purpose of this menu the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 graph\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 items are; Grid Lines, Deviation Values, Point Symbols, Data Values, Derivative Values, Scope Line, User Line, Fit Line, Plot Line and Extended Axis Labels.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Colours:\plain\fs20 Provides control over individual graph element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The graph elements that can be defined via this menu include; Grid Lines, Background, Axis Lines and Text, Border Region, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Line Marker:\plain\fs20 Provides control over individual graph line markers. Modified marker settings are saved to the users ini file. The graph lines that marker types can be defined for are; Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line. The nine marker types available are Filled Diamond, Triangle, Inverted Triangle, Plus, Cross, Square, Diamond, Circle and Star.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Line Marker / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant graph line marker symbols back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Switch x-y Axis:\plain\fs20 Changes the visual appearance of the graphs. Swaps the x and y axes around from the normal, such that the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 y-variable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is plotted along the horizontal axis rather than the default vertical position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Increment Based X-Axis:\plain\fs20 Changes the drawing of the X-Axis such that instead of always having the 10 increments, the No of increments varies with the graph range, increment size being defined as a value rather than a fraction of the axis length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Increment Based Y-Axis:\plain\fs20 Changes the drawing of the Y-Axis such that instead of always having the 6 increments, the No of increments varies with the graph range, increment size being defined as a value rather than a fraction of the axis length.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / X-Axis Increment Values:\plain\fs20 Visibility switch for the x-axis labels showing graph increment values.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Y-Axis Increment Values:\plain\fs20 Visibility switch for the y-axis labels showing graph increment values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / X-Axis Limit Values:\plain\fs20 Visibility switch for the x-axis labels showing graph limit values.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Y-Axis Limit Values:\plain\fs20 Visibility switch for the y-axis labels showing graph limit values.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Autoscale (All):\plain\fs20 Autoscales all open graphs for both x and y-axes. Includes all visible lines. To autoscale individual graphs use the mouse right button menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Autoscale to Y Increment (All):\plain\fs20 Autoscales all open graphs y-axes. Includes all visible lines. The autoscaling is based on rounding to the nearest whole number of a specific increment. Each graph variable has its own editable increment setting. This autoscale option can also be applied to individual graphs through the right mouse menu of the specific graph.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / On:\plain\fs20 Controls the visibility of the scope line display. It is also controllable via the visibility settings above.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Store / Exclusive:\plain\fs20 Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results, (includes all variables not just those that are currently displayed). These scope lines are then \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 fixed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 for comparative on-graph display, (check relevant visibility switch set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ). The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Exclusive\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option implies that the results are copied into Scope position 1, and the four other scope positions (2 to 5) are emptied.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Store / Shuffle:\plain\fs20 Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results and saves it to scope position 1. All other existing scope data is shuffled down one slot such that one is copied into two etc and any information in position 5 is lost.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Store / Position n:\plain\fs20 Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results and saves it to scope position n. This will replace any data already stored in this scopes position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Clear / All:\plain\fs20 Clears the current scope data from all scope positions 1 to 5. Their isno need to clear the scope before capturing a new set, as Scope Line Store will overwrite any current scope values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Clear / Position n:\plain\fs20 Clears the current scope data from the selected position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / List Deviation From / Position n:\plain\fs20 Identifies which scope position should be used to determine the deviation value between the data and scope lines.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Scope / Scope Position Symbol:\plain\fs20 Sets the visibility of either the scope line symbol or when selected displays a number (1 to 5) rather than the symbol.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Copy Front-2D Data to User:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing 2D or 3D Front result lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Copy Rear Data to User:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing 3D Rear result lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Copy Front-2D Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing 2D or 3D Front scope lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones). You will need to identify which scope position to use from 1 to 5.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Copy Rear Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing 3D Rear scope lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones). You will need to identify which scope position to use from 1 to 5.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Clear Current User Store:\plain\fs20 Clears all user defined line data, (all variables are removed not just those currently visible on open graphs)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Create New DataSet\'85:\plain\fs20 Multiple \uldb user line\plain\fs20 sets can be managed through the use of User Line data sets. This menu item creates a new data set. Browse for the required folder location and define file name, default extension .dbs. On creation no user line sets are added to the new dataset.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Include DataSet\'85:\plain\fs20 Adds an existing \uldb user line\plain\fs20 dataset to the search list. The search list is stored to the users ini file. The search list provides direct access to any stored user line sets that have been added to these DataSets.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Remove DataSet:\plain\fs20 removes the selected \uldb user line\plain\fs20 data set from the search list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Load From:\plain\fs20 Provides a list of found \uldb user line\plain\fs20 sets that can be loaded from the data sets. The loaded user line data will replace any current values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Add Current to:\plain\fs20 Option to save the current \uldb user line\plain\fs20 data to one of the current datasets on the search list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / User Lines / Manage User Lines / Delete From:\plain\fs20 Option to remove a stored \uldb user line\plain\fs20 set from one of the current datasets on the search list. User line sets a re identified by the dataset label and line set label.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Marker Text Sizes / Edit Sizes:\plain\fs20 Displays the \uldb graph\plain\fs20 marker and text sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Data Line Marker Size, Scope Line Marker Size, User Line Marker Size, Graph Data Values Text Size, Compliance Title Text Size, Compliance Label Text Size and Compliance Values Text Size.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Marker Text Sizes / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant graph marker and text sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Decimal Points Display / Edit Settings:\plain\fs20 Displays the graph decimal points display for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; X-Data Listing, Y-Data Listing, Derivative Data Listing, Scope Deviation, User Deviation, X-Axis Label, Y-Axis Label and Compliance Graph Values.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Decimal Points Display / Set to Defaults:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to set all relevant graph decimal points displays back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Print All / 1 to Page / 3 to Page / 4 to Page / 6 to Page / 8 to Page\'85:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to print all open graphs. The user is prompted to select the required printer from those currently available. Specific menu options are given for 1,3,4,6 or 8 to a page. As many pages as required are printed to accommodate all open graphs at the selected number per page.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Print All (to default Printer) / 1 to Page / 3 to Page / 4 to Page / 6 to Page / 8 to Page:\plain\fs20 Single menu selection to print to the current default printer all open graphs. Specific menu options are given for 1,3,4,6 or 8 to a page. As many pages as required are printed to accommodate all open graphs at the selected number per page.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Graphs / Printer Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Option to set default printer and its properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Solve
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Toggle:\plain\fs20 Switches the solution type between moving ground plane or moving body. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane:\plain\fs20 Switches the solution type specifically to moving ground plane. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane Options / move TCP Z:\plain\fs20 Switches the ground plane point to be the tyre contact point. This is the default ground plane solution type. Thus defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 displacement values refer to displacement (or position) of the tyre contact point. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules and then only when the motion is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 moving ground plane\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane Options / move Wheel Centre Z:\plain\fs20 Switches the ground plane point to be the wheel centre point. Thus defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 displacement values refer to the displacement (or position) of the wheel centre. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules and then only when the motion is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 moving ground plane\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane Options / move Lower Ball Joint Z:\plain\fs20 Switches the ground plane point to be the lower ball joint point (assuming identified in the template). Thus defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 displacement values refer to the displacement (or position) of the lower ball joint. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules and then only when the motion is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 moving ground plane\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane Options / move Upper Ball Joint Z:\plain\fs20 Switches the ground plane point to be the upper ball joint point (assuming identified in the template). Thus defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 displacement values refer to the displacement (or position) of the upper ball joint. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules and then only when the motion is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 moving ground plane\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane Options / Opposed Bump Z:\plain\fs20 This option when switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 displaces the left and right hand wheels in opposite directions. The default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , has both wheels moving in the same direction. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules and then only when the motion is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 moving ground plane\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Ground Plane Options / Z Displacement as Position:\plain\fs20 This option when switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 takes the defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 bump values as being the absolute value of the ground plane point. When switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 (default) the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are taken as the displacement value for the ground plane point. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules and then only when the motion is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 moving ground plane\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Steering Options / Y Displacement as Position:\plain\fs20 This option when switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 takes the defined \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 steering values as being the absolute value of the steering point. When switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 (default) the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are taken as the displacement value for the steering point. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Body:\plain\fs20 Switches the solution type specifically to moving body. It is only applicable to the bump and combined articulation modules.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Motion / Solve By Number of Steps:\plain\fs20 This option when switched \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 solves at the defined number of steps between the specified travel limits rather than using the user defined increment.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / 2D Fix Option:\plain\fs20 For the \uldb 2D module\plain\fs20 a number of alternative solution techniques can be employed. This sets which hard point, if any, is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 freed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 off to match the target characteristics.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / 3D Compliance:\plain\fs20 Turns on the \uldb compliant\plain\fs20 solver. Compliant solutions add elastic bushes and external force effects on to the incremental kinematic solution.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / External Forces:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, external forces can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option or use the equivalent toolbar icon.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Spring Kinematic Displacement Force:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the suspension spring pre-load force due to the kinematic displacement can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Spring Rate:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the suspension spring rate can be optionally included in the stiffness matrix. Toggles through on/off with this menu option. Turning the spring rate off also implies that the spring kinematic displacement force will also not be included.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Roll Bar Kinematic Displacement Force:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the suspension roll bar force (if modeled) due to the kinematic roll displacement can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Roll Bar Rate:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the suspension roll bar rate can be optionally included in the stiffness matrix. Toggles through on/off with this menu option. Turning the roll bar rate off also implies that the roll bar kinematic displacement force will also not be included.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Bump Stop Kinematic Displacement Force:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the suspension bump stop force due to the kinematic displacement can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Bump Stop Rate:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the suspension bump stop rate can be optionally included in the stiffness matrix. Toggles through on/off with this menu option. Turning the bump stop rate off also implies that the bump stop kinematic displacement force will also not be included.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Bush Kinematic Rotation loads:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the implied pre-loads of the bush due to the incremental kinematic rotation will be included when this option is enabled at each calculated step. By definition at static ride when there is no displacement the pre-loads will be zero.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Tyre Vertical Rate:\plain\fs20 For compliance analysis, the tyre vertical rate can be optionally included in the stiffness matrix. Toggles through on/off with this menu option. This would normally be set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 but in specific load cases users may wish to turn this of to inspect a particular force path.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Control Elements:\plain\fs20 Models that have length or position control elements included their impact on the kinematic solution can be toggles \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 with this menu. Note that turning them off also has the effect of not drawing them even if the specific visibility option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Control Elements / One Step Delay:\plain\fs20 With some control elements for solver stability it is necessary to have a one step delay in applying the change in position/length. Toggling this menu item switches between direct application and a one step delay.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Control Elements / Iteration Limits:\plain\fs20 Controls the limits for applying control elements. This restricts infinite loops where the solver can\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t converge.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Drive Shaft Loads:\plain\fs20 In compliance mode this option toggles the inclusion of drive shaft loads. Drive shaft points need to be included in the template and applied torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s defined before this has any impact on the compliance calculation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Non Linear Rack Bush:\plain\fs20 In compliance mode this option enables the non-linear rack bush. The solver performs a two step compliant solution to identify the force in the rack bush and then modify the applied forces to achieve the correct non-linear displacement for the force. Requires a non-linear rack bush to be defined.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Un-Braked Hub:\plain\fs20 In compliance mode this option toggles whether external longitudinal forces are reacted on the upright or by the drive shaft. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 braked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option is the default and the longitudinal wheel/hub forces are reacted as though the brakes were applied and the loads are reacted by the upright. If the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 braked\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option is not set then the loads are reacted by the drive shaft and thus fed back into the model as a reactive drive torque. This non-braked option requires that the drive shafts are included in the model.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Convert 2D to 3D:\plain\fs20 Convenience routine to \uldb convert\plain\fs20 existing 2D model data to selected 3D suspension.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Display Optimizer:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the display that not only lists the cumulative sum of all weighted deviations but also controls the sensitivity and optimization functions. These optimization settings include individual curve weightings, parameters required and range of interest.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Wheelbase Diff Sol:\plain\fs20 Controls how a difference in the wheelbase is handled when adding a second axle to an existing model. If a difference is found between the wheelbase parameter and the distance between the two axle wheel centers, this option will determine whether the wheelbase parameter is adjusted, or the rear suspension is moved to match the wheelbase parameter.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Grnd Plane Diff Sol:\plain\fs20 Controls how a difference in the ground plane position is handled when adding a second axle to an existing model. If a difference is found between the two ground plane values, this option will determine whether the difference is accommodated by translation, roll or bump/rebound corrections.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Solver Tolerances:\plain\fs20 Displays the current solution tolerances for viewing and editing. Solution tolerances listed include The kinematic solution tolerance, the kinematic warning level tolerance, Bump small perturbation size and Steer small perturbation size.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Solver Method / Gaussian Elimination / Cholesky Decomposition:\plain\fs20 Defines the solution method for the compliant analysis. The original solver version used the slower but more robust Gaussian Elimination method. This method is available for backward compatibility although no change in the results should be seen using the later Cholesky Decomposition (other than a 4x speed increase). In the event of a solution fail with the Cholesky method the solver automatically reverts to Gaussian elimination.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Report Errors (brief):\plain\fs20 Switches the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 brief\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 error-reporting on/off. Gives a summary message if any errors found during the solution. For greater reported information see option below.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Report Errors (full):\plain\fs20 Switches the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 full\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 error-reporting on/off. The display indicates which calculation steps cause a problem and where the problem is in the solution process.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Run Virtual Compliance Test:\plain\fs20 This option provides a data link between the two modules of Lotus Suspension Analysis. The full vehicle handling module requires a number of splines that define the motion of the un-sprung corner masses under a variety of loading and displacement conditions. This data would conventionally come from physical testing of a vehicle on a SKCMS rig. This option allows you to take a Shark full vehicle compliant model and run it through a series of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 virtual\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tests to produce these splines. This option is only available for models with both front and rear suspensions defined. To produce valid results any anti roll bars and the compliant steering rack option should be included in your model. Whilst this option will still run if these are not added the opposed and parallel tests will not correctly identify the cross car force linking if not added.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Solve / Virtual Compliance Test Settings:\plain\fs20 Opens a spread sheet that lists the individual test used in the Virtual SKCMS process and the individual settings for these tests. These settings are saved to the users INI file and allow for both an understanding of the virtual tests and the means to manipulate as required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Results
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Formatted SDF\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the Suspension Derivative File (SDF). This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and incremental listings of the relevant suspension characteristics for all articulation types. The user can edit how many tables and what columns appear in each table. A number of standard settings can be defined by the user each saved to a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 position\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / SDF Spline Fits\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the Suspension Derivative Spline Fits display. This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and listings of the spline fit equations for the selected suspension characteristics for all selected articulation types. The spline fit types include Linear, quadratic and cubic.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / SDF Spline Data\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the Suspension Derivative Spline Data display. This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and listings of each splines data points. The user can control which splines are listed as well as inclusion of header information and data echo.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Std SDF Scale and Shift Settings\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a spread sheet that allows user to apply unique scale and shift values to each standard SDF, with different values being applied to each corner. In this way a user can customize the results to suit their own particular sign convention. This Scale and shift values are in addition to any changes made through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Units\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 settings.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Edit User Defined Results\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the dialogue box for user creation of their own results. Results created in this way then become available for all graphing and listing actions. User defined SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s are built up via a string recognition editor that can include existing standard SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s, point positions, point forces and math\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s functions. The utility also has the option to save/read these user SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s to and from an external file, such that they can be shared between users.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Formatted Bush Values\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the scrollable text listing a summary of the defined bush properties. This includes the Zp vector the Xp vector and bush rates used.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Bush Deflections\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the scrollable text listing of bush deflections for compliant models under the current force set.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Joint-Bush Rotations\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the scrollable text listing of bush rotations for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Bush Forces\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the scrollable text listing of bush forces for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Formatted Point Forces\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the scrollable text listing of point forces for compliant models. The formatting control allows the point force results to be tabulated for any defined load condition.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / UnSprung Corner Weights\'85:\plain\fs20 Performs a specific compliant analysis task by applying a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Gravity\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 force to each component C of G. This identifies the change in tyre vertical force and hence the unsprung corner weight. As this option requires the compliant solver you need to be in compliant mode to list these results. The corner weights are displayed in a specific dialogue box through which you can adjust part masses.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm176.bmp\}
|
|
\par Corner Weights Calculation.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / List All Point Coords for User Position\'85:\plain\fs20 Option to list suspension hard points at a user defined bump, roll and steer position. Define the required bump value, (+ve is in bump) roll angle and steer value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / List a Point Coords at All Positions\'85:\plain\fs20 Option to list the co-ordinates of a single selected suspension hard point at all current solution positions. User selects the required corner and point. The resultant textual display has full support for printing, saving and exporting.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / List All Point Coords at a Positions\'85:\plain\fs20 This is the inverse of the previous option. It lists the co-ordinates of all points for a single selected position. The position is one from the current solver settings rather than a separately user defined position. User selects the required corner and position. The resultant textual display has full support for printing, saving and exporting.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Compliance Text Values:\plain\fs20 Opens the text listing of the Compliance coefficients. This displays the same values as shown graphically (see the next menu item).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Compliance Bar Values:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the Compliance bar charts coefficients display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Ball Joint Rotations:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of the Ball Joint rotations display. This option is only available in compliant mode. The results show the rotations of a selected joint over the prescribed travel. These rotations can be relative to local or global axes or to a pair of user defined points that identify the housing and ball axes.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Modal Analysis Display..:\plain\fs20 Opens the Modal Analysis bar chart display. The display shows the frequency of each mode by the height of its bar. This option is only available in compliant mode. This display can be used to change the mode displayed in the 3d view, (the current mode is shown filled in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 cyan\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ), by selecting the required modes bar with the left mouse button. This graph can be left open and is updated \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 live\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 as the model is changed.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Results / Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display..:\plain\fs20 Opens the Forced-Damped Results graph. This shows the displacement and rotation of each parts C of G at the specified frequency. The currently displayed frequency point in the 3d view is show on the graph by the vertical line. The currently displayed 3d view frequency can be changed by selecting the required point on the graph using the left mouse button. Whilst this graph display can be left open whilst you continue to edit the model it does not update in a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 live\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 manner due to the associated computational overheads. To update this display select from its right mouse menu list \i Refresh Plot\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - SetUp
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Start Options / Toolbar Icons:\plain\fs20 Provides an option for two styles of icons. Select from either \cf1 Standard\plain\fs20 or \cf1 Mouse Sensitive\plain\fs20 . Standard icons have permanently visible boundaries to the icon, whilst mouse sensitive icons \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 raise\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 as the mouse passes over them. This change is stored to the ini file and will only be implemented on next program start-up.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Start Options / Toolbar Position:\plain\fs20 Sets the default starting position for the toolbars. All visible toolbars will be placed in this position when the application starts up. Once started the user can choose to change the toolbar positions individually as required. The four available positions are Top, Bottom, Left or Right. This change is stored to the ini file and will only be implemented on the next program start-up.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Start Options / Maximised:\plain\fs20 If checked defines that the application will start up with the main window maximised, (i.e. expanded to fill the current screen size). Note that if the application is maximised during use, then this will also set the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 maximised\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 setting. This change is stored to the ini file and will be implemented on next program start-up.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Exception Handler On:\plain\fs20 Provides a software trapping routine to handle application exception failures. Whilst this won\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t enable the user to recover the current session it will prevent the exception causing a complete system failure. Not normally required this release.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Visual Graphics Cursor:\plain\fs20 When enabled changes the appearance of the cursor on the main graphical display to indicate the difference between the various modes of dynamic view and on-screen editing. This setting is saved to the users ini file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Data Sheet Images:\plain\fs20 Toggles the visibility of graphical images displayed on the side of the data sheets. This is purely a visual setting.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include User Graphics In Data Files:\plain\fs20 With the ability for users to quickly add their own graphical elements to the current template the option is given for users to include them with the data file. This provides a complete way of retaining data that is associated with the model.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include User Templates In Data Files:\plain\fs20 With the ability for users to quickly modify the template by point addition etc. the option is given for users to include the template with the data file. This provides a complete way of retaining data that is associated with the model.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include Optimizer Settings in Data Files:\plain\fs20 When checked provides data retention/continuity by including the optimizer settings as a sub-section of the model data file. Other wise these data settings could be lost through subsequent use.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Include Force Sets in Data Files:\plain\fs20 When checked provides data retention/continuity by including the defined force set settings as a sub-section of the model data file. Other wise these data settings could be lost through subsequent use.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Toolbar Visibility:\plain\fs20 Sets the visibility option for the individual toolbars. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Set Toolbars to:\plain\fs20 Sets the settings for the toolbars either to the original \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 classic\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 layout or one of the revised options. Toolbar icon settings are saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Customize Toolbars\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the toolbar editing tool that allows user to individually customize the toolbars to suit their own user preferences. Toolbar icon settings are saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Gen Defaults:\plain\fs20 Opens the general defaults data set for viewing and editing. They primarily deal with settings for the \uldb graphics\plain\fs20 display. They include upper and lower limits to the scaling, the tolerance for point picking, the tolerance for \uldb point coincidence\plain\fs20 , the \uldb joggle\plain\fs20 coarse step size and the \uldb animation\plain\fs20 refresh time step.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Printer Properties:\plain\fs20 Displays the standard Windows printer dialogue box, to enable default printer and its properties to be set.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Undo Buffer Length:\plain\fs20 Sets the length of the \uldb undo\plain\fs20 buffer. The greater the number the more undo steps that will be stored. Setting this value to zero will disable the undo function.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Re-run Search for Installed Components..:\plain\fs20 Runs the process that scans the users system for installed applications such as Word, Excel and Matlab. This process is run automatically the first time the software is used after installation but this user-invoked option is available to enable subsequent changes to other applications to be re-checked for.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Edit Installed Component Executables ..:\plain\fs20 Define the default executables of external applications that are used by the application. These include \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Word\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Internet Explorer\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Excel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Adobe\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Matlab\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Edit <database> folder location..:\plain\fs20 Define/edit the location of the database folder. This folder is used as a depository for standard files, templates and default INI file settings.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Language / User Defined\'85:\plain\fs20 The default language for all menus is English. The option is given for a user to switch to their own defined language via this menu option. It uses a string by string substitution for each item given in the library. This string substitution must first be entered by the user Thus a user need only change as few (or as many) strings as they require. Any user defined language change is stored in a user language library (filename _Custom.dic) and this can be shared between users.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Language / Edit User Language\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the dialogue box through which the user defined language is edited. In some user specific cases this will be password protected, (consult your system support if you require password access).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm177.bmp\}
|
|
\par User Language Editing.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Change Units:\plain\fs20 Opens the \uldb utility\plain\fs20 for setting the Angle, Length, Force and Mass display units. Options are given for each as well as an option to have a user defined unit display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Set Background Colour\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a standard colour selection dialog to pick a new colour for the background colour used in the graphics display. Note that graphs have their ow ncolour settings and are not affected by this change.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Graphics Frame Type:\plain\fs20 Sets the \uldb graphics frame\plain\fs20 device type as either Windows GDI or Open GL. The default device driver is a Windows GDI, (\i View / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI),\plain\fs20 which whilst it works with all Hardware options does so at the expense of both speed and capability. The GDI driver is unable to support depth buffered display and hence the view styles \i View / Fill Style / Hidden Line \plain\fs20 and \i View / Fill Style / Depth Buffered (Flat shaded )\plain\fs20 do not function correctly. The alternative device driver is Open GL, (\i View / Graphics Frame Type / Open GL\plain\fs20 ), which is both faster and supports depth buffering/hidden line display types and also segmentation (see below).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Not all hardware is able to use the Open GL device type, typical failures are inability to refresh and lack of correct hidden line display. It is often possible to enable OpenGL to work correctly by reducing the amount of hardware acceleration used by the graphics card.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Use Segment Display\plain\fs20 with OpenGL graphics frames the use of segmentation provides a significant improvement in both dynamic viewing and animation refresh speeds. This is because only the segment needs to be refreshed rather than recreate the construction of all the graphics primitives. This is particularly beneficial with animating modes of complex compliant full axle models.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Use Software Double Buffer\plain\fs20 the use of this option allows the OpenGL graphics frames to be used with any level of hardware acceleration being set. Without this option being switched on some hardware setups will not correctly animate or update the dynamic viewing options when using OpenGL.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 SetUp / Default Graphical File Type:\plain\fs20 Sets the default graphical file type used in printing etc. for report file generation as either Bitmap or JPEG.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Window
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Horizontal:\plain\fs20 Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily horizontal layout.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Vertical (Picked Order):\plain\fs20 Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily vertical layout. The order that they are arranged in is the order that they have been selected, on start-up this would be the inverse of the order that they were created in.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Vertical (Created Order):\plain\fs20 Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily vertical layout. The order that they are arranged in is based on the creation order with the graphics display first and then graphs 1 to n.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Cascade:\plain\fs20 Automatic window positioning option. All open windows are re-sized to a common size and cascaded down from the top left hand corner in regular steps.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Save Def. Window Settings:\plain\fs20 When set this options will save to the users ini file the current size, positions and settings of the graphics and graph windows, such that on a subsequent program start-up all windows will be re-created in the same position/size as previously. They are referred to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 since users can store different settings to alternative files.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Save Window Settings to\'85:\plain\fs20 This option allows the user to save the current window and graph settings to a file. These settings can then be retrieved at a later stage or in future runs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Load Window Settings from\'85:\plain\fs20 This option allows the user to retrieve from a previously saved file the settings for the main window and graphs. These settings included not only position and size but also displayed variables and axis settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Edit Window Offsets\'85:\plain\fs20 This option allows the user to specify the values used to determine the position of each window within the MDI interface. These may need to be changed by the user if you find yourself repeatedly having to re-position graph windows despite having used the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 save window settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / View Custom Control Display:\plain\fs20 Pick from list to open a previously defined custom control display. Custom controls are added to this list as they are created by the user using the following menu option. When permanently deleted using the WinDelete option, they are removed from this list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Open New Custom Control Display:\plain\fs20 Creates a new custom control display dialogue box. Users can add their own buttons, toggles, icons, gauges, sliders, text entries, value entries, bar charts and bars widgets to it. Data variables and commands can be assigned to these widgets to allow users to build their own specific interfaces. Within each window users can switch between use/edit modes to move, add, and edit widgets. Custom dialogue settings are saved to the users ini file for subsequent reuse. Users can save custom dialogue settings to and from external files. This provides a method of passing custom settings between users.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Delete Custom Control Display:\plain\fs20 Pick from the list of currently defined custom control displays to delete. This will remove it from the settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Backdrop:\plain\fs20 Option to add a graphic image to the background of the main window. Six default options are provided together with an option for a user defined bitmap. The background image can be optionally tiled to repeat the pattern over the entire region. Alternatively if not tiled the image will be stretched to fill the area.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / User Backdrop File\'85:\plain\fs20 File browser to identify the user specified backdrop bitmap.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Window / Tile Backdrop:\plain\fs20 Defines whether backdrop image will be stretched or tiled to fill the area.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The \cf1 Window\plain\fs20 menu has appended to it an entry for each child window. Child windows include graphic displays all graphs and results displays.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Pull Down Menu Items - Help
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 Help / Contents (F1):\plain\fs20 Opens this help file at the contents page.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Help / Search for Help On\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens this help file at the \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 index\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 page to allow for searching through the help file by key words.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Help / How to Use Help:\plain\fs20 Opens the standard Windows\'ae Help document, describing how to use on-line help files.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Help / Open Getting Started:\plain\fs20 Shortcut menu to open the supplied \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Getting Started\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 document from the <install> folder.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Help / About Lotus Suspension Analysis\'85:\plain\fs20 Displays the Lotus Suspension Analysis \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 about\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 box listing both the major and minor release levels. Support contact details are also given.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Mouse Right Button Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphics
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 \tab
|
|
\par No specific menus are used on the graphics display for the right mouse button, Instead it is used as a quick cycle through the available \uldb tracking directions\plain\fs20 or cycle through the \uldb dynamic viewing modes\plain\fs20 as appropriate for the current dynamic viewing status.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par In the view \uldb zoom\plain\fs20 mode the right mouse button will cancel the zoom event.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Mouse Right Button Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphs
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \cf1 X-Variable (SDF):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed x-variable for the selected \uldb graph\plain\fs20 . Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current variable is shown checked in the list. The list is broken down into five sub menus, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Positional\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Extended\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 d/z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 \'a7dz\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The sub division is somewhat arbitrary but is due to the large number of SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s available.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 X-Variable (Front Graphic):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed x-variable for the selected graph to one from the current front suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list. This menu is omitted for rear suspension only models.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 X-Variable (Rear Graphic):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed x-variable for the selected graph to one from the current rear suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list. This menu is omitted for front suspension only models.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 X-Variable (User SDF):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed x-variable for the selected graph to one from the current available user defined SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. If no user SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s have been previously created this list will be empty.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (SDF):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected \uldb graph\plain\fs20 . Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current variable is shown checked in the list. The list is broken down into five sub menus, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Positional\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Extended\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 d/z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 \'a7dz\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The sub division is somewhat arbitrary but is due to the large number of SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s available.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (Front Graphic):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current front suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (Rear Graphic):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current rear suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Y-Variable (User SDF):\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current available user defined SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. If no user SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s have been previously created this list will be empty.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 User Line Edit / Edit Front (+Y) User Line:\plain\fs20 Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the front +Y corner.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 User Line Edit / Edit Front (-Y) User Line:\plain\fs20 Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the front -Y corner.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 User Line Edit / Edit Rear (+Y) User Line:\plain\fs20 Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the rear +Y corner.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 User Line Edit / Edit Rear (-Y) User Line:\plain\fs20 Lists the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the rear -Y corner.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Autoscale:\plain\fs20 Autoscales the selected graph for both x and y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. To autoscale all graphs use the main menu or equivalent toolbar icon.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Autoscale Y only:\plain\fs20 Autoscales the selected graph for just its y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. To autoscale all graphs use the main menu or equivalent toolbar icon.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Autoscale to Y Increment:\plain\fs20 Autoscales the selected graph for just its y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. The autoscale function is based rounding to a specified increment. The increment being definable for each individual graph. To edit the increment refer to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Axis Scales\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 right mouse menu option.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Zoom:\plain\fs20 Pick the area of the selected graph to fit the current window. The zoom function can accommodate either a two press approach to area selection or a single press, hold and drag selection, a simple time delay trap being used to identify which type is being used. The zoomed area will become the plotted region.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as Derivative:\plain\fs20 By default a graph is plotted for the selected x and y variables exactly as calculated. This graph by graph option allows the user to plot x against dy (i.e. the derivative) of the selected y-variable.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as Integral:\plain\fs20 By default a graph is plotted for the selected x and y variables exactly as calculated. This graph by graph option allows the user to plot x against \'a7y (i.e. the integral) of the selected y-variable. Note that the constant of integration is adjusted such that the integral is zero for its first point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as Left and Right:\plain\fs20 The menu item is only present if both left and right hand sides are being plotted on the display/graphs. This is the default mode in that the left and right hand lines are drawn as separate lines, thus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left and right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as Left - Right:\plain\fs20 The menu item is only present if both left and right hand sides are being plotted on the display/graphs. This option plots the numerical sum of left minus right as a single line, thus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left - right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as Left + Right:\plain\fs20 The menu item is only present if both left and right hand sides are being plotted on the display/graphs. This option plots the numerical sum of left plus right as a single line, thus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left + right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 /2.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as [Left \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'96\f1 Right]/2:\plain\fs20 The menu item is only present if both left and right hand sides are being plotted on the display/graphs. This option plots the average of the numerical sum of left minus right as a single line, thus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left - right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 /2.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Plot as [Left + Right]/2:\plain\fs20 The menu item is only present if both left and right hand sides are being plotted on the display/graphs. This option plots the average of the numerical sum of left plus right as a single line, thus \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 left + right\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Copy Front Data to User:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing Front result line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are copied over.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Copy Rear Data to User:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing Rear result line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are copied over.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Copy Front Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing Front scope line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are copied over. You need to identify which scope position you are copying from.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Copy Rear Scope to User from / Position n:\plain\fs20 Convenience function copies the existing Rear scope line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are copied over. You need to identify which scope position you are copying from.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Axis Scales:\plain\fs20 Displays the selected graphs x and y-axis settings. Axes are defined simply by the minimum and maximum values. This display also lists the value used for the autoscale to Y increment option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Set All X-axis to Displ. Range:\plain\fs20 Sets the x-axis settings for all the graphs to the limits of the currently defined suspension travel.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit All X-axis Scale:\plain\fs20 Displays the x-axis scale edit box. The displayed values will be the current settings for the selected graph. All graphs will have their x-axis values set to the entered numbers.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 List Data Line(s):\plain\fs20 Lists the selected graphs current results (data) line for viewing. As these are calculated results they are display only. Both front and rear axles are listed, (if applicable).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Copy to Clipboard:\plain\fs20 Copies the selected graph display to the Windows clipboard such that it can be pasted into other applications.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Save to File\'85:\plain\fs20 Saves the selected graph to file. Three format types are currently supported, bmp, jpg and png.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Print\'85:\plain\fs20 Prints the selected graph. The user is presented with the standard Windows printer dialogue box to select the required printer/settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Print (to default printer):\plain\fs20 Prints the selected graph to the default printer using the current printer settings.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Printer Properties\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the standard Windows printer dialogue box to set the default printer and its current settings.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Open in MATLAB:\plain\fs20 Opens the selected graph directly in Matlab as a graph. This thus provides a 'one-click' option to pass graph data from Shark to Matlab. If this option is greyed out then the application has been unable to identify the location of the Matlab product, normally because it is not installed on the machine. If it has been subsequently installed users can re-scan for the Matlab product via the menu option \i Setup / Re-run search for installed components.\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Open in EXCEL:\plain\fs20 Opens a new Excel worksheet filled with the selected graphs data values. This thus provides a 'one-click' option to pass graph data from Shark to Excel. If this option is greyed out then the application has been unable to identify the location of the Excel executable, normally because it is not installed on the machine. If it has been subsequently installed users can re-scan for the Excel executable via the menu option \i Setup / Re-run search for installed components.\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Export to EXCEL / As New File:\plain\fs20 Similar to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 open\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option above but uses a software link to import the graph into Excel with greater control and functionality. This menu opens in Excel as a new file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Export to EXCEL / As New worksheet in Current:\plain\fs20 Similar to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 open\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option above but uses a software link to import the graph into Excel with greater control and functionality. This menu opens the graph data in Excel as a new worksheet in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 current\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file. The definition of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 current\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file is based around the last open session of Excel and is controlled by a Windows environment variable.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Export to EXCEL / As New worksheet in\'85:\plain\fs20 Similar to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 open\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option above but uses a software link to import the graph into Excel with greater control and functionality. This menu opens the graph data in Excel as a new worksheet in the user specified file. A standard Windows file browser is opened for the user to locate the required file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Mouse Right Button Menu Items \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Compliance Coefficients
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The right mouse menu on the \uldb compliance coefficients\plain\fs20 display has two forms the long form and the short form. The long form is listed if the selection is within a bar region of the chart and the short form is the pick is on the chart but not on a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 bar\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Y Variable:\plain\fs20 Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected bar. Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current bars variable is shown checked in the list.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit Limit Setting:\plain\fs20 Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 design limit value. This is used to draw a horizontal line on the bar chart as a visual indicator of the analysis results.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit Scale Setting:\plain\fs20 Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 full-scale deflection value. This should be adjusted to encompass the required/anticipated limit.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit Weighting Setting:\plain\fs20 Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 weighting value used to calculate the combined summation of selected variables. This effects the optimization and total sum display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Remove Selected Variable:\plain\fs20 .Removes the selected bar from its force sets graph.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Add Extra Variable:\plain\fs20 For the selected force sets\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graph, an extra variable is added to the display. This variable is changed via the Y-variable menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Set All Limit Values to Current:\plain\fs20 For all defined compliance bars the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Limit\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 value is set to the current value. This is a convenience feature that quickly defines a complete set of limits.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Autoscale All Visible Lines:\plain\fs20 All defined compliance bars have the Scale settings set to the current values, with a clip margin. This enables all compliance factors to be visible through a single menu selection.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Set All Visible Line Scales to Unity:\plain\fs20 All defined compliance bars have the Scale settings set to unity. This enables all compliance factor scale settings to be returned to unity through a single menu selection.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Edit All Line Limits/Scale/Weights\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens a display window that allows all Limits, Scales and Weightings for the compliance curves to be edited through a single display rather than by picking individually.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Include Spring Force in Set:\plain\fs20 For the selected force set toggles whether the spring force is included in the compliant calculation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Make Force Set Default:\plain\fs20 Makes the selected force set the current one. The current one is indicated by the red highlight, and becomes the force set displayed on the graphics and graphs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Turn Force Set \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 Off\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 :\plain\fs20 turns the status of the selected force set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Its data is not lost but it will not be used in the calculations and its compliant chart will be removed from the display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 Turn All Force Sets \plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'91\f1 On\plain\f0\fs20\cf1 \'92\f1 :\plain\fs20 Sets all defined force sets to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Each force set will then have its own graph displayed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 Open External Forces Edit\'85:\plain\fs20 Opens the \uldb external force\plain\fs20 edit box. This allows the current external force settings to be viewed and edited.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Menu Tree \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphics Switches
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par A menu tree dialog box is available that contains all the graphics menus in one location. This can be used as an alternative to the main toolbar menu entries as it can remain open and allow quicker access to individual switches than is achieved via the main menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To open the menu tree use the menu \i Graphics / Graphics Switches Menu Tree\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm178.bmp\}
|
|
\par Graphics Switches Menu Tree
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The menu tree has the following main branches; Point Nos; Point Labels; Point Values; Part Nos; Part Labels; Part C of G Visibility; Enhanced Visibility; Display Both Sides; Compliance Visibility; Pick Visibility and View Definition Values. Expand the tree branches to find other individual menu switches.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Menu Tree \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Edit Menus
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par A menu tree dialog box is available that contains all the edit menus in one location. This can be used as an alternative to the main toolbar menu entries as it can remain open and allow quicker access to individual switches than is achieved via the main menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To open the menu tree use the menu \i Edit / Edit Menu Tree\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm179.bmp\}
|
|
\par Edit Menu Tree
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The menu tree has two main branches; Edit and Graphics. Expand the tree branches to find other individual menu switches.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 General
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 The following icons are used within the application dialogue boxes. A brief description is given for each. The ones shown on your display may differ due to local settings. Users can re-define toolbar icons through the \i SetUp / Customize\plain\fs20 Toolbars menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm180.bmp\} Generic Editor Icon, normally opens standard data editor display.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm181.bmp\} Opens this Help File at context sensitive page
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 File Toolbar
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the default File toolbar. A brief description is given for each. The ones shown on your display may differ due to local settings. Users can re-define toolbar icons through the \i SetUp / Customize\plain\fs20 Toolbars menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm182.bmp\} Open existing data file.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm183.bmp\} Save data to file
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm184.bmp\} Change to 2D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Bump articulation
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm185.bmp\} Change to 2D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Roll articulation
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm186.bmp\} Change to 3D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Bump articulation
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm187.bmp\} Change to 3D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Roll articulation
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm188.bmp\} Change to 3D \uldb module\plain\b\fs20 , Steer articulation
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm189.bmp\} Change to move ground plane in bump solver option
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm190.bmp\} Change to move body in bump solver option
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm191.bmp\} Toggle 3D \uldb compliant\plain\b\fs20 solver setting
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm192.bmp\} Toggle 3D compliance use \uldb external forces\plain\b\fs20 setting
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm193.bmp\} Toggle \uldb Tolerance analysis\plain\b\fs20 status
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm194.bmp\} Set to \uldb Edit\plain\b\fs20 mode
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm195.bmp\} Set to \uldb Joggle\plain\b\fs20 edit mode
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm196.bmp\} Set to \uldb Drag\plain\b\fs20 edit mode
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 View Toolbar
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the view toolbar. A brief description is given for each.
|
|
\par The ones shown on your display may differ due to local settings. Users can re-define toolbar icons through the \i SetUp / Customize\plain\fs20 Toolbars menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm197.bmp\} Toggle \uldb dynamic viewing\plain\b\fs20 on/off.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm198.bmp\} Set dynamic view on and mode to translate.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm199.bmp\} Set dynamic view on and mode to scale.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm200.bmp\} Set dynamic view on and mode to rotate.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm201.bmp\} Start zoom event on the graphics display.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm202.bmp\} Autoscale all open graphs.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm203.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Wire Frame.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm204.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Solid Fill.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm205.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Hidden Line.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm206.bmp\} Set graphics view style to Depth Buffered (flat shaded).
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm207.bmp\} Set graphics view to Y-Z plane.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm208.bmp\} Set graphics view to X-Z plane.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm209.bmp\} Set graphics view to X-Y plane.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm210.bmp\} Save current graphics view to temporary store.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm211.bmp\} Cycle though the available \uldb tracking\plain\b\fs20 options, or the available \uldb dynamic view\plain\b\fs20 options.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphics Toolbar
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the Graphics toolbar. A brief description is given for each.
|
|
\par The ones shown on your display may differ due to local settings. Users can re-define toolbar icons through the \i SetUp / Customize\plain\fs20 Toolbars menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm212.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the hard point template numbers.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm213.bmp\} Turns point limits to \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 use\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 . If the current visibility setting of the \uldb limit boxes\plain\b\fs20 was \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 they will be turned \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 on\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm214.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the hard point co-ordinates.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm215.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the springs\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 enhanced graphics.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm216.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the dampers\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 enhanced graphics.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm217.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the wheels\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 enhanced graphics.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm218.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the pivots\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 enhanced graphics.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm219.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the grids\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 enhanced graphics.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm220.bmp\} Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the body\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 s enhanced graphics. Will only appear if a default body type has been set, (see data menu).
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm221.bmp\} Set the graphics display to show both front and rear axle models, (if loaded).
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm222.bmp\} Sets the graphic display to show the front suspension model only, (note you will not be able to select this option if you only have a rear suspension loaded).
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm223.bmp\} Sets the graphic display to show the rear suspension model only, (note you will not be able to select this option if you only have a front suspension loaded).
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm224.bmp\} Toggles the \uldb animation\plain\b\fs20 status. Stops or starts the animation of the model over the currently set articulation range.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm225.bmp\} Toggles the graphics display setting for drawing both suspension sides.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm226.bmp\} Copies the current graphic display to the Windows\'ae clipboard.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Icon Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphs + Data Toolbar
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 The following icons are displayed on the Graphs + Data toolbar. A brief description is given for each. The ones shown on your display may differ due to local settings. Users can re-define toolbar icons through the \i SetUp / Customize\plain\fs20 Toolbars menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm227.bmp\} Open a new results \uldb graph\plain\b\fs20 .
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm228.bmp\} Autoscales all open graphs.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm229.bmp\} Opens the model property display. Tree structure based display to access model properties.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm230.bmp\} Opens the front suspension hard point values for viewing and editing, (not available if only rear suspension loaded).
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm231.bmp\} Opens the rear suspension hard point values for viewing and editing, (not available if only front suspension loaded).
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm232.bmp\} Lists the Parameters data set for viewing and editing.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm233.bmp\} Lists the Tyre data set values for viewing and editing.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm234.bmp\} Opens the Suspension Derivative File (SDF). This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and incremental listings of the relevant suspension characteristics for all articulation types.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm235.bmp\} Saves the current suspension hard points to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved co-ordinate sets are lost when the application is closed. Any number of sets can be stored.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm236.bmp\} Cancels the current \uldb group\plain\b\fs20 selection, returning back to all hard points accessible for individual editing.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm237.bmp\} Creates an new points group. A new group must be given a unique label to identify it. The number of points required to add to it set and each required point picked from the available suspension end lists.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm238.bmp\} Runs a utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height. The value required is a delta from the current position. A positive value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm239.bmp\} Option to list suspension hard points at a defined bump plus steer position. Define the required bump value, (+ve is in bump) and steer value.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm240.bmp\} Automatic window positioning option. All open windows are re-sized to a common size and cascaded down from the top left hand corner in regular steps.
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b \{bmc bm241.bmp\} Convenience routine to \uldb convert\plain\b\fs20 existing 2D model data to selected 3D suspension.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements - Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par This section describes the data requirements for both the 2D and 3D suspension analysis modules. Each data variable is listed, together with its units and any default value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The listings are broken down into sections as they are displayed in the interface.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Co-ordinate System
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 SHARK\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 co-ordinate system is a right handed system with the Y-axis across the car track, the origin of which is assumed to be on the vehicle centre line and the +ve direction being towards the offside suspension (Right hand Corner sitting in car). The X-axis is along the vehicle wheelbase, normally with the origin in front of the vehicle with the +ve direction towards the rear. The X-axis only applies to the 3D module, all 2D modes being in the Y-Z or cross car plane. The Z-axis is the vertical height, the origin of which for 2D modes is assumed to be the ground plane, but for the 3D modes can be at any height position. The +ve direction is taken as upwards, (note this co-ordinate system is different to the original UNIX version of SHARK, which had the X and Y axes transposed).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm242.bmp\}
|
|
\par \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 SHARK\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Co-ordinate System
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The default mode for a single corner model is to work in the +ve Y axis side, (i.e. hard point y-values are +ve). This default mode can be switched such that the single corner default is for hard points to be in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve Y position. To change between these two settings use the toggle check
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Data Requirements
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 2D module has some specific requirements for data. It has a reduced set of \uldb suspension types\plain\fs20 when compared to the 3D module, whilst its \uldb General data\plain\fs20 set has variables unique to the 2D module. Some of the General data values are common to both the 2D and 3D modules and will be covered in the description of the \uldb 3D data\plain\fs20 requirements.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Suspension Type
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The available suspension types for the 2D module are \uldb Double Wishbone\plain\fs20 or \uldb Macpherson Strut\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm8.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the 2D Suspension type from the New menu
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D General Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Vehicle Track,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 1600 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the static vehicle track, the value is the Y-axis distance between the two assumed tyre contact patch centre\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. Must be a positive number
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Kingpin Angle, \plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 10 deg)
|
|
\par Sets the static kingpin angle, being the angle between the upper and lower ball joints in the Y-Z or cross car plane for a double wishbone suspension type, or the angle between the strut top and the lower ball joint, again in the Y-Z plane, for a Macpherson strut suspension. A positive Kingpin angle is taken as when the upper ball joint, (or strut top), is inboard of the lower ball joint, i.e. smaller Y value.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Kingpin Offset at Ground, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the static Kingpin offset, the offset being the Y-axis or cross car distance between the tyre contact patch centre and the intersection of the kingpin axis with the ground. A positive offset is when the tyre contact patch centre is outboard of the kingpin axis intersection.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Damper Angle, \plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 10 deg) \{\-\b Strut Only\plain\fs20 \'7d
|
|
\par Sets the static damper angle, being the angle between the strut top and a point on the strut slider axis, in the Y-Z plane. A positive damper angle is taken as when the strut top is inboard of the strut slider point, i.e. smaller Y value.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Camber Change in Bump, \plain\fs20 (real), (deg/mm), (default -0.04 deg/mm)
|
|
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle graph over the bump travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle in bump travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with positive wheel travel.\b\ul
|
|
\par \page
|
|
\pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Camber Change in Rebound, \plain\fs20 (real), (deg/mm), (default -0.04 deg/mm)
|
|
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle graph over the rebound travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle in rebound travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with positive wheel travel.\b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1\b Camber Change in Roll, \plain\fs20 (real), (units deg/mm), (default 0.5 deg/deg)
|
|
\par \pard This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle under roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with a positive roll angle.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Static Roll Centre Height, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 50 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the static roll centre height, this is the distance up the Z-axis from the ground plane to the required static roll centre.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Roll Centre Height Change in Bump, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/mm), (default 1.0 mm/mm)
|
|
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height graph over the bump travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in bump travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in the roll centre height with positive wheel travel.\b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \b Roll Centre Height Change in Rebound, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/mm), (def 1.0 mm/mm)
|
|
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height graph over the rebound travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in rebound travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in the roll centre height with positive wheel travel.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \page
|
|
\pard \plain\b\fs20 Roll Centre Height Change in Roll, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/deg), (default 0.0 mm/mm)
|
|
\par This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in roll centre height with a positive roll angle.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Roll Centre Lateral Change in Roll, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/deg), (default 0.0 mm/mm)
|
|
\par \pard This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre lateral line on the roll centre lateral against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre lateral position in roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in roll centre lateral Y value with a positive roll angle.\b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Bump Travel, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the bump travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b No. of Bump Solution Steps, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 4)
|
|
\par Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full bump travel.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rebound Travel, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the rebound travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Rebound Solution Steps, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 4)
|
|
\par Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full rebound travel.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Roll Travel, \plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 5 deg)
|
|
\par Sets the roll travel from static ride, it is the total angle that the body is rolled about the X-axis. Must be a positive number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Roll Solution Steps, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 4)
|
|
\par Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full roll.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Double Wishbone Suspension Hard Points
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 2D Double Wishbone Suspension Hard Points
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Lower Outer Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Upper Outer Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 500 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the upper wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Lower Inner Cross Car (Y), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 248 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Lower Inner Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 175 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Upper Inner Cross Car (Y), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 367 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the upper wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard \b Upper Inner Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 426 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the upper wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par (Note: All 2D suspension Z co-ordinates are relative to an assumed zero ground plane, i.e., Z origin is ground plane.)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Macpherson Strut Suspension Hard Points
|
|
\par \pard \fs20
|
|
\par 2D Macpherson Strut Suspension Hard Points
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Lower Outer Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Strut Top Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 500 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the strut top, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Lower Inner Cross Car (Y), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 248 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Lower Inner Height (Z), \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 175 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435
|
|
\par \pard (Note: All 2D suspension Z co-ordinates are relative to an assumed zero ground plane, i.e., Z origin is ground plane.)
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Data Requirements
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D module data requirements are broken down in to sets. Each set is described separately. The data requirements for each of the default \uldb suspension template\plain\fs20 types is listed. Some of the data sets given here apply in part to both the 3D module and the 2D module.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Suspension End
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Suspension models are defined as being associated to either the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Front\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Read\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 end of the vehicle. The allowable suspension templates vary depending on this selection, since front suspension types must be steerable.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Complete vehicle models can be built, (i.e. Front and Rear models), by creating one of each through the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 new\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm0.bmp\}
|
|
\par Selecting the Suspension end and templates from the New display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A suspension end model can also either be a single corner or a full axle. A convenience menu option is provided \i Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model\plain\fs20 that will convert the current template from a corner model to a full axle model that is initially symmetrical. A full axle mode that is marked as symmetric will continue to be symmetric on subsequent hard point changes through the template identifying opposite points as linked. This linking is broken if the suspension symmetry flag is changed to asymmetric at the top of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1\i File/New\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\f1 \plain\fs20 dialogue box.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Suspension Type
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 3D Suspension Type
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Since users can create/delete and include their own templates the lists given here may not be the same as displayed. The presented lists represent the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates that are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hard-coded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 into the as-shipped application.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\li1435 For front suspension\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \tab Select From:\tab
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 1 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 3 Steerable Macpherson strut.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 6 Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 12 Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 13 Double Wishbone, damper to knuckle.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 14 Double wishbone, push rod to damper.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 15 Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 17 Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab Type 18 Double wishbone, upper toe link + \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 20 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 22 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints spring front.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 23 Double wishbone, anti roll bar
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 24 Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 25 Double wishbone, twin lower outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 26 Double wishbone, compliant rack, damper to lower.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 27 Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin lower link.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 For rear suspension\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s
|
|
\par \tab Select From:\tab
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab \tab Type 1 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 2 \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 H\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 frame lower, single upper link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 3 Steerable Macpherson strut.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 4 Non-Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 5 5-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard Rod).
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 6 Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 7 Non-Steerable Mac strut, toe link to wishbone.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab Type 8 4-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard Rod).
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 9 4-Link Rigid Axle, (twin upper).
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 10 Trailing arm, upper and lower rear links.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 11 Semi trailing arm.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 12 Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 13 Double Wishbone, damper to knuckle.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 14 Double wishbone, push rod to damper.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 15 Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab Type 16 Non-Steerable lower \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 with toe link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 17 Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 18 Double wishbone, upper toe link + \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 19 Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 20 Double Wishbone, twin outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 21 5-Link Rigid Axle, (Watts Linkage).
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 22 Double Wishbone, Twin outer ball joints, Spring front.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab Type 23 Double Wishbone, anti roll bar.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 24 Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 25 Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 26 Double Wishbone, compliant rack, damper to lower.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 27 Steerable Mcpherson Strut, twin lower link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 28 4-Link Rear, transverse control link.
|
|
\par \tab \tab \tab Type 29 Twist Beam \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 twin Wheel.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab \tab Type 30 Generic 5-link Rear.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm9.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Selecting the Front Suspension template from the New display
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D General Data (Parameters)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b 3D General Data
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Bump Travel, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the bump travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number. Note that the bump and rebound travel values would normally define an even increment bounded articulation definition. This can be changed to a step-by-step definition sequence similar to that used for the combined mode but with out any steering input. This is enabled/edited through the \i Data / Use Extended Bump Travel\plain\fs20 and \i Data / Edit Extended Bump Travel \plain\fs20 menu options.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Rebound Travel, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the rebound travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number. See also bump travel above with regard to extended bump travel option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Bump/Rebound Increment, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 5 mm)
|
|
\par Set the solution step size in bump and rebound when animating or listing SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. See also bump travel above with regard to extended bump travel option. The alternative solver motion option of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solve by No of Steps\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 can be used to directly set the number of steps to reach the maximum travel, (i.e. calculate the increment rather than define it).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Roll Angle, \plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 3 deg)
|
|
\par Sets the roll travel from static ride, it is the total angle that the body is rolled about the Y-axis. Must be a positive number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Roll Increment, \plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 0.25 deg)
|
|
\par Sets the solution step size in roll when animating or listing SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Steer Travel, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 30.0 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the limit of steering travel for the inner ball joint in the X-axis or cross car direction.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Steer Increment, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 2.0 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the solution step size in steering when animating or listing SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Wheelbase,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 2240 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the static vehicle wheelbase, the value is the Y-axis distance between the front and rear wheel centre\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s. Must be a positive number.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b C of G Height, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the static centre of gravity height, the distance in the Z-axis of the C of G from the ground plane.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Breaking On Front,\plain\fs20 (real), (units %), (default 60 %)
|
|
\par Defines the brake split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % braking effort on the front axle.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Drive On Front,\plain\fs20 (real), (units %), (default 0 %)
|
|
\par Defines the drive split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % drive to the front axle. Thus a rear wheel drive car has a value of 0%, whilst a front wheel drive car has a value of 100%.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Total Weight On Front,\plain\fs20 (real), (units %), (default 40 %)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the weight split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % weight on the front axle.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Front Brake Type, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 2)
|
|
\par Defines the brake type for the front suspension as either inboard (1), or outboard (2).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Brake Type, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 2)
|
|
\par Defines the brake type for the rear suspension as either inboard (1), or outboard (2).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Total Sprung Weight, \plain\fs20 (real), (units kg) (default 0.0)
|
|
\par Defines the total sprung weight of the vehicle, (sum of front and rear).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Front Suspension Type, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 1)
|
|
\par Defines the suspension type for the front suspension as either independent (1), or rigid (2).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Suspension Type, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 1)
|
|
\par Defines the suspension type for the rear suspension as either independent (1), or rigid (2).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Drive Shaft Joint Radius, \plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 65.0)
|
|
\par Defines the Joint radius used for the drive shaft joints. This is available as a variable for use in User SDF calculations.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b No of Bump Increments, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 5)
|
|
\par Is optionally used to define the number of bump increments taken to reach the defined maximum bump travel limit. Only applies when the solver motion option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solve by No of Steps\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No of Rebound Increments, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 5)
|
|
\par Is optionally used to define the number of rebound increments taken to reach the defined maximum rebound travel limit. Only applies when the solver motion option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solve by No of Steps\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b No of Roll Increments, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 5)
|
|
\par Is optionally used to define the number of roll increments taken to reach the defined maximum roll travel limit. Only applies when the solver motion option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solve by No of Steps\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No of Steer Increments, \plain\fs20 (integer), (default 5)
|
|
\par Is optionally used to define the number of steer increments taken to reach the defined maximum steering travel limit. Only applies when the solver motion option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Solve by No of Steps\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm243.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Parameters (General Data) data set
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Body Type
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D body type is a menu selection rather than a data variable. The menu choices are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab None
|
|
\par \tab Saloon
|
|
\par \tab Open Sports
|
|
\par \tab Old Single Seater
|
|
\par \tab Single Seater
|
|
\par \tab Utility
|
|
\par \tab Super Saloon
|
|
\par \tab Mini Van
|
|
\par \tab User Defined
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm244.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Example Graphics \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Open Sports Body Type Shown
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 For the user defined body it is possible to define the body graphics as a combination of 3d vectors and 3d facets. To edit the user defined body data select the menu option \i Data / Edit User Body Data\'85\plain\fs20 The displayed spread-sheet has two paneled tabs. The first is for 3d vectors, where each vector requires a start point and an end point. The second tab is for 3d facets where each facet can be a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 n\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 noded planar facet. Each node of the facet requires an x, y and z co-ordinate.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The body data can be populated with one of the standard types to act as a start point. Use the local \i File / Load Standard body Data\plain\fs20 menus to do this.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Body facet data can also be imported from an external STL file. Scaling and shift options are offered to manipulate the imported STL facets.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The application is currently restricted to a maximum of 10 noded facets and a total of 2000 facets and 800 vectors.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 To edit user defined body data, open using \i Data / Edit User Body Data\plain\fs20 , if this menu is un-selectable you first need to set body type to user defined, (\i Data / Body Type / User Defined)\plain\fs20 . The data edit display list vectors and facets separately.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm245.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Editing User Body Data - Vectors
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 For each vector define the start and end co-ordinates as a global (x, y, z) value.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 For each facet define as many point co-ordinates triplets as required. A minimum of three points is required for a facet. These point co-ordinates should be in the global axis system.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Tyre Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 2D module has some specific requirements for data.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Rolling Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 225 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the relevant tyres rolling radius.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Width,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 150 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the relevant tyre width, used to support graphical display only.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Vertical Stiffness,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 400 N/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the relevant tyres vertical stiffness, used in the compliance analysis.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Spring Diameter,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 14 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the diameter of the graphical spring used to optionally represent the tyre vertical spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Other related graphical items such as colour can also be edited through this display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard \b Enhanced Tyre and Spring
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The graphical representation of the tyre and wheel can be extended beyond the default. The user can define a cross section that is then revolved around the spindle axis. These user profiles can thus include much more surface definition than the simple models.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm246.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Tyre data set
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Steering Type
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D steering type is a menu selection rather than a data variable. The menu choices are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Steering Rack
|
|
\par \tab Steering Box
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm11.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Setting the Steering type from the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 New\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The steering box option requires additional data hard points to be defined:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 101: \tab 1st Point on Box Axis, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 102: \tab 2nd Point on Box Axis, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 103: \tab Pitman Joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm247.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Editing the Steering Box Hard Point Data
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The steering box hard points can be optionally asymmetric.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Comments
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The data for the title block is intended for use as a labelling/description mechanism. This optional data block is only accessible via the \i Data / Model Comments\'85\plain\fs20 menu item.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm248.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the comments section
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Bush Properties
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Bush Properties data is displayed by hard point and is added to the bottom of the normal points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 position edit box when in compliant mode. A bush has a local co-ordinate system defined relative to the global Cartesian set. The bushes stiffness properties are then defined in this local co-ordinate system.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The individual data fields are:
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 position).
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local Z-Axis, Pnt,\plain\fs20 (choice), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is by selecting another hard point in the suspension model. Typical use of this would be in aligning a bush axis along a wishbone axis by pointing towards the second point on the pivot axis.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point in Bush local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on Bush local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 position).
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Local Stiffness, X, Y and Z,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 1000 N/mm or 2000 N/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the translational stiffness of the current bush in the defined local axes.\b\ul
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Local Stiffness, X-X, Y-Y and Z-Z,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N.m/Rad), (default 0 N.m/Rad)
|
|
\par Sets the rotational stiffness of the current bush in the defined local axes.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Local Damping (Loss Angle), X, Y and Z,\plain\fs20 (real), (units Deg), (default 3.0 Deg)
|
|
\par Sets the translational damping of the current bush in the defined local axes. Note that the damping is defined in terms of a loss angle rather than an absolute damping value. Such that damping is applied to the model as either, Stiffness x Cos(loss angle) or Stiffness x Sin(loss angle) for the real and imaginary parts of the solution.\b\ul
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Local Damping (Loss Angle), X-X, Y-Y- and Z-Z,\plain\fs20 (real), (units Deg), (default 0.0 Deg)
|
|
\par Sets the rotational damping of the current bush in the defined local axes. Note that the damping is defined in terms of a loss angle rather than an absolute damping value. Such that damping is applied to the model as either, Stiffness x Cos(loss angle) or Stiffness x Sin(loss angle) for the real and imaginary parts of the solution.\b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm249.bmp\}
|
|
\par Bush Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Example Compliant Data
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The bush edit dialog box attempts to stop invalid bush axes definitions. These normally occur when the z-axis point and the point in the x-y plane are the same or are along the same vector. Typical examples of these occur with the compliant rack models when the z-axis point is aligned relative to the other rack bush but the x-y point has not been changed from the default.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The inclusion of a compliant racks bush also normally requires that the rotational stiffness values are defined for the rack bushes to control the rack rotations.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D External Force Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The External Force data is displayed by \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Each set is a collection of forces, each force having a definition in terms of its head and tail positions, attachment part and magnitude. Force head and tail positions are defined in either absolute position or relative to a hard point position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The individual data fields are:
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Description,\plain\fs20 (string), (units none), (default none)
|
|
\par Label for the force set.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 End,\plain\fs20 (selection), (units none), (default none)
|
|
\par \pard Identifies which suspension corner to apply the force too.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Apply to Part,\plain\fs20 (selection), (units none), (default none)
|
|
\par Identifies which part in the selected corners\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 suspension to apply the force too.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Magnitude,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N), (default 0 N)
|
|
\par Defines the magnitude of the force. A force can be fixed or variable. Changing the setting from a single \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 fixed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 value to a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 variable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 force enables an edit box for the variable force. The force can then be defined on a by increment variation.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Phase,\plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 0 deg)
|
|
\par Defines the phase of a force. It is only relevant for a Forced/Damped analysis.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Head, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of the force head in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as global co-ordinate system origin.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Head, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Pnt.,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of the force head in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as selected hard point.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as global co-orindate system origin.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Pnt.,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as selected hard point.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Head,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 head\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 of the current force.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm250.bmp\}
|
|
\par External Forces Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Example Data
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Also displayed on this display are solver switch settings for the Suspension Spring Pre-load force, Drive shaft Loads and Braked Hub. These provide access to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 by force set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 solver switch settings for these load cases.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The Braked Hub allows the user to select if the longitudinal wheel/hub loads are to be reacted by the brake and hence to load the upright or if these loads are to reacted by the drive shaft. This enables both braking and drive load case sets to be assembled.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Part C of G Properties
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The C of G Properties data is displayed by part. Each part optionally has a point attached to it that is identified as the C of G point. If a template does not have an associated C of G point either an existing point can be flagged as the C of G by editing the template, or a new point can be added to the template via the \i Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs\plain\fs20 menu options. A point added to the template in this way is automatically flagged as being a C of G point. C of G points are only visible when in compliant mode and are drawn as a green and black quadrant symbol. An additional set of visibility switches are used for C of G points that control point visibility, axis marker points and axes. Older model files will not have C of G points in them and will need modifying to match the updated templates.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm251.bmp\}
|
|
\par C of G Marker Point \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Screen Shot
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Part mass properties enable modal frequencies and forced-damped responses to be identified.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The individual data fields are:
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point Label,\plain\fs20 (string), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets a string label for each point.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Kinematic Point Coordinates (Global),\plain\fs20 (real), (unit mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Lists the current kinematic hard point co-ordinates.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on C of G local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on C of G local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 position).
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point on C of G local Z-Axis, Pnt,\plain\fs20 (choice), (default none)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is by selecting another hard point in the suspension model. Typical use of this would be in aligning a bush axis along a wishbone axis by pointing towards the second point on the pivot axis.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point in C of G local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Abs,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 absolute\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to global Cartesian origin).
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point in C of G local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Rel,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies relative to selected hard points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 position).
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 C of G Mass,\plain\fs20 (real), (units Kg), (default 1.0 Kg)
|
|
\par Sets the mass of the part that this point is the C of G marker for.\b\ul
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 C of G Local Inertia, Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Ixz and Iyz,\plain\fs20 (real), (units kg/mm2)
|
|
\par Sets the 6 inertia values for the part. Inertia properties are defined about the local axis system that has been defined by the points above.\b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm252.bmp\}
|
|
\par C of G Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Example Data
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 1: Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 1 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm253.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 1, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm254.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 1, Schematic
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 2: \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'91\f1 H\plain\f0\b\fs28 \'92\f1 Frame Lower, Single Upper Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 2 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 H\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 frame lower, single upper link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer front pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Lower wishbone outer rear pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm255.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 2, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm256.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 2, Schematic
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 3: Steerable Macpherson Strut
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 3 Steerable Macpherson strut.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm257.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 3, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm258.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 3, Schematic
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 4: Non-Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 4 Non-Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Front lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Rear lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Reaction rod outboard point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Reaction rod body point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Spring top centre line, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Spring bottom at centre line, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 12:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 13:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm259.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 4, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 5: 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 5 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Panhard rod body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Panhard rod axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Centre pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 18:\tab Wheel stub axle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 19:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 23:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 24:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par Point 25:\tab Part 7 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm260.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 5, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 6: Double Wishbone, Damper to Upper Wishbone
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 6 Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm261.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 6, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm262.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 6, Schematic
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 7: Non-Steerable Macpherson Strut, Toe Link to Wishbone
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 7 Non-Steerable Mac strut, toe link to wishbone.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Steering link to wishbone ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Lower spring pivot point on lower arm, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm263.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 7, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 8: 4-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Road)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 8 4-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard rod).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Panhard rod body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Panhard rod axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Axle tube \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 stub axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 14:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm264.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 8, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 9: 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 9 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Axle tube - stub axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 15:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm265.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 9, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 10: Trailing Arm, Upper and Lower Rear Links
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 10 Trailing arm, upper and lower rear links.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Trailing arm front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5:\tab \tab Upper link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Spring lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm266.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 10, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 11: Semi Trailing Arm
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 11 Semi trailing arm.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3:\tab \tab Damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm267.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 11, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 12: Steerable Twin Parallel Wishbones and Knuckle
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 12 Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Knuckle centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Knuckle upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Knuckle lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Axis point, x,y,z (mm)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm268.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 12, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 13: Double Wishbone Damper to Knuckle
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 13 Double Wishbone Damper to knuckle.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm269.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 13 LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 14: Double Wishbone, Push Rod to Damper
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 14 Double wishbone, push rod to damper.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 16:\tab Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 17:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm270.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 14, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 15: Double Wishbone, Rocker Arm Damper
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 15 Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm271.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 15, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 16: Non-Steerable Lower \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\b\fs28 \'92\f1 with Toe Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 16 Non-Steerable lower \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 A\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 with toe link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Lower link inboard ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Reaction rod outboard point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Reaction rod body point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm272.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 16, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 17: Double Wishbone, Push Rod Monoshock
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 17 Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab 2nd link 1st rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab 2nd link damper rocker end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Damper rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 20:\tab Damper rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 21:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 23:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 24:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 25:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 26:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par Point 27:\tab Part 7 C of G
|
|
\par Point 28:\tab Part 8 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm273.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 17, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 18: Double Wishbone, Upper Toe Link and \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\b\fs28 \'92\f1 Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 18 Double wishbone, upper toe link + \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 S\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Upper toe link inboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Upper toe link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 17:\tab Drop link axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 18:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 23:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm274.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 18, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 19: Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Type 19 Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower front link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Lower rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper link inboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Spring/Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Spring/Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Trailing arm hinge upper joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Trailing arm to body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Trailing arm hinge lower pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm275.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 19, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 20: Double Wishbone, Twin outer Ball Joints
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Type 20 Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone front link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6: \tab Upper wishbone front link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7: \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 9: \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10: \tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11: \tab Upper Spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12: \tab Lower spring pivot point, (to front lower link), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13: \tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14: \tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15: \tab Lower wishbone rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16: \tab Upper wishbone rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 18:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 22:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm276.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 20, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 21: 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 21 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6: \tab Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9: \tab Watts cross link 1, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10: \tab Watts cross link 2, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Centre pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Wheel stub axle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Watts upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Watts upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 21:\tab Watts lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 22:\tab Watts lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 23:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 24:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 25:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 26:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 27:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 28:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par Point 29:\tab Part 7 C of G
|
|
\par Point 30:\tab Part 8 C of G
|
|
\par Point 31:\tab Part 9 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm277.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 21, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 22: Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Spring to Front Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 22 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints, spring to front link.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Lower wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Upper wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 22:\tab Part 6 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm278.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 22, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 23: Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Anti-Roll Bar
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 23 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints, anti-roll bar.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 22:\tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 23: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 24:\tab Upper wishbone front outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 25:\tab Damper wishbone end(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 26: \tab Damper body end(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 27:\tab Outer track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 28:\tab Inner track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 29:\tab Upper spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 30:\tab Lower spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 31:\tab Wheel spindle point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 32:\tab Wheel centre point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 33:\tab Part 1 C of G(2)
|
|
\par Point 34:\tab Part 2 C of G(2)
|
|
\par Point 35:\tab Part 3 C of G(2)
|
|
\par Point 36:\tab Part 4 C of G(2)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 37:\tab Roll Bar Attachment 1
|
|
\par Point 38:\tab Roll Bar Attachment 2
|
|
\par Point 39:\tab Roll Bar to Link 1
|
|
\par Point 40:\tab Roll Bar to Link 2
|
|
\par Point 41:\tab Roll Bar Mount 1
|
|
\par Point 42:\tab Roll Bar Mount 2
|
|
\par Point 43:\tab Roll Bar Revolute
|
|
\par Point 44:\tab Drop Link 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 45:\tab Drop Link 2 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 46:\tab Roll Bar 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 47:\tab Roll Bar 2 C of G
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm279.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 23, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 24: Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Outer Ball Joints
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 24 Steerable Macpherson strut, twin outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone inner front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone inner rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer front ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Lower wishbone outer rear ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Strut slider upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut slider lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm280.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 24, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 25: Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer Ball Joints
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 25 Double wishbone, twin lower outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Lower wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm281.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 25, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 26: Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone, Compliant Rack
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 26 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone, compliant rack.
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8: \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 19: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 20: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 21: \tab Lower wishbone outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 22: \tab Upper wishbone front pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 23: \tab Upper wishbone rear pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 24:\tab Upper wishbone outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 25:\tab Damper wishbone end(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 26: \tab Damper body end(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 27:\tab Outer track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 28:\tab Inner track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 29:\tab Upper spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 30:\tab Lower spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 31:\tab Wheel spindle point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 32:\tab Wheel centre point(2), x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par Point 33:\tab Part 1 C of G(2)
|
|
\par Point 34:\tab Part 2 C of G(2)
|
|
\par Point 35:\tab Part 3 C of G(2)
|
|
\par Point 36:\tab Part 4 C of G(2)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 37:\tab Rack Link P1
|
|
\par Point 38:\tab Rack Link P2
|
|
\par Point 39:\tab Rack Mount P1
|
|
\par Point 40:\tab Rack Mount P2
|
|
\par Point 41:\tab Rack Link C of G
|
|
\par Point 42:\tab Rack Housing C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm282.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 26, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 27: Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 27 Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Front lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Rear lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Strut slider upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6:\tab \tab Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Strut slider lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Steering arm outboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Steering arm inboard end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Spring top centre line, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Spring bottom at centre line, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm283.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 27, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 28: 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 28 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link.
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Lower wishbone outer front pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Lower wishbone outer rear pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Upper front link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6: \tab Upper front link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 10:\tab Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Upper rear link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Upper rear link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 15:\tab Drop link to upright, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 16:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Part 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Part 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Part 5 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm284.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 28, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 29: Twist Beam \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Twin Wheel
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 29 Twist Beam \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Twin Wheel
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Trailing arm body point right, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Trailing arm body point left, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Shear point right, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Right damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Right damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6: \tab Right upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Right lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Wheel spindle point 1, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Wheel centre point 1, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab wheel centre point 2, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 11:\tab Wheel spindle point 2, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Left damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 13:\tab Left damper body end, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Left upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Left lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Shear point left, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Twist beam point right, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Twist beam point left, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li715\fi715\tx355 Point 19:\tab Centre connection point, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 20:\tab Part 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 21:\tab Part 2 C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm285.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 29, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Type 30: Generic 5-Link Rear
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Type 30 Generic 5-Link Rear
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Point 1: \tab Link1 Inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 2: \tab Link 1 Outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 3: \tab Link 2 Inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 4: \tab Link2 Outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 5: \tab Link 3 Inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 6: \tab Link 3 Outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 7:\tab \tab Link 4 Inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 8:\tab \tab Link 4 Outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 9:\tab \tab Link 5 Inboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 10:\tab Link 5 Outboard, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 11:\tab Spring Damper to Body, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 12:\tab Spring Damper to Upright, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par \pard\li1435\tx355 Point 13:\tab Stub Axle, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par Point 14:\tab Wheel Centre, x,y,z (mm).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Point 15:\tab Link 1 C of G
|
|
\par Point 16:\tab Link 2 C of G
|
|
\par Point 17:\tab Link 3 C of G
|
|
\par Point 18:\tab Link 4 C of G
|
|
\par Point 19:\tab Link 5 C of G
|
|
\par Point 20:\tab Upright C of G
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm286.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Suspension Type 30, LSA Screen Shot \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Default Co-ordinates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Solver Tolerances
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D Solver uses a number of tolerances to control the calculation process.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Kinematic Solution Tol.,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 1.e-10)
|
|
\par Controls the solution tolerance used by the kinematic solver in identifying the convergence limit.
|
|
\par The kinematic solver uses a hybrid approach to find a zero of a system of n non-linear functions in n variables by a modification of the Powell hybrid method.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bump Small Perturbation Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.05 mm)
|
|
\par \pard The standard approach used by the solver to determine certain derivatives at each suspension step position is to use a small incremental bump displacement. The size of this bump perturbation can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Steer Small Perturbation Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.05 mm)
|
|
\par For steerable suspension templates that do not have a identified top and bottom ball joint, the standard approach used by the solver to determine the steering axis at each suspension step position is to use a small incremental steer displacement. The size of this steer perturbation can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Toolbox Auto-Adjust angle Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 0.005 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the tolerance used by the toolbox utility when adjusting a component length to achieve a desired static angle. The solver continues lengthening or shortening the selected component until the camber, castor or toe angle (as required) is within this tolerance from the desired static value.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Kinematic Solver Bump Seeding Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.05 mm)
|
|
\par \pard This value is used as part of the solver seeding for unsolved points. At the start of each solution step initial values are supplied to all the unknowns to start the solution iteration, to avoid numerical issues of identical points the z position for moving points is seeded by a small amount of change from the previous solutions position. The size of this seeding value can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm287.bmp\}
|
|
\par Solver Tolerances Display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D General Defaults
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Control of certain display features relies on a set of user controllable values.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min Allowable Scale Factor,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 0.00001)
|
|
\par Sets the minimum scale factor allowed when zooming or dynamically viewing the graphics display. This stops the viewing pipeline from failing through excessive zooming out.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max Allowable Scale Factor,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 500)
|
|
\par Sets the maximum scale factor allowed when zooming or dynamically viewing the graphics display. This stops the viewing pipeline from failing through excessive zooming in.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tolerance on Point Pick,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 0.05)
|
|
\par Defines the size of the pick circle used to check if a point has been selected with the mouse. The value is in 2d screen size, where \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 1\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is the full screen length. A larger number will make the selection easier but increase the chance of mis-selection.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tolerance on Coincident Point Pick,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 0.02)
|
|
\par Defined the screen size value used to determine whether two or more points are considered to be coincident. A greater value will lead to more instances of points being considered coincident.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Joggle Step Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 10 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the step size used for joggle mode editing. This is the coarse step size, (Ctrl + arrow), whilst the fine step size, (Shift + arrow), will be 1/10th of this.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Animation Update,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mSec), (default 50 mSec)
|
|
\par Defines the fastest rate for which animation will update. Machines unable to refresh at this rate will draw at their maximum speed, whilst high specification PC\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s will be clipped to the defined refresh speed. Reducing this value will increase animation frame rate on high end PC\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Results Menu Switch,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 1)
|
|
\par Debug option used on previous version due to problems with the results menu being greyed out and not being able to status it back on as required. When set to 0 avoids statusing \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the results menu..
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm288.bmp\}
|
|
\par General Defaults Display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Deformed Geometry Scalar
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The display of the compliant model displacements has a specific scalar display setting.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Deformed Geometry Scalar,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 1.0)
|
|
\par To assist in viewing the model deflections due to the compliance effects a scalar value is editable. This is equivalent to the Finite-element modal analysis scalar value. Note that this controls both the static display and the animation when in \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 compliant\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm289.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the compliant graphics deformed geometry scalar
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Deformed Geometry Position
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The animation display of the compliant model occurs at a defined incremental position.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Deformed Geometry Position,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 0)
|
|
\par The animation of compliant deformed geometry is drawn at a defined position. The default setting for this is to animate it at the static position, (0). The deformed geometry at alternative incremental steps can be performed by changing this value. This value is internally clipped to the maximum number of steps available.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm290.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the compliant graphics deformed geometry position
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Enhanced Graphic Sizes
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Enhanced graphics elements have a number of dimensional properties that can be defined by the user.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Spring Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 45 mm)
|
|
\par The graphical radius of the suspension spring is drawn to this radius.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 No of Spring Coils (max 60),\plain\fs20 (integer), (units mm), (default 10)
|
|
\par Sets the No. of coils used when drawing the suspension spring.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Lower Damper Tube Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the radius for the lower tube of the damper enhanced graphics element.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Upper Damper Tube Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 30 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the radius for the upper tube of the damper enhanced graphics element.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Damper Number of Facets (max 19),\plain\fs20 (integer), (units mm), (default 10)
|
|
\par The detail of the cylinder used to draw a damper element is controlled by a number of facets.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Pivot Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 10 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the radius of the cylinder used to graphically illustrate model parts that have been identified as pivot axes.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Pivot No. of Facets (max 19),\plain\fs20 (integer), (units mm), (default 8)
|
|
\par The detail of the cylinder used to draw a pivot is controlled by a number of facets.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre No of Facets (max 31),\plain\fs20 (integer), (units mm), (default 21)
|
|
\par The detail of the facetted tyre representation is controlled by this value.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Diameter Shoulder (0-1),\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.9)
|
|
\par Sets the value for the diameter of the tyre shoulder as a fraction of the rolling radius. The shoulder is the tapered section of the graphical representation.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Width Shoulder (0-1),\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.75 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the value for the width of the tyre excluding the shoulder as a fraction of the width. The shoulder is the tapered section of the graphical representation.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 3D Tracking Line Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 150 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the length of the tracking line drawn through each hard point when in edit mode.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Joggle Symbol Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units none), (default 0.05)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the size of the joggle symbol used to indicate the current point when in joggle mode. Size is based on screen size.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 C of G Symbol Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the diameter of the symbol used to represent the position of the C of G symbol.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Grid Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the size of the squares used to draw the ground plane grid.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 3D Line Clipping Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 2000 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the clipped size for graphical lines that have no defined length, such as cross product vectors.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 3D Plane Clipping Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 1000 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the clipped size for graphical planes that have no defined size.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 BumpStop Cone Upper Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the radius used for the upper radius of the bump stop graphical cone.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 BumpStop Cone Lower Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the radius used for the lower radius of the bump stop graphical cone.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 BumpStop Number of Facets (max 19),\plain\fs20 (integer), (units mm), (default 10)
|
|
\par The detail of the cone used to draw a bumpstop element is controlled by a number of facets.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Virtual Steer Axis Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 2000 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the length of the virtual steer axis.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Local Coordinate Axis Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the length of the local coordinate axis systems drawn on the graphical display.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm291.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Enhanced graphics sizes
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphics Label Sizes
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The text labels drawn on the graphics display can be set by the user.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point Value Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the size of the text used to identify the model template point Nos.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Point No. Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the size of the text used to identify the model hard point co-ordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm292.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Enhanced graphics label sizes
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Compliance Graphic Sizes
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Compliance graphics elements have a number of dimensional properties that can be defined by the user.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Ball Joint Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 15 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the radius of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ball joints in the compliant model.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Ball Joint Circumferential Complexity,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 10)
|
|
\par Sets the number of facets applied to the ball joint in the circumferential direction.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Ball Joint Height Complexity,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 10)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the number of facets applied to the ball joint in the height direction.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 12 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the radius of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 elements in the compliant model.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 30 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the length of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Bush\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 elements in the compliant model.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Circumferential Complexity,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 10)
|
|
\par Sets the number of facets applied to the bush in the circumferential direction.\b\ul
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Height Complexity,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 4)
|
|
\par Sets the number of facets applied to the bush in the height direction.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Bush Axis Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the length of the lines used to indicate the bush local axes.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Tyre Spring Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 12 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the radius of the springs for the compliant tyre element.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force / Torque Fixed Head Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 30 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the size of the internal and external force and torque heads, when the display is set to fixed head size.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force / Torque Fixed Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 300 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the length of any force or torque arrow, when display is set to fixed length.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Scaled Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/N), (default 0.2 mm/N)
|
|
\par Defines the scale factor applied to forces when force display is set to variable length and/or variable head.\b\ul
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Torque Scaled Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm/N.mm), (default 0.002 mm/N.mm)
|
|
\par Defines the scale factor applied to torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s when torque display is set to variable length and/or variable head.\b\ul
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Force Value Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 6.00 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the screen size of the force value label.\b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm293.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Compliance graphics sizes
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graph Markers and Text Sizes
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The user can define the graph marker sizes. Additionally the text sizes on the graphs and the compliance results can be set by the user.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Data Marker Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.05)
|
|
\par Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph Data lines
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Scope Marker Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.05)
|
|
\par Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph Scope lines
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 User Marker Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.05)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph User lines
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Graph Data Values Text Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.03)
|
|
\par Defines the size of the text used to display values of points on the graphs.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Title Text Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.1)
|
|
\par Defines the size of the text used to display the graph titles on the compliance coefficient results display.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Label Text Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.067)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the size of the text used to display the variables labels on the compliance coefficient results display.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Values Text Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.067)
|
|
\par Defines the size of the text used to display the compliance coefficients on the bar chart results display.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm294.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Graph marker and text sizes
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphs Decimal Points Display
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The user can define the number of decimal points used on the graph display for individual value displays.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 X-Data Listing,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the X data value list.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Y-Data Listing,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the Y data value list.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Derivative Data Listing,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the derivative value on the data list.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Scope Deviation,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the display of the deviation between the data and scope lines.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 User Deviation,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the display of the deviation between the data and user lines.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 X-Axis Label,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed X-Axis value labels.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Y-Axis Label,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed Y-Axis value labels.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Compliance Graph Values,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units none), (default 3)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed bar chart values on the compliance graphs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm295.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the displayed Graph Decimal Points settings
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Point Tolerances
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Individual point tolerances can be edited by locating the point and tolerance of interest through the tree structure presented and setting the actual limiting value. All point tolerances can be set in one go by defining the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 delta\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 from their current position in each axis and direction.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 For the individual point tolerances setting, select from tree structure and then edit from;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm296.bmp\}
|
|
\par Selecting the Point and tolerance to Edit from the tree display
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min X,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the X-axis direction.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max X,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the X-axis direction.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min Y,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the Y-axis direction.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max Y,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the Y-axis direction.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Min Z,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the Z-axis direction.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Max Z,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default none)
|
|
\par Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the Z-axis direction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm297.bmp\}
|
|
\par Individual Point Tolerance Editing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 all points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tolerances setting, all tolerances are edited as positive difference values along each axis direction, (i.e. both positive and negative axis directions are entered as positive values;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b -ve X Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the tolerance in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve X-axis direction for the hard point value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b +ve X Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the tolerance in the +ve X-axis direction for the hard point value.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b -ve Y Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the tolerance in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve Y-axis direction for the hard point value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b +ve Y Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the tolerance in the +ve Y-axis direction for the hard point value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b -ve Z Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the tolerance in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve Z-axis direction for the hard point value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b +ve Z Tolerance,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the tolerance in the +ve Z-axis direction for the hard point value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm298.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 All\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point Tolerances
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Spring Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The suspension spring properties are used to define the spring forces applied to the compliant model, (when enabled). Incremental spring force properties are set by the combination of rate, free length, fitted length and the current spring displacement. Note that only linear rate springs can currently be modeled. All the properties are repeated twice (1) and (2) to support either corner models with two springs or full axle templates.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the spring properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Front Spring Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 41.5 N/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the linear spring rate for the front suspension spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Spring Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 41.5 N/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the linear spring rate for the rear suspension spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Front Spring Free Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 300 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the free (un-compresed) length for the front suspension spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Spring Free Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 300 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the free (un-compresed) length for the rear suspension spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Front Spring Fitted Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 246.5 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the fitted (installed) length for the front suspension spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Spring Fitted Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 246.5 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the fitted (installed) length for the rear suspension spring.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm299.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the 3D Spring Data
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Damper Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The suspension damper properties are used to define the damping characteristics applied to the compliant model, (when enabled) via the main dampers. The damping due to bushes is included separately via a Bush Loss Angle number that can be edited via the \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85\plain\fs20 menu option. Note that only linear damping can currently be modeled.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the damper properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / Damper Properties\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Front Damper 1 Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the damper rate for the front suspension damper 1 element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Damper 1 Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the damper rate for the rear suspension damper 1 element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Front Damper 2 Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the damper rate for the front suspension damper 2 element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Damper 2 Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)
|
|
\par Sets the damper rate for the rear suspension damper 2 element.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm300.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the 3D Damper Data
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Roll Bar Properties
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The suspension roll bar properties are used to define the roll stiffness of the roll bar revolute joint, when included in a template. It only affects compliance results.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the roll bar properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / Roll Bar Properties\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Front Roll Bar Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 2.0E6 N.mm/deg)
|
|
\par Sets the roll bar rate for the front suspension roll bar element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Roll Bar Rate,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 2.0E6 N.mm/deg)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the roll bar rate for the rear suspension roll bar element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm301.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the 3D Roll Bar Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D General Compliance Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The compliant solver uses a number of standard constants in solving the compliant suspension model. These constants can be modified by the user through the data section.
|
|
\par \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 To edit th ese general compliance properties select \i Data / Compliance Data / General Data\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Singularity Stiffness,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 10. N/mm)
|
|
\par Defines the stiffness value used within the solver to remove the singularity caused by components such as tie rods. Eliminates the degree of freedom using this arbitrary stiffness value.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Rigid (Ball Joint) Stiffness,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 1.0e8 N/mm)
|
|
\par For ball joints defined as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the compliant solver will treat as high stiffness bushes with a constant 3x translational stiffness and 3x zero rotational stiffness. This is the value used for the high translational stiffness.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rigid Rotation Stiffness,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 1.0e8 N.mm/deg)
|
|
\par For joints defined as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rotational\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 the compliant solver will treat as a a 6 d.o.f. bush with a constant 3x high translational stiffness and 2x high rotational stiffness. This is the value used for the high rotational stiffness. The translational stiffness is taken as the value above.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Bush Loss Angle,\plain\fs20 (real), (units deg), (default 3.0 deg)
|
|
\par Defines the default damping value for a bush. User defined values for individual bushes will overwrite this setting.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Default Compliant Stiffness,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N/mm), (default 1.0e3 N/mm)
|
|
\par For bushes this is used to fill the default 3 translational stiffness values when switched from a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ball joint to a compliant bush.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Default Rotation Stiffness,\plain\fs20 (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 1.0e6 N/mm)
|
|
\par \pard For certain bushes this is used to fill the default 3 rotational stiffness values when used as a bush that requires some rotational stiffness other than \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm302.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the 3D General Compliance Data
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D User Definable Templates
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \b Template Properties
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Each of the template types hard coded into Shark uses a series of properties to identify its form. The properties include;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Template Number
|
|
\par \tab Template Label
|
|
\par \tab No of Parts
|
|
\par \tab Part Labels
|
|
\par \tab No of Points
|
|
\par \tab Point Labels/Point Number
|
|
\par \tab Point default x, y and z values
|
|
\par \tab No of Bushes
|
|
\par \tab Point attachments to parts
|
|
\par \tab Point Types
|
|
\par \tab No of Graphical Elements
|
|
\par \tab Graphical element type
|
|
\par \tab Graphical element associated points
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b\ul
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 Together with some additional properties this allows the application to both build, display and analyze the kinematic and compliant models for each template.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Hard Coded Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 By default some 30 templates are hard coded into the application. These are the ones listed in this help file under the \uldb 3D suspension templates\plain\fs20 section. It is important to notice that these hard coded templates have a template index number. This allows the data files to refer to a template type by its index number when loaded, using the model structure as defined by the internal template, just replacing the default x, y and z co-ordinates with those in the model file.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Adding to the Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 It is possible to add to, (or indeed replace), the standard hard coded templates in two ways. The first is termed as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates, which are automatically loaded on program start-up. Whilst the second is termed \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates and need to be loaded directly by the user once the application is open. Both \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates are stored in ASCII text files that could be edited/viewed through any standard text editor.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Default Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 default\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates are loaded on program start-up from the file \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 _User_Templates.Dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . This file is searched for in the applications start-up folder, (normally C:\'5clesoft), and if found is read in. As with the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hard coded\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates each entry in the default templates file has a template index number, and the default templates properties will be stored at this location. Thus if the index number used clashes with one used by the hard coded templates the hard coded template data will be over written. Whilst this would normally not be recommended it may for example be useful just to change the default point co-ordinates for the hard coded template.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Restoring the Default Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The default templates would normally only be loaded on program start-up. It is possible to change the default templates through some external text editor such that you want to re-apply the default templates during a program run. This may also be required is a user defined template has inadvertently over-written a default template index and you require to re-read the default templates. To do this without having to quit the application select \i File / Re-Read Default Templates\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Loading User Defined Custom Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 User defined templates are stored in ASCII text files having exactly the same file format as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 defaults\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file. As with the hard coded and default templates each entry in a file will have a template index number. This will be the template slot that will be filled with the following template properties. So as with user templates it is possible to over-write a hard coded or default template when reading in user template data. To load user defined templates from an existing file select \i File / Add Custom Templates\plain\fs20 and locate the required file via the browser.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Creating and Editing Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The easiest way of modifying and creating templates is to use the supplied template editing tool. This spread sheet based display allows you to view/modify existing templates or create new ones. To open the template editor select \i File / Edit Templates\'85\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm303.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Editing the 3D Template Properties \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Parts Panel
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The display is divided into 4 separate panels, For Parts, Points, Settings and Graphics. As the labels suggest.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The Parts panel identifies how many parts their are in the template and gives each one a label. An additional part is assumed without it needing to be defined, that is the ground/body.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The Points panel defines how many points there are in the template, gives each one a label and a set of default co-ordinates.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The Settings panel defines how the model is connected. This is done by identifying which parts a point is attached too. If it is attached to two parts (including ground), this implies a connection between these two parts at the defined point. If a point is only attached to one point then it does not define a joint. Additionally the settings panel identify points that have a special function, (listed as gen type). Examples of these special functions damper attachment points, steering rack attachment etc. A point may have more than one special function, (listed under gen. type 1 and gen. type 2).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The graphics panel defines any additional graphical elements that the user requires to visualize the suspension template. A number of different graphic element types are available. By default graphical elements are automatically added for the wheel, stub axle, spring and damper and thus do not need to be added by the user.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Data types, Compulsory, Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Template properties are arranged in sets that are identified by colour.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Compulsory properties, (pale pink), are those that must be defined by the user these include all part and point panel properties together with 4 columns of the settings panel.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The other property sets are arranged into three levels, all of which can be filled automatically, but with decreasing levels of confidence. The automatic fill can be enabled and set to the required level via the \i Data / Auto Fill\plain\fs20 menu options. By default the Auto fill option is set to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Level 1, (pale mauve), involves identifying and numbering each of the bushes in the template. Setting the auto fill to level 1 or higher fill automatically populate the relevant column and value entry. This auto fill level is the most reliable and can be used with confidence.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Level 2, (pale green), involves identifying the solution type to be used with each point, column 2 of the settings panel. The combination of general type settings and part connections is used to identify the most suitable solution type from the 10 alternatives. Whilst this level of auto fill works for all the hard coded template types it may need some user intervention for new types, but should be used as a first fill.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Level 3, (pale yellow), covers the specific settings for each points solution, columns 6 to 11 for the settings panel. Where relevant it identifies which other points are used in each points solution. Some solution types require no points whilst some will require as many as six, (see the later discussion on this). This auto-fill level is the most likely to need user intervention to set the required properties.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Testing the Template
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The settings panel properties are used by the solver to identify the number of unknowns, (i.e. solving for one hard point introduces three unknowns x, y and z), and the equations to use for solving these unknowns. Thus for a successful template settings it is required to have as many equations as unknowns. A utility is provide to pre-test the template properties to check for satisfying this criteria. To test the currently displayed template settings select the menu item \i Data / Run Validation Test\plain\fs20 . A scrollable text display is listed identifying the current unknowns versus equations status and the form of each equation. (See later section for discussion on solution types).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm304.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Testing the 3D Template Settings
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Settings Panel \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 General Types
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 One of the compulsory properties for each point is the General type setting. As stated previously a point may have more than one general type settings. General types are listed in columns 12 and 13. Not all of the general types need appear in every template, although some general types must appear in each. These \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 required\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 general types are identified below.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The fifteen general types are;
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 0 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 None:\plain\fs20 Defines the point status as having no general type. Examples of this would be most suspension link attachment points to the body and track rod outer ball joints.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Wheel Centre:\plain\fs20 Simple general type that tags the model point used for the wheel centre. Together with the general type 2 below identify the wheel spindle axis. (Required).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Stub Axle:\plain\fs20 Simple general type that tags the model point used to identify the wheel spindle axis. See also type 1 above. (Required).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Steering Attachment Point:\plain\fs20 Identifies which suspension link end point should be used for the steering input from the rack or steering box. The omission of a type 3 point indicates a non-steerable suspension template, and thus will only appear in the rear suspension templates list. This point should be the inboard end of the track rod, i.e. link point connected to body. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Damper 1 to Suspension:\plain\fs20 Identifies this point as being the attachment of the damper to the suspension system it also identifies the slider of a Macpherson strut. If this general type is not identified no damper travel and damper ratios will be determined. Examples of this general type include the lower point of a conventional damper and the point used to identify the slider of a Macpherson strut. (Optional except for strut suspensions).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Damper 1 to Body (also Strut top):\plain\fs20 Identifies this point as being the upper attachment point of the damper to the body it also identifies the top of a Macpherson strut . If this general type is not identified no damper travel and damper ratios will be determined. Examples of this general type include the upper point of a conventional damper and the point used to identify the top mount of the Macpherson strut. (Optional except for strut suspensions).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Spring 1 to Suspension: \plain\fs20 Identifies the attachment point of the spring to the suspension. In the case of a conventional coil-over spring damper this point may be the same as type 4 above. If omitted the spring travel and spring ratio parameters will not be calculated. This point would not normally be at a connection between two parts point. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 7 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Spring 1 to Body:\plain\fs20 Identifies the attachment point of the spring to the body. In the case of a conventional coil-over spring damper this point may be the same as type 5 above. If omitted the spring travel and spring ratio parameters will not be calculated. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 8 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Upper Ball joint:\plain\fs20 Identifies a point as being the upper ball joint for the steering axis. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the lower ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 9 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Lower Ball Joint:\plain\fs20 Identifies a point as being the lower ball joint for the steering axis. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the upper ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 10 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Strut Slider Point:\plain\fs20 Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the top bush for the strut, (attached to the strut body). (Required for Struts).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 11 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Strut Lower end Point:\plain\fs20 Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the strut lower bush, (attached to the strut slider). (Required for Struts).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 14 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Roll Bar, Link Attachment:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the first connection between the roll bar drop link and the suspension. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have both this and point 32 defined.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 15 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Rack Lateral Mount Point:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the connection between the rack and the body at which the lateral load is taken. Only required if compliant rack force is required on asymmetric loading. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 16 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Rack Mount Point:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the connection between the second rack connection point to the body. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 17 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Wheel Centre (2):\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being a second wheel centre. Typically this implies a rigid axle type of suspension template as it is normal to model independent suspension as individual corners. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 18 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Damper 2 to Suspension:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the connection between the second damper and the suspension. It could be the left hand side damper in a rigid axle template or the second damper in a two damper corner model, (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 19 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Damper 2 to Body:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the connection between the second damper and the suspension. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 20 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Spring 2 to Suspension:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the connection between the second spring and the suspension. It could be the left hand side spring in a rigid axle template or the second spring in a twin spring corner model, (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 21 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Spring 2 to Body:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the connection between the second spring and the suspension. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 22 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Rigid Axle Revolute:\plain\fs20 Defines the point as being the revolute joint required by the over constrained rigid axle templates in kinematic mode. It adds a rotational degree of freedom to allow roll motion to occur kinematically. This rotation is then removed by applying equal and opposite torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s in compliant mode as pre-loads of a stiff bush. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 23 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Stub Axle (2):\plain\fs20 Identifies a second stub axle point used in twist beam type templates where both sides are modelled in one go but have different stub axle references.. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 24 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Shear Point:\plain\fs20 Used just for twist beam suspensions to identify the different pivot point position used in bump and roll. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 25 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Part C of G Point:\plain\fs20 Used to identify a point as being the C of G point for its primary part. It is normal for this point to not be used except as the C of G point, i.e. no involved in any joints. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 26 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Upper Ball joint(2):\plain\fs20 Identifies a point as being the upper ball joint for the steering axis on full axle templates only. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the lower ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 27 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Lower Ball Joint(2):\plain\fs20 Identifies a point as being the lower ball joint for the steering axis on full axle templates only. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the upper ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 28 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Strut Slider Point(2)\plain\fs20 Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the top bush for the strut for full axle templates only, (attached to the strut body). (Required for Struts).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 29 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Strut Lower end Point(2):\plain\fs20 Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the strut lower bush for full axle templates only, (attached to the strut slider). (Required for Struts).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 32 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Roll Bar, Link Attachment(2):\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as being the second connection between the roll bar drop link and the suspension. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have both this and point 14 defined.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 33 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Steering Attachment Point(2):\plain\fs20 Identifies which suspension link end point should be used for the steering input from the rack or steering box for the second end in a full axle model only. See also point 3 above. This point should be the inboard end of the track rod, i.e. link point connected to body or rack. (Optional). For a compliant rack to be added to the model this point must be defined together with point 3 above.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 In kinematic mode this is treated as a simple revolute allowing roll motion. In compliant mode the roll bar stiffness is applied to this point to simulate the effect of the roll bar stiffness. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have this point and points 14 and 32 defined.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 34 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Roll Bar Revolute Joint:\plain\fs20 Identifies the points the position used to represent the anti-roll bar stiffness. The bush associated with this point has its translational stiffness\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 set to rigid and the local z-axis rotational stiffness set to the defined roll bar stiffness.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 35 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Wheel Hub Compliance:\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as the wheel hub. In compliance mode the bush associated with this point, that connects the hub to the upright, is given the compliant hub stiffness properties.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 36 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Wheel Hub Compliance(2):\plain\fs20 Identifies the point as the second wheel hub in a full axle template. In compliance mode the bush associated with this point, that connects the hub to the upright, is given the compliant hub stiffness properties.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 37 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Outer CV Centre:\plain\fs20 Marks the point as being the centre of the outer CV joint. This would normally for automatically generated drive shafts also be the stub axle point.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 38 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Outer CV Centre(2):\plain\fs20 Marks the point as being the centre of the second outer CV joint in a full axle template. This would normally for automatically generated drive shafts also be the stub axle(2) point.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 39 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Inner CV Centre:\plain\fs20 Marks the point as being the centre of the inner CV joint. This point is used along with point 41 to apply drive shaft torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 40 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Inner CV Centre(2):\plain\fs20 Marks the point as being the centre of the second inner CV joint in a full axle template. This point is used along with point 42 to apply drive shaft torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 41 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Inner CV Axis:\plain\fs20 This point type, together with point type 39, (see above) define the axis of the inner CV joint. This axis is used to apply drive shaft torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 42 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Inner CV Axis(2):\plain\fs20 This point type, together with point type 40, (see above) define the axis of the second inner CV joint for a full axle template. This axis is used to apply drive shaft torque\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 43 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Spacer Point:\plain\fs20 This point type marks it as being associated with a connection between a spacer and a part. This tag enables spacer specific calculations to be performed.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 44 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Spacer Vector Point:\plain\fs20 This point type marks it as being the axis point of a spacer. Spacer vectors control the orientation of the spacer offset and thus require this individual flag to enable spacer vector specific calculations to be performed.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm305.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Template Settings \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Type 1 General types
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Settings Panel \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Point Types
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Point types can be auto filled with a reasonable level of confidence with auto fill set to level 2. The possible nine types are described below to enable direct user editing of this template setting. The equivalent required data values for columns 6 to 11 are also described.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 0 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 To Body/Ground:\plain\fs20 No unknowns or equation added to the main solver for this point type. No column 6 to 11 data required. Solver will pre calculate the positions of these points based on either incremental body bump or roll displacement. Example points would be any suspension attachment to body points.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Solve Direct (Sphere): \plain\fs20 Adds three unknowns to the solver. Uses the spherical distance relationship of this point to any others listed in columns 6 to 11. Examples of this would be the outer ball joint of a conventional wishbone. Columns 6, 7 and 8 refer to other relevant points on part 1, whilst columns 9, 10 and 11 refer to other relevant points on part 2. As an example a lower wishbone outer ball joint would have two spherical equations with its two inboard body attachment points on its first part, and two spherical equations with the upper wishbones outer ball joint and the track rod outer ball joint on its second part.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2 - Solve Post (Vector Pos):\plain\fs20 Does not add any unknowns or equations to the main solver for this point type. It is solved after the main solver calculation is complete and uses three other points on the same body to identify its new position. This would normally be used for points such as a springs\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 attachment to a wishbone. The two pivot points and the outer ball joint define its position. Values need to be defined in columns 6, 7,and 8. No values would be expected in columns 9, 10 and 11.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Define Z-pos (Wheel Centre):\plain\fs20 This type is only applicable to the wheel centre point. Solution for the wheel centre is based on a defined z position of the tyre contact point. The two unknowns of x and y are added to the solution. Requires three points to be defined in columns 6, 7 and 8 that identify three other points on part 1, (excluding the stub axle point).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Solve Direct (Slider Conn):\plain\fs20 Specific point type for strut sliders. Equation based on retaining the relationship between the three strut axis points. Requires the strut top and strut lower point to be defined in columns 6 and 7 for the first part. Requires two points to be defined in columns 9 and 10 for points on part 2.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Solve Post (Stub Axle): \plain\fs20 Specific point type for stub axle point. Solve method is based on a post main solver calculation that uses three other points on part 1 to define its position. Normally the wheel centre is given as one of the three.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Solve direct (Slider Bottom):\plain\fs20 Specific type for the strut slider lower axis point. Requires the strut top point to be defined in column 6 for part 1.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 7 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Solve via Hookes Joint:\plain\fs20 Normally only required if a simple spherical solution can\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t be used because a force or connection is applied to a simple link element (i.e. two main suspension connections). An example of this is the mounting of a spring or anti-roll bar to a simple tie rod. The two main connection points are required in columns 6 and 7 for part 1.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 8 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Solve Post (Sphere):\plain\fs20 A post main solver spherical calculation. Requires three defining points to be given in columns 6, 7 and 8 for part 1. Example is solution of roll bar drop link to roll bar position. Can only be applied to points that have no control over kinematic wheel position.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 9 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Pre-Solve (Kine Fix):\plain\fs20 A pre main solver option calculation. Requires no defining points since the point is assumed to be inactive in kinematic mode. It remains fixed to the part it is defined on (normally ground or a ground fixed part). It is used to add additional compliance effects for parts such as rack mounts and sub frames that are assumed to have no kinematic effect but are included in the compliance matrix.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm306.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Template Settings \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 Selecting Point Type
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Solution Types
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The solution types used by the main solver are based on one of six types. The particular type used for each depends on the point type settings discussed above.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 A brief description of each solution type is given here:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Sphere Equation:\plain\fs20 Spherical distance between point 1 and point 2.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Distance to Vector: \plain\fs20 Perpendicular distance of point 1 from a vector drawn from point 2 to point 3.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 x-x Based Slope: \plain\fs20 The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in x-x, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 y-y Based Slope: \plain\fs20 The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in y-y, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.\b
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 z-z Based Slope: \plain\fs20 The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in z-z, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.\b
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6 \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'96\f1 Minimum Z value: \plain\fs20 The lowest point of solid disc at point 1 normal to an axis to point 2 has a lowest z value as defined.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Creating a New Template
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The sequence of data entry for creating a new template should be:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 1)\plain\fs20 Identify an empty index No.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 2)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel enter the template label.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 3)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel define the number of parts, (make upright \ul last\plain\fs20 part).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 4)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel enter the part labels. Ensure the upright is the last part in the list.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 5)\plain\fs20 Change to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel and define the number of points.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 6)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel define the point labels.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 7)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Points\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel enter the default x, y and z coordinates.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 8)\plain\fs20 Change to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel and set the Part 1 and Part 2 properties for each point.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 9)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel define the relevant Gen. Type 1and Gen. Type 2 settings.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 10)\plain\fs20 Set the Auto fit level to 3 and review the filled values.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 11)\plain\fs20 Check the validity of the auto-filled values using the \i Data / Run Validation Test\'85\plain\fs20 option.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 12)\plain\fs20 If necessary make modifications to columns 6 to 11 to pass test.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 13)\plain\fs20 Change to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel and add define number of graphical elements.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b 14)\plain\fs20 On the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Graphics\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 panel enter graphical element data.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Control Elements and Actuators
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Control Element properties are used either to modify the position of a hard point (position actuator) or change length of a point to point distance (length actuator). This is a kinematic effect in that it will modify the kinematic motion as a function of the transducer input. The transducer can be the change in the length between two points, such as the damper upper and lower points. The transducer input can also be the Z-displacement of the ground/body (or of a identified point), finally it can also be the current roll angular displacement. The relationship between the transducer value and the change in length of the controller distance is defined by a point-by-point spline employing linear interpolation/extrapolation. Individual control elements can be applied to points/lengths in pairs to provide control for example in the case of a pivot axis where you wish to move both axis-defining points.
|
|
\par \pard \b\ul
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 To edit the control element properties pick the relevant control elements \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spot\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 in the graphical display. (if they are not visible turn on visibility via \i Graphics / Enhanced visibility / Actuator\plain\fs20 ).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par For the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'93\f1 Position Actuator\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'94\plain\fs20 the properties are\'85
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm307.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Position Actuator\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 Control Element Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Label,\plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (Added via Pick)
|
|
\par Identifies an individual label for the actuator.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Static Colour,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Cyan\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 )
|
|
\par Sets the colour used to draw \ul all\plain\fs20 actuators at the static position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Incremental Colour,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Blue\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 )
|
|
\par Sets the colour used to draw \ul all\plain\fs20 actuators at any position other than \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 static\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Tube 1 Diameter,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 5.0 mm)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the graphical size of tube 1 for \ul all\plain\fs20 actuators.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Tube 2 Diameter,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 10.0 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the graphical size of tube 2 for \ul all\plain\fs20 actuators.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Facets,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 10 )
|
|
\par Sets the number of radial facets used to draw the actuator cylinders for \ul all\plain\fs20 actuators.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Fixed Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 150 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the length of the fixed portion of \ul all\plain\fs20 the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 position\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 actuator.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Edit Control Data Spline,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm or deg as appropriate), (default spline)
|
|
\par Defines the relationship between the transducer measured property and the applied actuator change. In its simplest form this could be the ratio for the change in lengths.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm308.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Control Spline\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 for a Control Element
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Actuator 1 Pnt1,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default picked point)
|
|
\par Identifies the point whose position will be modified by the position actuator, (normally selected from the graphical display with the mouse as part of the creation process).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Vector (dx/dy/dz),\plain\fs20 (real), (units -), (default 0.0/1.0/0.0)
|
|
\par Sets the actuator vector used for the point displacement, i.e. the points position will be moved along this vector by the actuator.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Transducer Pnt1,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default damper lower)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the first point of the transducer. Can be a hard point (for the change in position between two points) or the Z-displacement of the ground, body or the point specified in \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Transducer Pnt2\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Transducer Pnt2,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default damper upper)
|
|
\par Sets the second point of the transducer. Can be a hard point (for the change in position between two points) or the point referenced by a Z-displacement selection in \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Transducer Pnt1\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Actuator 2 Scaler,\plain\fs20 (real), (units -), (default 1.0)
|
|
\par Sets the displacement scale used between the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Actuator Pnt1\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 and the optional \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Actuator Pnt2\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 . Actuator Pnt2 will use the same displacement vector as Pnt1 but its displacement will be the Scaler times the displacement of Actuator Pnt1.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Enhanced Visibility,\plain\fs20 (On/Off switch), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Control the visibility in the graphics display of \ul all\plain\fs20 control elements.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'93\f1 Length Actuator\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'94\plain\fs20 the properties are the same as for the above position actuator with the exception of\'85
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm309.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Length Actuator\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 Control Element Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Actuator 1 Pnt1,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default picked point)
|
|
\par Identifies the first point involved in the controlled length of the length actuator, (normally selected from the graphical display with the mouse as part of the creation process).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Actuator 1 Pnt2,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default picked point)
|
|
\par Identifies the second point involved in the controlled length of the length actuator, (normally selected from the graphical display with the mouse as part of the creation process).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Actuator 2 Pnt1,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default none)
|
|
\par For the optional second control length, identifies the first point involved in the controlled length of the length actuator. Select from available list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Actuator 2 Pnt2,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default none)
|
|
\par For the optional second control length, identifies the second point involved in the controlled length of the length actuator. Select from available list.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Body Centre of Gravity Properties
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par To edit the body C of G properties pick the C of G symbol through the graphical interface, (if it is not visible turn on visibility via \i Graphics / Enhanced visibility / Body C of G Marker\plain\fs20 ). These properties can also be edited via the pull down menu \i Data / Parameters\'85 \plain\fs20 Although the label may be misleading with the use of the word \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , it is in reality the total overall vehicle C of G property and not just the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm310.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Body C of G Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par For the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'93\f1 Body Centre of Gravity\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'94\plain\fs20 the properties are\'85
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Graphic Size,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)
|
|
\par Sets the size of the on screen graphic used to identify and locate the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spot\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 for the body G of G point.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b C of G Height,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 250 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the height above the ground plane of the vehicle C of G, (note this is not the global Z position but Z height relative to the ground plane).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Total Weight Front,\plain\fs20 (real), (units %), (default 40 %)
|
|
\par Sets the percentage of the total vehicle weight associated with front, (i.e. together with the wheelbase this positions the axial position of the vehicle C of G.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Total Sprung Weight,\plain\fs20 (real), (units kg), (default 0.0 kg)
|
|
\par Defines the amount of the total vehicle mass that is considered to be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 sprung\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . This value is only used as part of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Ride Height\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 options, where it is also prompted for.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Enhanced Visibility,\plain\fs20 (On/Off switch), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Control the visibility in the graphics display of the C of G symbol.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up #}
|
|
\b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Graphical Element Properties
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par A large number of different graphical element types are available within LSA from simple lines joining two points through cylinders, spheres, planes and facets. Each of these sections then have individual sub-sections having options on how to define the particular graphic group. Because of this the data entry when editing a graphical element varies considerably depending on the particular section and sub-section that the graphical element belongs to.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Whilst the editing of graphical element properties can be via the template editor, it is more intuitive to do so through the 3d graphical interface by picking the particular graphical element directly. Each graphical element has a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hot spot\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 adjacent to which is where it must be selected. To identify the hot spot use the status bar at the bottom of the display, which will list a description of the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 in range\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 element, hard point or other \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 pickable\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 feature.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Obviously if an element is not visible it cannot be picked. Refer to the individual visibility switch menu\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s \i Graphics / Enhanced Visibility\plain\fs20 or use the tree structure set up menu \i SetUp / Graphics Switches Menu Tree\plain\fs20 . The other potential issue when trying to pick a graphical element is that its \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 picking\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option may have been turned \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 off\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . This is sometimes done to make selecting important features such as hard points easier by turning off the pickabilty of some of the more mundane graphical element types. To check the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 pick\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 status of an element type refer to \i Graphics / Pick Visibility\plain\fs20 or the setup box \i SetUp / Graphics Switches Menu Tree\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The graphical element groups are; Line, Cylinder, Circle, Sphere, Facet, Plane, Distance, Components and Angle. Each of the graphical type sub-sections are discussed under the specific menu section and the relevant \uldb overview\plain\fs20 section.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm311.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing a Graphical Elements Properties
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A general description of the graphical element properties is given below, (note that when in the graphical edit display you can use the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 page-up\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 page-down\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 keys to move through the graphical elements in the model. The dialogue title bar will indicate the current position and how many are in the model for the selected corner/end.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Graphics Colour,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default varies)
|
|
\par Sets the graphics colour for the individual graphical element. Select from the presented choices.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Label,\plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default blank)
|
|
\par Sets the Label for the individual graphical element. This is used in menu to aid identifying individual graphical elements of the same type from each other.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Individual graphical element types will require up to four points to define them, un-required points will be \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 greyed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 out.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point 1,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default set by pick)
|
|
\par Defines the first point associated with this graphical element. Select from available points.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Point 2,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default set by pick)
|
|
\par Defines the second point associated with this graphical element. Select from available points. Only required for some types.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point 3,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default set by pick)
|
|
\par Defines the third point associated with this graphical element. Select from available points. Only required for some types.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point 4,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default set by pick)
|
|
\par Defines the fourth point associated with this graphical element. Select from available points. Only required for some types.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The next two options will be optionally available depending on not only the specific graphic element type but also the particular points being used. If a hard point is at the connection between two parts, you can choose which of the parts you want the graphic to be associated with. In kinematic mode it makes no difference which part is selected because the two parts are rigidly connected together however in compliance mode you have relative displacement between parts and hence the graphic point will move in relation to the selected part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b P1 Part Position,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default set to first)
|
|
\par Optionally defines the part that the first point is associated with. Some points may not have a choice since they may not be at a connection between two parts.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b P2 Part Position,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default set to first)
|
|
\par Optionally defines the part that the second point is associated with. Some points may not have a choice since they may not be at a connection between two parts.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard The next properties, up to a maximum of six, vary in number and variable with each particular graphic type, some of the specifics are discussed below;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b P1 Global X Offset,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.0 mm)
|
|
\par Defines a global X offset for end 1 of the graphical element from its first point. Similar entries are available for Y and Z.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b P2 Global X Offset,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.0 mm)
|
|
\par Defines a global X offset for end 2 of the graphical element from its second point. Similar entries are available for Y and Z.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b No. of Decimal Points,\plain\fs20 (int), (units -), (default 0=use default)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points to be used for this graphical element when displaying its value or values. Note that 0 implies use the default settings which for this element type may not be zero, (likely to be three decimal points). To force a zero number of decimal points set the number of decimal points to a negative value.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Radius,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 35.0 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the radius used for some circle and spherical graphical elements.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Length,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 15.0 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the length property for some line, vector and plane graphical elements.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b X Vector,\plain\fs20 (real), (units -), (default 0.0)
|
|
\par For vector lines sets the X component of the vector. Similar entries are given for the Y and Z components of the vector.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Bump Stop Data
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par Bump stops can be optionally included in the model. To add them to your model you will need to pick the two points (on two different parts) that represent the line of action of the bump stop. Note that the points represent the line of action and not the actual position of the two ends. The line of action and the distance defined by the two points is taken as the characteristic start length. Bump stop mechanical properties are then defined as a function force versus the change in length from this characteristic length.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Bump stop properties can thus be split into two sections, the graphical appearance and the mechanical properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm312.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Graphical Appearance of the Bump Stop Element
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The graphical properties are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Static Colour,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default dark brown)
|
|
\par Defines the colour of the bump stop at the static position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Incremental Colour,\plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default light brown)
|
|
\par Defines the colour of the bump stop at any position other than the static case.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Cone Upper Diameter,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 60.0 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the diameter of the upper end of the cone graphic used to visually represent the bump stop element.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Cone Lower Diameter,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 20.0 mm)
|
|
\par Defines the diameter of the lower end of the cone graphic used to visually represent the bump stop element. Note that the graphic will change this diameter as the bump stop starts to become compressed. This diameter change is purely a visual representation of the compression action and does not imply any mechanical or force property.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Radial Facets,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 10)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the number of facets used around the radius for the graphical drawing of this element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Length Facets,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 5)
|
|
\par Defines the number of facets used along the length for the graphical drawing of this element.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The mechanical properties for the bump stop are accessed by selecting the icon adjacent to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Edit Properties\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 label. The mechanical properties for the bump stop are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The bump stop is defined as a force (N) against distance (mm). Where the X-axis is the distance and the Y-axis is force. To allow for the clearance effect set the force over the initial displacement to be zero and only ramp to a positive value once the bump stop becomes compressed. You can also use a bump stop to represent a rebound stop. Simply define \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve forces at the required \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 ve travel values. Remember that the X distance values are the change in length between the two bump stop points, not the vertical height change of the wheel.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm313.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Mechanical properties of the Bump Stop Element
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Remember that bump stops are optionally included in the solution. So whilst they might be visible in the model and have associated mechanical properties their effect on the compliant forces could still be disabled. Check the status of menu options \i Solve / Suspension Bump Stop Preload\plain\fs20 and \i Solve / Suspension Bump Stop Rate\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \i Note: For non-linear bump stops, some resultant forces calculated using the user defined bump stop curve, will be incorrect if the compliant displacements are \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'91\f1 large\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\f1 . This is due to the compliant solver linearizing the rate at a certain kinematic position, to compute the force it will apply to the system. Once this force is applied, the compliant displacement if large will change the kinematic position, leading to a new operating point of the bump stop (thus rate change), which is not taken into account to find a new bump stop force. To reduce this effect set the tyre vertical rate to a high value to stop the large displacements.\plain\f0\i\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Data Requirements \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Local Co-ordinate Systems
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The default method used to define the position of hard point is the global co-ordinate system. Local co-ordinates systems can be optionally used to define the initial definition position of hard points.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The method for changing a point from using the global co-ordinate system to a local system is, first create the required co-ordinate system then edit the point and switch the points definition co-ordinate system to this new local system.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To create a local co-ordinate system open the dialogue box, \i Data / Coordinates / Local Coordinate Systems\'85\plain\fs20 The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 add\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 button will index the number of co-ordinates systems and allow the definition of this new axis set. The properties for defining a local axis system are listed below;
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm314.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the properties of a local co-ordinate system
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Label,\plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default blank)
|
|
\par Defines the co-ordinate systems label that will be used in the relevant menus.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par A co-ordinate system is defined by an origin position, a point on an axis and a point in an appropriate plane. By the use of vector cross products these positions produce the final three axis directions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Origin Coordinates,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.0,0.0,0.0)
|
|
\par The origin co-ordinates can either be defined directly as a global position in x, y and z, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Pos\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Position\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ).
|
|
\par \pard The second option is to define the origin as being the position of an existing hard point, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Pnt\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Point\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ).
|
|
\par The third option is a combination of a hard point position and a global offset from this position, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Rel\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ). In this option the defined global offsets are applied to the selected points position to arrive at the net origin position.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Point on Local Axis,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.0,0.0,0.0)
|
|
\par First set the axis that will be defined by this point, from either the X, Y or Z axes.
|
|
\par The axis point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s co-ordinates can either be defined directly as a global position in x, y and z, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Pos\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Position\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ).
|
|
\par The second option is to define the axis point as being the position of an existing hard point, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Pnt\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Point\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ).
|
|
\par \pard The third option is a combination of a hard point position and a global offset from this position, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Rel\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ). In this option the defined global offsets are applied to the selected points position to arrive at the net axis point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point in Local Plane,\plain\fs20 (real), (units mm), (default 0.0,0.0,0.0)
|
|
\par First set the plane that will be defined by this point, from either the X-Y, X-Z, Y-Z or X-Z planes.
|
|
\par \pard The plane point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s co-ordinates can either be defined directly as a global position in x, y and z, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Pos\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Position\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ).
|
|
\par The second option is to define the plane point as being the position of an existing hard point, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Pnt\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Point\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ).
|
|
\par The third option is a combination of a hard point position and a global offset from this position, this is the \plain\f0\b\fs20 \'91\f1 Rel\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 option, (abbreviation of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Relative\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 ). In this option the defined global offsets are applied to the selected points position to arrive at the net plane point position.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm315.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example screen shot of local co-ordinate system
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par When a point is switched from one co-ordinate system to another its local co-ordinates are re-calculated in the new co-ordinate system so that no change in absolute position is implied by the change. This is to retain model stability during the transition/redefinition process.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par All created co-ordinates systems and their associated definition points can be edited joggled and dragged in the same way as all the other graphical points. Obviously if you change a co-ordinate systems position or orientation any points defined in the is system will have their position modified by this change.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Once a point is switched to being defined by a local co-ordinate system its position in all the editing activities are displayed for this local system. You can continue to drag or joggle it in the normal way. In any results displays (including the status bar) its position will still be listed as in the global axis system.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm316.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing a points definition co-ordinate system, selection highlighted
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par This section describes the results variables listed by individual section. For details see sub sections;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 2D Results
|
|
\par 3D Suspension Derivatives File
|
|
\par 3D Points Listing
|
|
\par 3D Compliance Coefficients
|
|
\par 3D Bush Deflections
|
|
\par 3D Joint/Bush Rotations
|
|
\par 3D Bush Forces
|
|
\par AVI File Writer
|
|
\par Unsprung Corner Weights
|
|
\par 3D Formatted Point Forces
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 2D Results
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 2D results are a reduced set of the 3D derivatives list. The 2D results are normally only viewed through the graphs.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The 2D suspension calculated derivatives for bump/rebound articulations are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
|
|
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
|
|
\par 3) Track Change
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Whilst for 2D roll articulation the calculated derivatives are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 1) Camber Angle
|
|
\par 2) Roll Centre Height
|
|
\par 3) Roll Centre Lateral
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm317.bmp\}
|
|
\par Typical 2D Results plot
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Suspension Derivatives File
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The Suspension Derivatives Files (SDF) contains a complete textual listing of the suspension model hard points, calculated static ride values and suspension derivatives varying with each articulation type.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par For a definition of each suspension derivative see the Theory section.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The SDF file by default contains the following. Because users can \uldb customize\plain\fs20 the display to create multiple \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 reports, the actual display may be significantly different:
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Listing of input Suspension Hard Points:
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab Listing depends on suspension type
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Static Values:
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Camber angle (deg):\plain\fs20 Static wheel camber angle
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Toe Angle (SAE) (deg)\plain\fs20 : Static toe angle, (+ve toe in)
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Toe Angle (Plane of Wheel) (deg):\plain\fs20 Static toe angle, (+ve toe in)
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Castor Angle (deg):\plain\fs20 Static Castor angle.
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Castor Trail (Hub Trail) (mm):\plain\fs20 Static Castor trail.
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Castor Offset (mm):\plain\fs20 Static Castor offset
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Kingpin Angle (deg):\plain\fs20 Static Kingpin angle.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \cf1 Kingpin Offset (at wheel) (mm):\plain\fs20 Static Kingpin offset at the wheel centre.
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm):\plain\fs20 Static kingpin offset at the ground plane.
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Mechanical Trail (mm):\plain\fs20 Static Mechanical trail.
|
|
\par \tab \cf1 Roll Centre Height (mm):\plain\fs20 Static Roll Centre Height
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Derivatives listed for Bump and Rebound Travel:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Camber angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Toe Angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Castor Angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Kingpin angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Ratio
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Ratio
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Anti Dive (%)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Anti Squat (%)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Height to Body (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Height to Ground (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Half Track Change (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Wheelbase change (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Travel (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Travel (mm)\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Derivatives listed for Roll Articulation:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Camber angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Toe Angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Castor Angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Kingpin angle (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Ratio
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Ratio
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Position X (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Position Y (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Roll Centre Position Z (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Half Track Change (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Wheelbase change (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Damper Travel (mm)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Spring Travel (mm)\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Derivatives listed for Steer Articulation:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 \cf1 Toe Angle (inner) (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Toe Angle (outer) (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Camber angle (inner) (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Camber Angle (outer) (deg)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Ackermann (%)
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355 Turning Circle Radius (mm)\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm318.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Sample Section of the Suspension Derivative File (SDF) listing
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Points Listing
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The suspension hard points can be listed at any user-defined combination of bump and steering travel.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm319.bmp\}
|
|
\par Setting the Articulation Position for Points Listing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The point listing display is different depending whether the solver is currently in kinematic or compliant mode. In kinematic mode the Hard point co-ordinates are listed for each hard point for both left and right hand wheels of each axle. Values listed are the X, Y and Z co-ordinates in the global co-ordinate system.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm320.bmp\}
|
|
\par Kinematic Point Listing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par In the compliant mode the Kinematic hard point listing is supplemented at each increment by the inclusion of the compliant hard point positions of each part at the joint. The difference between the kinematic hard point and each compliant parts position at the joint is also listed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm321.bmp\}
|
|
\par Compliant Point Listing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par All dimensions and deflections are listed in the global Cartesian co-ordinates system, with units of mm.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par In addition to points being listed at a user-defined position two other options are available. These are list the co-ordinates of all the points for a selected corner and current calculation position, or list the co-ordinates of a selected single point for all the current calculation positions.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm322.bmp\}
|
|
\par Point Listing for Single Point at All Positions - bump travel shown
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Compliance Coefficients
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D compliance coefficients display summarizes the compliant performance of the suspension under a number of defined force sets. Each load case is represented by a series of Vertical bars, each bar being a user selected suspension derivative. The height of the bar is referred to as compliance co-efficient. The displayed co-efficient is the difference between kinematic model and the compliant model, for the selected suspension parameter.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The sign reflects the direction of the change in the suspension parameter, i.e. a co-efficient of \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 0.1 for camber indicates that the camber angle has an increase in negative camber of 0.1 due to the bush compliances under this external load set.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Compliance co-efficients are calculated for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ride\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 condition only, (tip, to view at an alternative position, use the Set Ride Height function).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm323.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example 3D Compliance Coefficients Display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Bush Deflections
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D bush deflections listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated deflections are listed for each bushed suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush deflections are listed for the currently displayed external force set and suspension spring setting. Only hard point that are \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 bushed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 will appear in the list. The deflection is the difference between the kinematic position and the compliant position. Note the sign of the deflections is a function of which part is considered to move relative to what. If in doubt check the deformed geometry plot to identify relative sign.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Points are listed labeled by template point No.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Results Given are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DX Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush deflection component in the global X-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DY Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush deflection component in the global Y-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DZ Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush deflection component in the global Z-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DX Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush deflection component in the local X-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DY Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush deflection component in the local Y-axis.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 DZ Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush deflection component in the local Z-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm324.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example 3D Bush Deflections Listing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Joint/Bush Rotations
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D joint/bush rotations listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated rotations are listed for each suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush rotations are the kinematic values that are used to determine bush pre-loads when included. The extra rotations due to compliance are not listed.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Points are listed labeled by template point No.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Results Given are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DX Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global X-axis.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 DY Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global Y-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DZ Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global Z-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DX Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local X-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DY Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local Y-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 DZ Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local Z-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm325.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example 3D Joint/Bush Rotations Listing
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Bush Forces
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The 3D bush forces listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated forces are listed for each suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush forces are listed for the currently displayed external force set and suspension spring setting. Each hard point is listed irrespective of whether set as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 bushed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Points are listed labeled by template point No.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Results Given are;
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \cf1 FX Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush force component in the global X-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 FY Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush force component in the global Y-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 FZ Global, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush force component in the global Z-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 FX Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush force component in the local X-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 FY Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush force component in the local Y-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \cf1 FZ Local, (N):\plain\fs20 Lists the bush force component in the local Z-axis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm326.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example 3D Bush Forces Listing
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 AVI File Writer
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par The graphics display animation sequences can be saved to a file. Currently only AVI format is supported, and without compression. A number of options are presented to make creating AVI files a simple task. Files can be created based on a the current motion sequence, i.e. bump, roll, steering or combined, or via a sequence of user selected images.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm327.bmp\}
|
|
\par AVI File Writer Dialogue Box
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The top portion of the display identifies whether the AVI file is to be created from the 'Current Motion Sequence' or from a series of 'Stills'. If using the Current motion sequence option, simply select the 'Write File' option to identify the file name/location to save the AVI file too. The AVI file is then generated.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To create an AVI from a sequence of stills set the option to 'create from stills' then select the 'start' button. This will enable the 'Grab' button and zero the 'frames' counter. You can now set the required graphics view and then 'grab' it. Repeat this process until you have grabbed all required frames and then select 'End' to indicate the end of the grab sequence and enable the 'Save File\'85' option. Notice that grabbed images can be viewed as an editable list for a limited amount sorting, editing and deletion prior to writing the file.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm328.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the 'Grabbed' Stills list
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Within the stills list display users can view individual frames for editing. The application used to do this is identified in the 'BMP use' option at the bottom of the main AVI file writer dialogue.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Both the AVI sequence writer option and the stills grabber option can be either for the complete graphics screen or a selected area. The screen area is defined via clip rectangle the settings for which can either be entered directly or picked via the mouse. A switch is provided to optionally show the clip region on the graphics screen.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm329.bmp\}
|
|
\par Screen Clip Area Selected
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par By default the AVI file will include a single copy of the sequence. The user can change the number of cycles that are written to the AVI file. In the case of a user picked sequence of stills they would be repeated n cycle times. The replay rate of the AVI file is set by default to replay at a rate of 10 frames/sec. The user can change this setting prior to creating the file.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par A second file write option is provided principally for user grabbed sequences to append the grabbed stills but in reverse order to the AVI file. This then provides a smooth animation sequence from start to end and back to start again when looping through, without having to pick a full sequence.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The AVI file can be viewed automatically after writing by having the 'Open AVI in viewer after Write/Save' option checked. The AVI will be viewed using the application identified in the Windows registry as being the default AVI file viewer. This can be specified directly by the user through 'AVI Use'; setting.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Unsprung Corner Weights
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par In compliance mode if the part mass properties are correctly defined, (mass and position), the unsprung corner weights can be calculated by applying a gravity force and determining the change in force in the tyre vertical force. This is performed automatically using the \i Results / Unsprung Corner Weights\plain\fs20 menu option.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm330.bmp\}
|
|
\par Unsprung Corner Weight Results Display
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The option is given to locally access and edit the current parts mass property. If you change a part mass property use the update button to refresh the calculation.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Full access to the parts mass \uldb properties\plain\fs20 is through the \i Data / Mass Data / C of G Properties\plain\fs20 . Alternatively the properties can be accessed by picking the relevant C of G symbol. These are only visible in compliant mode and are subject to their own individual visibility switch, \i Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Marker\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Results Description \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 3D Formatted Point Forces
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par In addition to the standard \uldb bush forces\plain\fs20 results display, the user can create a line by line formatted point force display. The display is a defined mixture of tables, columns and lines. Thus you define how many tables, for each table how many columns and the column properties, finally the no of lines and the properties of each line.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm331.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example formatted point forces screen shot
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The format settings are stored under a specific slot number, (0-25). Each setting is editable and saved to the INI file. To edit an individual setting change the display to the required slot, \i Setting / Select required No.\plain\fs20 and then use the local menu \i Display / Edit Current Settings\plain\fs20 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Each property is discussed below.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Label,\plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default blank)
|
|
\par Defines the label used to identify the setting in any relevant menu entry or dialogue box heading.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b No. of Tables,\plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Sets the number of separate tables to include for the current setting, (maximum 10).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par
|
|
\par At the top of the display before the first table is an optional header. The visibility for this header is made up of five individual parts.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Data Echo, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a copy of the defined hard point coordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Time / Date, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par \pard Optionally includes the time a date that the display was produced.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Analysis Type, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a text line that identifies the motion type used for the analysis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Corner, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a text line that the corner/end that the results are displayed for.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Template Type, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a text line that identifies the template type of the corner/end used in the model for these results.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The following properties are defined for each individual table;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Table Heading,\plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default blank)
|
|
\par Defines the string used as a heading for the table.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Columns, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Defines the number of columns used for the table. Each columns represents a potential location to list a results. Note that columns can be left empty to aid visual appearance and readability.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Column Size, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 10)
|
|
\par \pard Defines the character width used for each column. Each column has to use the same width so set this to be as wide as is required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Col. Header Lines, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 4)
|
|
\par Sets the number of lines used for the header of the columns. Column header strings are clipped to the defined width and then split on to the next line of the column header. Column header labels are taken from the columns parameter description.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Lines, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the number of results lines to be used in the table. Each line can be individually controlled in terms of point and force type, whilst the column controls which load case to be used.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Comment Size, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Each line has an optional comment string added to the front of the line. This sets the space allocated for the comment as a maximum number of character spacings. Comments that are longer than this will be clipped to length.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard The following properties are defined for each individual column;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Load Case, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default User Definable Default Set)
|
|
\par Sets the load case to use for each particular column. Selection is made from the available defined sets.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Decimal Points, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Sets the number of decimal points used for each column.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The following properties are defined for each individual line;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b End, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default none)
|
|
\par \pard Sets the suspension end to use for the specific line.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Point, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default not set)
|
|
\par Sets the hard point to use from the current \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ends\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 list. The list also includes the Tyres, Springs and Bump Stops.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Force, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default not set)
|
|
\par Identifies the force to use for this Line, Select from Local x, y and Z, Global x, y and z or the resultant.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Articulation, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default As Set)
|
|
\par \pard Set which displacement module to use, from \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 As Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , bump/rebound, roll or steering. \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 As Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies the current selected articulation mode.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Position, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default no set)
|
|
\par Set which position for the selected displacement mode to use. This list will be a function of the currently selected displacement in the preceding column.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Comment, \plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default none)
|
|
\par Define the optional comment for a line. Comments are placed at the beginning of the line in the space defined in the earlier \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 comment size\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 setting.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm332.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the Format settings
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 How To \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Customize SDF Display Settings
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \b Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \f1 With the Formatted SDF results users have full format control over both the values displayed and the layout format, each format is stored in a numbered and labelled slot. The first four slots 0,1,2 and 3 have a hard coded format setting, these can be overwritten by settings in the INI file, that relate to each of the four default displacement modes. The four hard-coded format settings are set up to mimic the original fixed format version outputs of each displacement mode.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Each format slot is selected via the local \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Setting\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 menu. This lists the available format settings. Note that by default empty undefined slots are labelled as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Not Defined\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . A local switch independent of the format controls which end(s) are plotted.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To change the setting of a format set, first via the \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'91\f1 Setting\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 menu select the required format slot number. Now open the format editor via the local \i Display / Edit Current Setting\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'92\plain\fs20 menu.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Each setting display is made up a number of tables, each table having a defined number of columns. Each column then has its own definition of variable and display properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm333.bmp\}
|
|
\par Editing the SDF Display Format
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The properties used within each individual \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 setting\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Label, \plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Not Defined\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 )
|
|
\par Sets the label used to identify each individual setting. This is used in any relevant menus and dialogue box titles.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Tables, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Defines how many tables are to be used to create this settings display. Each table will have its own column properties.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par At the top of the display before the first table is an optional header. The visibility for this header is made up of five individual parts.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Data Echo, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a copy of the defined hard point coordinates.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Time / Date, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes the time a date that the display was produced.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Analysis Type, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a text line that identifies the motion type used for the analysis.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Corner, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a text line that the corner/end that the results are displayed for.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Template Type, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default On)
|
|
\par Optionally includes a text line that identifies the template type of the corner/end used in the model for these results.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The following properties are defined for each individual table;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Table Heading, \plain\fs20 (string), (units -), (default blank)
|
|
\par Defines the text string displayed above the table.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Columns, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Defines the number of columns used for the table. Each columns represents a potential location to list a results. Note that columns can be left empty to aid visual appearance and readability.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Column Size, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 10)
|
|
\par Defines the character width used for each column. Each column has to use the same width so set this to be as wide as is required.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b No. of Col. Header Lines, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 4)
|
|
\par Sets the number of lines used for the header of the columns. Column header strings are clipped to the defined width and then split on to the next line of the column header. Column header labels are taken from the columns parameter description.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The following properties are defined for each individual column;
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Source, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Not Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 )
|
|
\par Defines the origin type of the parameters list to be used for the data source. Options are, \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Not Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Std. SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Front Graphic\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rear Graphic\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 User SDF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Parameter, \plain\fs20 (choice), (units -), (default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Not Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 )
|
|
\par Defines the specific parameter to use in the column. The contents of the list depends on the setting used for the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Source\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 variable above.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Decimal Points, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default 0)
|
|
\par Defines the number of decimal points used in the listing of the columns variable.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Corner, \plain\fs20 (integer), (units -), (default As Set)
|
|
\par Specifies which corner is listed in the column. The default option of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 As Set\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 implies that the values will be for the prescribed corner. The options of \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 1, +1, +2 and +3 allow you to generate a display that lists in adjacent columns the parameter for both left and right hand wheel, or indeed all four wheels.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 How To \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Create User Defined Results
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \b Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \f1 User defined results allows users to create their own specific analysis results but building equations that can use combinations of standard results, calculated forces, point displacements, mathematical operators and standard parameters. These user defined results are then available to plotted and listed in the same way as the standard results. User defined results can also be used in the equation for another user defined results.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The equations are built up in a character string that uses a simplified Fortran language style. Within these strings existing results and point positions are identified by a combination of the square brackets \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 [\plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ]\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 together with a standard sequence of characters. Thus the use of square brackets in any implementation of the user language should be avoided.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par The standard results that can be used within user results are given in eighteen different sections. Whilst you don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t need to type these in yourself as you can use the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 insert\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 buttons supplied.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Standard SDF\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 s\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the standard SDF string, i.e. [Camber angle], for the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [Camber Angle0].
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b User SDF\plain\f0\b\fs20 \'92\f1 s\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the user SDF string with a preceding \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 U\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , i.e. [Umysdf], for the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [Umysdf0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Pnt by Label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the points long label. You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [Lower wishbone front pivotX] for the x co-ordinate of the point or [Lower wishbone front pivotV] for the vector position of the point. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [Lower wishbone front pivotX0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Rear Pnt by Label\plain\fs20 , (this is identical in form to the preceding section), identified by square brackets and the points long label. You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [Lower wishbone front pivotX] for the x co-ordinate of the point or [Lower wishbone front pivotV] for the vector position of the point. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [Lower wishbone front pivotX0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Pnt by No.\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s position in the template, (note this is not the same as the numeric short string, see later sections). You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [frontP1X] for the x co-ordinate of the point or [frontP1V] for the vector position of the point. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [frontP1X0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Rear Pnt by No.\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s position in the template, (note this is not the same as the numeric short string, see later sections). You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [rearP1X] for the x co-ordinate of the point or [rearP1V] for the vector position of the point. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [rearP1X0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Pnt by Short Label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the points short label. You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [frontS1X] for the x co-ordinate of the point or [frontS1V] for the vector position of the point. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [frontS1X0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Rear Pnt by Short Label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the points short label. You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [rearS1X] for the x co-ordinate of the point or [rearS1V] for the vector position of the point. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [rearS1X0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Graphic\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets a simple \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 frontG\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and the graphics number. Only one property is assumed available for each graphical element, it normally being a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 distance\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , a typical entry would look like [frontG3], whilst the for the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [frontG30]. Some care may need to taken when trying to use the extra \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 for static since this may also imply an alternative graphic position, i.e. graphic 10 and graphic 1 static.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Rear Graphic\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets a simple \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rearG\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and the graphics number. Only one property is assumed available for each graphical element, it normally being a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 distance\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , a typical entry would look like [rearG2], whilst the for the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [rearG20]. Some care may need to taken when trying to use the extra \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 for static since this may also imply an alternative graphic position, i.e. graphic 10 and graphic 1 static.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front force by label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets, the points long label and either FX, FY, FZ or FR, for the x, y, z, or resultant force at the specified point, i.e. [Lower Wishbone Front PivotFX]. No static value option is currently supported.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear force by label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets, the points long label and either FX, FY, FZ or FR, for the x, y, z, or resultant force at the specified point, i.e. [Lower Wishbone Front PivotFX]. No static value option is currently supported. Note that this method does not specifically define a front or rear suspension. It is implied by the point label itself and relies on it only being found in the required ends template. If you are using the same template for both ends you cannot use this non-end specific method unless it can also be applied to the front. Instead use one the following methods. No static value option is currently supported.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Force by No.\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s position in the template, (note this is not the same as the numeric short string, see later sections). You identify either an individual force component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FX\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FY\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FZ\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 characters or an \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FR\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the resultant force, i.e. [frontP1FX] for the x force of the point or [frontP1FR] for the resultant force at the point. No static value option is currently supported.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Rear Force by No.\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s position in the template, (note this is not the same as the numeric short string, see later sections). You identify either an individual force component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FX\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FY\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FZ\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 characters or an \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FR\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the resultant force, i.e. [rearP1FX] for the x force of the point or [rearP1FR] for the resultant force at the point. No static value option is currently supported.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Force by Short Label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the points short label. You identify either an individual force component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FX\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FY\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FZ\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 characters or an \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FR\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the resultant force, i.e. [frontS1FX] for the x component force or [frontS1FR] for the resultant force at the point. No static value option is currently supported.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Rear Force by Short Label\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets and the points short label. You identify either an individual force component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FX\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FY\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FZ\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 characters or an \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 FR\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the resultant force, i.e. [rearS1FX] for the x component force or [rearS1FR] for the resultant force at the point. No static value option is currently supported.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Front Pnt by Type.\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets a preceding \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 T\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and a specific point type label, (note this type label does not directly imply end so can be applied to both front and rear). You identify either an individual component by appending the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 X\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Y\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Z\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 character or a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 V\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 if you want to use the point within a vector equation, i.e. [TWheel centreX] for the x co-ordinate of the wheel centre or [Twheel centreV] for the vector position of the wheel centre. For the static value append a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 0\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 within the last square bracket, i.e. [Twheel centreX0].
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \b Parameters\plain\fs20 , identified by square brackets a preceding \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 P\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and the parameter description string, i.e. [Pbump Travel (mm)]. You can also use the parameter number, i.e. [P1]. Currently 30 parameters are available, (see below);
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \tab 1 Bump Travel (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 2 Rebound Travel (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 3 Bump Rebound Increment (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 4 Roll Angle (deg)
|
|
\par \tab 5 Roll Increment (deg)
|
|
\par \tab 6 Steer Travel (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 7 Steer Increment (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 8 Wheelbase (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 9 C of G Height (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 10 Braking Front (%)
|
|
\par \tab 11 Drive Front (%)
|
|
\par \tab 12 Total Weight Front (%)
|
|
\par \tab 13 Front Brake Type (1 = Inboard 2 = Outboard)
|
|
\par \tab 14 Rear Brake Type (1 = Inboard 2 = Outboard)
|
|
\par \tab 15 Total Sprung Weight (kg)
|
|
\par \tab 16 Front Type (1 = Independent 2 = Rigid )
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \tab 17 Rear Type (1 = Independent 2 = Rigid )
|
|
\par \tab 18 Drive Shaft Joint (Tulip) Radius (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 19 Rack Pinon Gear Radius (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 20 Tyre Rolling Radius (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 21 Tyre Width (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 22 Tyre Vertical Stiffness (N/mm)
|
|
\par \tab 23 Spring 1 Rate (N/mm)
|
|
\par \tab 24 Spring 1 Free Length (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 25 Spring 1 Fitted Length (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 26 Spring 2 Rate (N/mm)
|
|
\par \tab 27 Spring 2 Free Length (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 28 Spring 2 Fitted Length (mm)
|
|
\par \tab 29 Damper 1 Rate (N.s/mm)
|
|
\par \tab 30 Damper 2 Rate (N.s/mm)
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Available maths functions are given in the right hand selection box. To include into the function string at the currently selected position select the required function from the right hand box and select the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Insert Func\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 .
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The supporting maths functions in the user SDF' are;
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 - \tab Subtract two numbers, as in A - B
|
|
\par * \tab Multiply two numbers, as in A * B
|
|
\par **\tab Raise to the power of , as in A**2
|
|
\par /\tab Divide two numbers, as in A / B
|
|
\par +\tab Add two numbers, as in A + B
|
|
\par ABS\tab Returns the absolute value, as in ABS(A)
|
|
\par ACOS\tab Returns the arc cosine of an angle with the returned angle in radians, as in ACOS(A)
|
|
\par ACOSD\tab Returns the arc cosine of an angle with the returned angle in degrees, as in ACOSD(A)
|
|
\par ASIN\tab Returns the arc sine of an angle with the returned angle in radians, as in ASIN(A)
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 ASIND\tab Returns the arc sine of an angle with the returned angle in degrees, as in ASIND(A)
|
|
\par ATAN\tab Returns the arc tan of an angle with the returned angle in radians, as in ATAN(A)
|
|
\par ATAND\tab Returns the arc tan of an angle with the returned angle in degrees, as in ATAND(A)
|
|
\par COS\tab Returns the cosine of an angle with the angle in radians, as in COS(A)
|
|
\par COSD\tab Returns the cosine of an angle with the angle in degrees, as in COSD(A)
|
|
\par COSH\tab Returns the hyperbolic cosine of an angle with the angle in radians, as in COSH(A)
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 EXP\tab Returns the exponential, as in EXP(A)
|
|
\par INT\tab Returns integer of argument, as in INT(A)
|
|
\par LOG\tab Returns natural logarithm, as in LOG(A)
|
|
\par LOG10\tab Returns common logarithm to base 10, as in LOG10(A)
|
|
\par NINT\tab Returns nearest integer of the argument, as in NINT(A)
|
|
\par REAL\tab Returns real number for integer argument, as in REAL(A)
|
|
\par SIN\tab Returns the sine of an angle with the angle in radians, as in SIN(A)
|
|
\par SIND\tab Returns the sine of an angle with the angle in degrees, as in SIND(A)
|
|
\par SINH\tab Returns the hyperbolic sine of an angle with the angle in radians, as in SINH(A)
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 SQRT\tab Returns the square root of the argument, as in SQRT(A)
|
|
\par TAN\tab Returns the tan of an angle with the angle in radians, as in TAN(A)
|
|
\par TAND\tab Returns the tan of an angle with the angle in degrees, as in TAND(A)
|
|
\par TANH\tab Returns the hyperbolic tan of an angle with the angle in radians, as in TANH(A)
|
|
\par VCROSS Returns as a vector the cross product of two vector arguments, as in VCROSS(vA,vB)
|
|
\par VDOT Returns as a scalar the dot product of two vector arguments, as in VDOT(vA,vB)
|
|
\par VMAG Returns as a scalar the magnitude of a vector argument, as in VMAG(vA)
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 VNORM Returns a unitized vector of the vector argument, as in VNORM(vA)
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 All these individual point, force, parameter and maths function can be freely mixed to produce the required equation and result. Some simple examples are given below to illustrate the points;
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 The ratio of castor angle to kingpin angle;
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \cf1 [Castor Angle]/[Kingpin Angle]
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 The castor angle change;
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \cf1 [Castor Angle]-[Castor Angle0]
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 The distance between two points (note extensive use of ABS to ensure stability);
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \cf1 SQRT( (ABS([frontP3X]-[frontP5X]))**2.0
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 + (ABS([frontP3Y]-[frontP5Y]))**2.0
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 + (ABS([frontP3Z]-[frontP5Z]))**2.0 )\plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 (as a test you can compare this against a graphical plot of the distance between two points added as a graphical)
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 The ratio of the X force to the resultant force at a point.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \cf1 [Lower wishbone front pivotFX]/[Lower wishbone front pivotFR]
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 Using an earlier user function (No. 1) in a later user function
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \cf1 2.0*[U1]*COSD([Camber Angle])
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 How To \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Use Controls
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \ul Implementation of Simple Position/Link Length control elements to Shark
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \ul Objective:\plain\fs20 To allow the user to define a kinematic suspension model that can have either/or moving hard point(s) and changing link length(s). These changes to occur as a function of a measured displacement(s). This model change is applied automatically by the software as part of its solution iteration.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \ul Implementation:\plain\fs20 The required displacements are identified. Each 'displacement transducer' is defined by its two end points. Additional points can/may need to be added to a template to represent the desired transducer positions. The desired variable length links are 'tagged', being identified by their two end points. The desired moving hard points are marked, and their translating direction identified by global vector components, (dx,dy,dz).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm334.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example screen shot showing transducer and actuator
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par A spline is used to equate the change in transducer length to the change in link length, or change in hard point position. The spline can be interactively edited to review the change in the spline data has on displayed SDF graphs. The spline data would be of the form, x-axis is change in transducer length from static, y-axis enforced change in link length or point position.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm335.bmp\}
|
|
\par Example Screen Shot of Spline Editor
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Definition of Suspension Derivatives
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \b Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 A large number of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 suspension derivatives\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 are calculated by \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 SHARK\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 , some are given at the static ride height only, whilst the variation with articulation is determined for others. The definition of these derivatives is given in this section and are based upon the SAE standard \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Vehicle Dynamics Terminology\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 SAE J670e. Where variations from this standard exist or where specific Lotus standards have been applied these will be identified. The units used together with the sign convention are also stated. The calculation formulae are given in terms of both the Shark co-ordinate system and point numbering system.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard \b Static Values
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Camber Angle, (deg)\plain\fs20
|
|
\par The inclination of the wheel plane to the vertical. It is considered positive when the wheel leans outward at the top and negative when it leans inward.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm336.bmp\}
|
|
\par Camber Angle Definition
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Toe Angle, SAE, (deg)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The static toe angle of a wheel at a specified wheel load or relative position of the wheel centre with respect to the sprung mass, is the angle between a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane and the road surface. The wheel is \plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 toed-in\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 if the forward portion of the wheel is turned towards a central longitudinal axis of the vehicle (+ve), and \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 toed-out\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 if turned away, (-ve).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Toe Angle, Plane of Wheel, (deg)\plain\fs20
|
|
\par This derivative is a Lotus definition which has the same units and sign convention as the SAE term, but instead of using the intersection of the wheel plane to the ground as the toe line, the angle is measured in the plane of the wheel.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm337.bmp\}
|
|
\par Toe Angle Definitions
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Castor Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in side elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis is inclined rearward (in the upward direction), and negative when the steering axis is inclined forward.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Castor Trail, hub trail, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The horizontal distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the wheel centre. The offset is considered positive when the wheel centre is forward of the steering axis and negative when it is rearward.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Castor Offset, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The distance in side elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground, and the centre of tyre contact. The offset is considered positive when the intersection point is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.\b
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm338.bmp\}
|
|
\par Castor Angle and Offset Definitions
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Kingpin Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in front elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis leans inwards at the top and negative when it leans out.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Kingpin offset, at wheel, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the wheel centre is the horizontal distance in front elevation from the wheel centre to the steering axis. It is considered positive when the wheel centre is outboard of the steering axis, (normal case), and negative if inboard.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Kingpin offset, at ground, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the ground is the horizontal distance in front elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground and the centre of the tyre contact. It is considered positive when the tyre contact is outboard of the steering axis intersection and negative if inboard.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Mechanical Trail, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The perpendicular distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the centre of tyre contact. It is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm339.bmp\}
|
|
\par Kingpin Angle and Offset Definitions
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Roll Centre Height, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. The calculation procedure uses a small bump step to define the tyre contact patch path, and allows a perpendicular plane to be constructed to this path at the current contact point. The intersection of this plane with either the other sides plane, (roll), or the vehicle centre line, (bump) defines the roll centre position.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm340.bmp\}
|
|
\par Roll Centre Height Definition
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard \b\cf3 Incremental Values, (Included in SDF formatted file)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Camber Angle, (deg)\plain\fs20\cf3
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The inclination of the wheel plane to the vertical. It is considered positive when the wheel leans outward at the top and negative when it leans inward.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Toe Angle, SAE, (deg)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The static toe angle of a wheel at a specified wheel load or relative position of the wheel centre with respect to the sprung mass, is the angle between a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane and the road surface. The wheel is \plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 toed-in\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 if the forward portion of the wheel is turned towards a central longitudinal axis of the vehicle (+ve), and \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 toed-out\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 if turned away, (-ve).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Toe Angle, Plane of Wheel, (deg)\plain\fs20
|
|
\par This derivative is a Lotus definition which has the same units and sign convention as the SAE term, but instead of using the intersection of the wheel plane to the ground as the toe line, the angle is measured in the plane of the wheel.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Castor Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in side elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis is inclined rearward (in the upward direction), and negative when the steering axis is inclined forward.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Kingpin Angle, (deg)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The angle in front elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis leans inwards at the top and negative when it leans out.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Damper Ratio
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio of change in the vertical height of the tyre contact centre and the change in length of the damper. It has no sign convention and would be greater than one when the change in vertical height of the wheel is more than the change in length of the damper. (Lotus definition).
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Spring Ratio
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio of change in the vertical height of the tyre contact centre and the change in length of the spring. It has no sign convention and would be greater than one when the change in vertical height of the wheel is more than the change in length of the spring. (Lotus definition).
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Anti Dive, (%)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio, given as a percentage, of the amount of the weight transfer under breaking that is reacted by the suspension geometry in resisting the body pitching motion. Thus 100% anti-dive results in no theoretical body pitching under braking. The construction technique relies on the suspension side view instantaneous centre being found and then further construction using brake split and vehicle c of g height. (Lotus Definition). Side view instantaneous centres (I.C.) are determined using small perturbation and projecting a normal to the path of the tyre contact point. Note that the origin point changes depending whether braking is inboard or outboard.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm341.bmp\}
|
|
\par % Anti-Dive Derivation
|
|
\par \pard \b
|
|
\par Anti Squat, (%)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio, given as a percentage, of the amount of the weight transfer under acceleration that is reacted by the suspension geometry in resisting the body pitching motion. Thus 100% anti-squat results in no theoretical body pitching under acceleration. The construction technique relies on the suspension side view instantaneous centre being found and then further construction using torque split and vehicle c of g height.. (Lotus Definition). Side view instantaneous centres (I.C.) are determined using small perturbation and projecting a normal to the path of the tyre contact point. The value is only applicable to axles with some portion of the drive load. Note that the origin position changes depending on whether the suspension is independent or not.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm342.bmp\}
|
|
\par % Anti-Squat Derivation \plain\f0\fs20 \'96\f1 4WD
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm343.bmp\}
|
|
\par % Anti-Squat Derivation - FWD
|
|
\par \pard \b
|
|
\par Roll Centre Height to Body, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the body origin. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Roll Centre Height to Ground, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 See full description above. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the ground origin. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Half Track Change, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The change in cross car co-ordinates from the static condition of the tyre contact centre. It is considered positive when the change is an increase the track and negative for a decrease in track. (Lotus definition).
|
|
\par \b
|
|
\par Wheelbase Change, (mm)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20 The change in fore/aft car co-ordinates from the static condition of the tyre contact centre. It is considered positive when the change is an increase in the wheelbase and negative for a decrease in wheelbase. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Damper Travel, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The change in distance from the static condition between the two points defining the damper attachment points. It is considered positive when the change is such as to increase the distance between them and negative when it decreases. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Spring Travel, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The change in distance from the static condition between the two points defining the spring attachment points. It is considered positive when the change is such as to increase the distance between them and negative when it decreases. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Roll Centre Position, X, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation. (Lotus Definition)\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Roll Centre Position, Y, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation, normally given the wheel centre value. (Lotus Definition)\b
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Roll Centre Position, Z, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation. (Lotus Definition)\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Ackermann, (%)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The ratio, given as a percentage, of the actual steer angles compared to those required for zero scrub. (Lotus Definition)\b
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm344.bmp\}
|
|
\par % Ackermann Definition
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard \b\cf3 Additional Incremental Values, (Available on Graphs or SDF splines file)
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Castor Trail, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The horizontal distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the wheel centre. The offset is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the wheel centre and negative when it is rearward.\b
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Castor Offset, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The distance in side elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground, and the centre of tyre contact. The offset is considered positive when the intersection point is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Kingpin offset, at wheel centre, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the wheel centre is the horizontal distance in front elevation from the wheel centre to the steering axis. It is considered positive when the wheel centre is outboard of the steering axis, (normal case), and negative if inboard.\b
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Kingpin offset, at ground, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 Kingpin offset at the ground is the horizontal distance in front elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground and the centre of the tyre contact. It is considered positive when the tyre contact is outboard of the steering axis intersection and negative if inboard.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Mechanical Trail, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The perpendicular distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the centre of tyre contact. It is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.
|
|
\par \b
|
|
\par TCP Position, X, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par TCP Position, Y, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par TCP Position, Z, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.\b
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Hub Position, X, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Hub Position, Y, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Hub Position, Z, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Tyre Vertical Force, (N)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental value of the vertical force at the tyre contact point. Only given in compliant mode.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Swing Arm Length \{\-Front\'7d, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental length of the front view virtual swing arm.\b
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Swing Arm Centre Y \{\-Front\'7d, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Y position of the front view virtual swing arm centre.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Swing Arm Centre Z \{\-Front\'7d, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z position of the front view virtual swing arm centre.\b
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm345.bmp\}
|
|
\par Front View Swing Arm Definitions
|
|
\par \pard \b
|
|
\par Swing Arm Length \{\-Side\'7d, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental length of the side view virtual swing arm.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Swing Arm Centre X \{\-Side\'7d, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental X position of the side view virtual swing arm centre.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Swing Arm Centre Z \{\-Side\'7d, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental Z position of the side view virtual swing arm centre.\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Roll Centre Height to Body, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the body origin. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Roll Centre Height to Ground, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 See full description above. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the ground origin. (Lotus definition).\b
|
|
\par
|
|
\par TCP dx/dz Gradient, (mm/mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental value for the gradient of the Tyre contact point when viewed from the side.
|
|
\par \b
|
|
\par Turning Circle Radius, (mm)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 The incremental turning circle is calculated from the average intersection point of the steered front wheel normals at the rear axle line.\b
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm346.bmp\}
|
|
\par Turning Circle Definition
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 The Two Part Steering Rack Model
|
|
\par \pard \fs20
|
|
\par Description:
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \plain\fs20 The two-part rack adds two new parts, the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Rack Link\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 and the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Rack Body\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 . The rack link slides within the rack body through two connections that are tagged in the template as \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rack Mount Point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Rack Lateral Mount Point\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Being tagged the solver automatically applies suitable stiffness numbers to them to replicate sliders. The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rack lateral stiffness\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is applied to the one tagged as the Lateral mount point. The rack body is then connected to ground through two further bush connections, which if undefined, are set to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 rigid\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 stiffness value in x, y and Z. The Rack link part is connected via ball joints to the two track-rods at the inner ball joint positions.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm347.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 The Anti Roll Bar Model
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Description:
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 The anti-roll bar added via the default menu adds four new parts, two \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Drop Links\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 and the anti-roll bar itself made up of two separate \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Roll Bar Parts\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 . The two roll bar parts are connected together via a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 tagged\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point. In compliance this tagged point is treated as a revolute joint being given the defined roll bar stiffness. In total 11 new points are added to the template. The roll bar joint mentioned above, four new C of G points (one for each new part), the two defined attachment points of the drop link to the selected part, the attachment points of the drop link to the roll bar ends, (placed directly above the defined attachment points) and the two roll bar mounts. The roll bar mounts connect the roll bar to ground, (this is the same as the vehicle body). All of the points are solved in post solution forms, (vector pos and Hookes joint), such that no additional equations are added to the kinematic solution. Thus they do not contribute or control the kinematic motion.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm348.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 The Compliant Hub Model
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Description:
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Add compliant hub\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option provides a simple menu selection route to including hub compliance into the existing models template. It adds a new part, the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 wheel/Hub\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 between the upright and ground. Two new points are added one for the new parts C of G position and the other for the connection point. The compliant hub is modelled with a single bush, rather than the more physical two bushes (i.e. the inner and outer bearings), as typical know hub compliance values are usually measured as a single stiffness number. In compliance mode if no bush stiffness values are provided the default \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Stiff\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 values are applied to both axial and rotational stiffnesses. As part of the template modification performed by this option the Wheel centre point and stub axles points properties are changed such that they are associated with the new \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hub\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 part rather than the original \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 upright\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 part.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm349.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Steering Box Models
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Description:
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 Two optional steering box types are available in the latest version of Shark. By hanging to a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 steering box\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 you do not add any extra parts, you just change how the steering motion is applied to the model. Most importantly the steering motion is no longer assumed to be defined in linear translation of the inner track rod joint (mm), but is now assumed to be the rotation of the steering box about its axis (degrees). The difference between the two is whether the inner track rod ball joint is attached to a common cross rail or the steering arms.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm350.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm351.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Leaf Spring Modelling
|
|
\par \pard \plain\ul\fs20
|
|
\par \b\ul Leaf Spring Modelling in SHARK
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 The leaf spring is modelled as a three link component, (rear hanger is \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 fourth\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 link). Geometrically the link lengths could be based on the standard SAE1982 definition.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par To achieve the required kinematic spring shape with bump travel an adaptive length control element is applied. This senses the change in length between two markers and applies a controlling change in length to the enforced distance between two other markers. In the case of the leaf spring model the control element senses the change in length between the spring rear eye and a point on the axle part and applies a change in length to the distance between the front spring eye and a point on the axle part. The relationship between sensed length and changed length is a user definable look-up table that allows the required kinematic deformed shape to be achieved under bump displacement.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm352.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par Because of the solution delay in detect/sense this produces on coarse step size a degree of \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 staircasing\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . An alternative approach is available that just uses the z-displacement of a point as the transducer variable, (this will still work with roll). One advantage of this approach is that the stable kinematic solution leads to a better calculation of the roll centre migration.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm353.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par The compliant characteristics of the leaf spring are modelled using the bush rotational stiffness and bush pre-loads at the two joint points. Other spring points such as the eye and hanger points are modelled as compliant bushes in the normal way. The limitation of this is that currently the rotational stiffness can only be a linear value, which is limiting when considering multi-leaf springs. The other issue is that the use of the bush pre-load to represent spring loads in the system means that for the as built system, there is no rotations and hence no bush pre-load. Initial pre-loads can\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t be defined as non-zero they are only determined by rotation from static build position.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par This pre-load issue can be overcome by building the model at some free condition such that the static ride point is at \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 x\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mm of bump travel rather than 0 mm.
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Theory \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 The Slotted Joint
|
|
\par \pard \plain\ul\fs20
|
|
\par \b\ul Modelling a slotted joint in SHARK
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 The normal steering arm joint used in Shark is the simple ball joint. A modelling option is included, \i Edit / Convert Ball Joint to Slot\plain\fs20 that will convert a selected ball joint, (normally the steering arm outer joint) to a slotted joint. This option makes the necessary changes to the template without any further user interaction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The image below illustrates how the slotted joint makes use of a Hookes\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 joint type spider added to the model to act as the connecting part and provide the necessary rotation restriction between the upright and the steering arm. The orientation of the slot can be controlled by the two points \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Slot Normal1\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Slot Upper\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . The \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Slot Normal2\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point is defined by a function that uses the two other axis points to align it and thus is repositioned automatically when you change the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Slot Normal1\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm354.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par The extra marker point \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Slot Marker\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is added attached to the steering arm but initially positioned at the same co-ordinates as the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 slot upper\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 point to provide the necessary post processing ball joint rotation targets. To display the joint such that its slot travel can be displayed the parts and markers should be set up as indicated in the figure below.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm355.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \pard A typical display should then look as indicated below for the outer ball joint. With motion being constrained to be linear along the slot direction.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\qc \{bmc bm356.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
|
|
\b\fs28 Appendix 1 \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Supported Batch Commands
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard \b Introduction
|
|
\par \pard \plain\f0\fs20
|
|
\par \f1 Supported batch commands are given below, grouped by sub-section. The list gives the short string Batch equivalent followed by full menu description and finally any optional arguments. Optional arguments are shown within square brackets []. Menu Items shown in \i italics\plain\fs20 are graphical in their action, in that they will require to open a graphical dialogue box to expect some user input and thus should not be used as part of a script file that is required to run completely automatically with no user input. Commands that are switches have an implied toggle if no \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ON\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 OFF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 is added to the line. Thus in script mode to be certain of a particular switch status always use the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 ON\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 OFF\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 optional argument to ensure required setting.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b General Items, (available at all levels)
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 \tab QU\tab Quit Application
|
|
\par \tab ?\tab List Menus
|
|
\par \tab /\tab Up a Menu Level
|
|
\par
|
|
\par For use within batch command files and available at all levels;
|
|
\par \tab !\tab At the start of the command, identifies it as a comment line
|
|
\par \tab &\tab At the end of the command, indicates it to be invisible, i.e. not echoed to screen.
|
|
\par PAUSE\tab Causes the batch run to pause and wait for the user to enter an expected value.
|
|
\par \tab \tab The PAUSE batch command has an optional argument that is used as a prefix to
|
|
\par \tab \tab the supplied text. Thus additional Batch commands can be placed in front of the
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \tab users enter values/string to provide an invisible extra command. An example
|
|
\par \tab \tab might be to ask for a value then add the ED edit command in front of it.
|
|
\par \pard\fi715\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Top Level
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab FI\tab File
|
|
\par \tab MO\tab Module
|
|
\par \tab DA\tab Data
|
|
\par \tab ED\tab Edit
|
|
\par \tab VI\tab View
|
|
\par \tab TR\tab Tracking
|
|
\par \tab GR\tab Graphics
|
|
\par \tab GP\tab Graphs
|
|
\par \tab SO\tab Solve
|
|
\par \tab RE\tab Results
|
|
\par \tab SE\tab SetUp
|
|
\par \tab WI\tab Window
|
|
\par \tab HE\tab Help
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \i \tab INT\tab Switch to Interactive Display
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b File Sub-Menu
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 \tab NE\tab New [Type, End]
|
|
\par \tab OP\tab Open [Filename]
|
|
\par \tab OP BR\tab Browser
|
|
\par \tab OP DIR\tab Directory Listing
|
|
\par \tab OP CD\tab Change Directory
|
|
\par \tab AD\tab Add End From File\'85 [Filename]
|
|
\par \tab AD BR\tab Browser
|
|
\par \tab AD DIR\tab Directory Listing
|
|
\par \tab AD CD\tab Change Directory
|
|
\par \tab SA\tab Save As [Filename]
|
|
\par \tab AD BR\tab Browser
|
|
\par \tab AD DIR\tab Directory Listing
|
|
\par \tab AD CD\tab Change Directory
|
|
\par \tab DT\tab Re-Read Default Templates (Skip User)
|
|
\par \tab UT\tab Re-Read Default+User Templates
|
|
\par \tab AC\tab Add Custom Templates\'85
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab SC\tab Save Custom Templates (All)\'85
|
|
\par \tab EX\tab Exit
|
|
\par \tab RU\tab Run Batch File
|
|
\par \tab RI\tab Re-Read <install> INI File
|
|
\par \tab SI\tab Save INI File to <install> Folder
|
|
\par \i \tab NE\tab New\'85
|
|
\par \tab ET\tab Edit Templates
|
|
\par \tab TE\tab File Text Edit
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Module Sub Menu
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 \tab 2B\tab 2D Bump
|
|
\par \tab 2R\tab 2D Roll
|
|
\par \tab 3B\tab 3D Bump
|
|
\par \tab 3R\tab 3D Roll
|
|
\par \tab 3S\tab 3D Steer
|
|
\par \tab 3C\tab 3D Combined Motion
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Data Sub Menu
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20 \tab PO\tab Points
|
|
\par \tab PO LI\tab List
|
|
\par \tab PO ED\tab Edit [No./Label X, Y, Z]
|
|
\par \tab PA\tab Parameters\'85
|
|
\par \tab PA LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab PA ED\tab Edit [Label, Value]
|
|
\par \tab TY\tab Tyre Sizes\'85
|
|
\par \tab TY LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab TY ED\tab Edit [Label, Value, End]
|
|
\par \tab SA\tab Set Static Angles\'85
|
|
\par \tab SA LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab SA ED\tab Edit [Label, Value, End]
|
|
\par \tab TI\tab Titles\'85
|
|
\par \tab TI LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab TI ED\tab Edit [No. String]
|
|
\par \tab FO\tab Force Set
|
|
\par \tab FO LI\tab List
|
|
\par \tab FO CU\tab Current [No.]
|
|
\par \tab UEB\tab Use Extended Bump Travel [ON/OFF]
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab EB\tab Extended Bump Travel
|
|
\par \tab EB LI \tab List
|
|
\par \tab EB AD\tab Add [Bump], [Label]
|
|
\par \tab EB ED\tab Edit [No.] or [Label], [Bump], [Label]
|
|
\par \tab EB DE\tab Delete [No.] or [Label] or [All]
|
|
\par \tab UER\tab Use Extended Roll Travel [ON/OFF]
|
|
\par \tab ER\tab Extended Bump Travel
|
|
\par \tab ER LI \tab List
|
|
\par \tab ER AD\tab Add [Roll], [Label]
|
|
\par \tab ER ED\tab Edit [No.] or [Label], [Roll], [Label]
|
|
\par \tab ER DE\tab Delete [No.] or [Label] or [All]
|
|
\par \tab UES\tab Use Extended Roll Travel [ON/OFF]
|
|
\par \tab ES\tab Extended Steer Travel
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab ES LI \tab List
|
|
\par \tab ES AD\tab Add [Steer], [Label]
|
|
\par \tab ES ED\tab Edit [No.] or [Label], [Steer], [Label]
|
|
\par \tab ES DE\tab Delete [No.] or [Label] or [All]
|
|
\par \tab UEC\tab Use Extended Combined Motion Travel [ON/OFF]
|
|
\par \tab EC\tab Extended Combined Mode Travel
|
|
\par \tab CM LI \tab List
|
|
\par \tab CM AD\tab Add [Steer], [Bump], [Roll]
|
|
\par \tab CM ED\tab Edit [No.], [Steer], [Bump], [Roll]
|
|
\par \tab CM DE\tab Delete [No.] or [All]
|
|
\par \i \tab MO \tab Model Properties\'85
|
|
\par \tab \plain\fs20 CO\tab Compliance Data\'85
|
|
\par \i \tab CO \plain\fs20 SP\i \tab Spring Properties
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab CO SP DI\tab \tab Display
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab CO SP LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab CO SP ED\tab \tab Edit [End, Spring, Parameter, Value]
|
|
\par \i \tab CO \plain\fs20 DA\i \tab Damper Properties
|
|
\par \tab CO DA DI\tab \tab Display
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab CO DA LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab CO DA ED\tab \tab Edit [End, Damper, Value]
|
|
\par \tab CO DT\tab Drive Shaft Torques
|
|
\par \i \tab CO DT DI\tab \tab Display
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab CO DT LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab CO DT ED\tab \tab Edit [End, Value]
|
|
\par \i \tab CO BU\tab Bush Properties (All)
|
|
\par \tab CO TY\tab Tyre Properties
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab CO EX\tab External Forces
|
|
\par \tab CO RO\tab Roll Bar Properties
|
|
\par \tab CO RA\tab Linear Rack Properties
|
|
\par \tab CO NR\tab Non-Linear Rack Properties
|
|
\par \tab CO BS\tab Bump Stop Properties
|
|
\par \tab CO DL\tab Tyre Properties
|
|
\par \tab CO GE\tab General Data
|
|
\par \tab MA \tab Mass Data\'85
|
|
\par \tab VI\tab View-Edit Coordinates
|
|
\par \tab EEB\tab Edit Extended Bump Travel
|
|
\par \tab EER\tab Edit Extended Roll Travel
|
|
\par \tab EES\tab Edit Extended Steer Travel
|
|
\par \tab EEC\tab Edit Extended Combined Motion Travel
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \b Edit Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab UN\tab Undo
|
|
\par \tab RE\tab Redo
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b View Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\i\fs20 \tab RE\tab Refresh
|
|
\par \tab AU\tab Autoscale
|
|
\par \tab FI\tab Fill Style
|
|
\par \tab FI WI\tab \tab Wire Frame
|
|
\par \tab FI FI\tab \tab Filled
|
|
\par \tab FI HI\tab \tab Hidden Line
|
|
\par \tab FI DE\tab Depth Buffered (Flat shading)
|
|
\par \tab ST\tab Std Views
|
|
\par \tab ST YZ\tab y-z
|
|
\par \tab ST ZX\tab z-x
|
|
\par \tab ST XY\tab x-y
|
|
\par \tab ST IS\tab iso
|
|
\par \tab SE\tab Set Display Mode Tool\'85
|
|
\par \tab CH\tab Change Units\'85
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Tracking Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\i\fs20 \tab TO\tab Toggle
|
|
\par \tab AL\tab All
|
|
\par \tab X\tab X
|
|
\par \tab Y\tab Y
|
|
\par \tab Z\tab Z
|
|
\par \tab VI\tab Visible
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab LE\tab Length\'85
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Graphics Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\i\fs20 \tab NO\tab Point Nos
|
|
\par \tab LA\tab Point Labels
|
|
\par \tab LI\tab Point Limits
|
|
\par \tab VA\tab Point Values
|
|
\par \tab PNO\tab Part Nos
|
|
\par \tab PLA\tab Part Labels
|
|
\par \tab PCG\tab Part C of G Visibility
|
|
\par \tab PCG PMA\tab C of G Marker
|
|
\par \tab PCG PAP\tab C of G Axes Points
|
|
\par \tab PCG PLX\tab C of G Local Axes
|
|
\par \tab EV\tab Enhanced Visibility
|
|
\par \tab EV SP\tab Spring
|
|
\par \tab EV DA\tab Damper
|
|
\par \tab EV WH\tab Wheel
|
|
\par \tab EV GR\tab Grid
|
|
\par \tab EV BO\tab Body
|
|
\par \tab EV TR\tab Triad
|
|
\par \tab EV OM\tab Origin Marker
|
|
\par \tab EV BG\tab Body C of G Marker
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab EV MG\tab Moving Ground/Wheels
|
|
\par \tab EV RA\tab Roll Axis
|
|
\par \tab DB\tab Display Both Sides
|
|
\par \tab CV\tab Compliance Visability
|
|
\par \tab CV BJ\tab Ball Joints
|
|
\par \tab CV BU\tab Bushes
|
|
\par \tab CV TS\tab Tyre Spring
|
|
\par \tab CV BAP\tab Bush Axis Points
|
|
\par \tab CV BLA\tab Bush Local Axes
|
|
\par \tab CV EF\tab External Forces
|
|
\par \tab CV EFA\tab External Force Axes
|
|
\par \tab CV CF\tab Calculated Forces
|
|
\par \tab CV FV\tab Calc Forces Values
|
|
\par \tab CC\tab Copy to Clipboard
|
|
\par \tab SA \tab Save to File\'85 [Filename]
|
|
\par \tab SA BR\tab Browser
|
|
\par \tab SA DIR\tab Directory Listing
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab SA CD\tab Change Directory
|
|
\par \tab AV\tab AVI File Writer\'85
|
|
\par \tab DV\tab View Definition Values
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Graphs Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\i\fs20 \tab PP\tab Printer Properties
|
|
\par \tab AU\tab Graphs/Autoscale (All)
|
|
\par \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \b Solve Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab MO\tab Motion
|
|
\par \tab MO GP\tab Ground Plane
|
|
\par \tab MO BO\tab Body
|
|
\par \tab CP\tab 3D Compliance
|
|
\par \tab KI\tab Kinematic
|
|
\par \tab EX\tab External Forces
|
|
\par \tab SL\tab Suspension Spring Pre-Load Force
|
|
\par \tab SR\tab Suspension Spring Rate
|
|
\par \tab RB\tab Suspension Roll Bar Force
|
|
\par \tab BU\tab Bush Rotation Pre-Loads
|
|
\par \tab BL\tab Suspension Bump Stop Preload
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab BR\tab Suspension Bump Stop Rate
|
|
\par \tab TV\tab Suspension Tyre Vertical Rate
|
|
\par \tab CE\tab Control Elements
|
|
\par \tab DL\tab Drive Shaft Loads
|
|
\par \tab BK\tab Braked Hub
|
|
\par \tab WH\tab Wheelbase Diff Sol
|
|
\par \tab WH FL\tab Float Wheelbase
|
|
\par \tab WH FI\tab Fix Wheelbase
|
|
\par \tab GR\tab Grnd Plane Diff Sol
|
|
\par \tab GR TR\tab Translate
|
|
\par \tab GR RO\tab Roll
|
|
\par \tab GR BU\tab Bump-Rebound
|
|
\par \tab ST\tab Solver Tolerances
|
|
\par \tab ST LI\tab \tab List
|
|
\par \tab ST ED [Label, Value]\tab \tab Edit
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Results Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab FO\tab Formatted SDF\'85
|
|
\par \tab FI \tab SDF Spline Fits\'85
|
|
\par \tab DA\tab SDF Spline Data\'85
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab BD\tab Bush Deflections\'85
|
|
\par \tab BR\tab Joint-Bush Rotations\'85
|
|
\par \tab BF\tab Bush Forces\'85
|
|
\par \tab UP\tab List All Point Coords for User Position\'85
|
|
\par \tab AP\tab List a Point Coords at All Positions\'85
|
|
\par \tab AC\tab List All Point Coords at a Position\'85
|
|
\par \tab (All the above have the same set of sub options)
|
|
\par \tab LI\tab List [End No.], [Setup No.]
|
|
\par \tab DI\tab Display [End No.], [Setup No.]
|
|
\par \tab WR\tab Write [Filename]
|
|
\par \tab \tab WR BR\tab \tab Browser
|
|
\par \tab \tab WR DIR\tab Directory Listing
|
|
\par \tab \tab WR CD\tab \tab Change Directory
|
|
\par \tab PR\tab Print [End No.], [Setup No.]
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab SE\tab Printer Setup\'85
|
|
\par \tab FT\tab Printer Font Type [0-2]
|
|
\par \tab FS\tab Printer Font Size [1-8]
|
|
\par \tab RE\tab Run Report Batch File
|
|
\par \tab RU\tab Run [Filename] or [No.]
|
|
\par \tab LI\tab List Default Files
|
|
\par \tab DI\tab Display [opt Filename]
|
|
\par \tab WR\tab Write
|
|
\par \tab \tab WR BR\tab \tab Browser
|
|
\par \tab \tab WR DIR\tab Directory Listing
|
|
\par \tab \tab WR CD\tab \tab Change Directory
|
|
\par \tab PR\tab Print [opt Filename]
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Setup Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab PP\tab Printer Properties\'85
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Window Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab VI\tab View Custom Control Display [No.]
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab OP\tab Open New Custom Control Display\'85
|
|
\par \tab PR\tab Print Custom Control Display [No.]
|
|
\par \tab PD\tab Print (to default printer) Custom Control Display [No.]
|
|
\par \tab PP\tab Printer Properties\'85
|
|
\par \tab CO\tab Copy to Clipboard [No.]
|
|
\par \tab SA\tab Save to File\'85 [No.]. [Filename]
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Help Sub Menu
|
|
\par \plain\fs20 \tab CO\tab Contents
|
|
\par \tab SE\tab Search for Help On\'85
|
|
\par \tab HO\tab How to Use Hep
|
|
\par \tab AB\tab About Lotus Suspension Analysis\'85
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Appendix 2 \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Known Issues and Work Rounds
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \fs24
|
|
\par \fs20 1) Virtual Memory
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Problem:\plain\fs20 On start up get error message \plain\f0\i\fs20 \'93\f1 unable to allocate ****** bytes of virtual memory\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'94\f1
|
|
\par \plain\b\fs20 Fix:\plain\fs20 Modify start up menu/desk top icon to point to \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 sharknonvc.exe\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 rather than default \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 shark.exe\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1
|
|
\par
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \b 2) Garbled Graphics Widgets
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Problem:\plain\fs20 Graphics display appears garbled/partially obscured. In particular this effects selection boxes, for example on the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 File/New\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 dialogue box.
|
|
\par \b Fix:\plain\fs20 Associated with small fonts display with high dpi settings. Go to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Start / Settings / Control Panel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Open \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 settings. Locate the font size, normally under \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 General\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tab. Set font size to small at no higher than 96 dpi. On some user sites this may require local admin rights.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \b 3) Unstable Graphics, No Support for OpenGL depth buffering
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par Problem:\plain\fs20 When using the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 View / Graphics Frame Type / OpenGl\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 option, (such that depth buffering is supported), graphics display is unstable and does not properly draw shaded depth buffered view.
|
|
\par \b Fix:\plain\fs20 This is associated with the graphics cards hardware acceleration level. To resolve this go to \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Start / Settings / Control Panel\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . Open \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Display\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 settings, select the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 settings\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tab and select the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Advanced\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 button. You now need to identify the tab that has the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hardware acceleration\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 level on. Typically this is under the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Troubleshooting\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 tab. Try reducing the hardware acceleration away from \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Full\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 towards \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 None\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 . This is best performed on a step at a time trial basis to test how much of a reduction is required to enable the graphics to perform correctly. On some user sites this may require local admin rights. If it is considered not possible or undesirable to reduce the hardware acceleration level then the user will need to change to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Windows GDI\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 graphics frame type, select menu \i View / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI\plain\fs20 . Users should note that with this graphics frame type, depth buffering/shaded image is not supported.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The introduction at version 4.03i of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Software Double Buffer\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 switch see menu \i View / Use Software Double Buffer\plain\fs20 should enable all hardware combinations to run in OpenGl mode.
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
|
|
{\up K}
|
|
\b\fs28 Appendix 3 \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Modes of Operation - Flow Diagram
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \fs24
|
|
\par \pard \fs28 Shark Modes of Operation
|
|
\par \plain\fs16
|
|
\par \pard \b\fs20 Interactive Mode
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20 Shark was originally written to be used as a graphical based interactive multi-window application. In this mode of operation users migrate through the program with mouse based selections of menu and toolbar icon options with data entry into pop-up dialogue boxes and spread sheets.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \pard \b Command Mode
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20 To support alternative modes of operation required by some users a purely text based command mode has been added. In its simplest form all entry for the command mode is via the keyboard into a simple scrolling text window.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par The program can be started in either interactive mode or command mode. The command mode is initiated by the use of the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 TEXT\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 or \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 BATCH\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 string added as a passed optional argument from the calling shortcut. It is also possible to switch between modes once the application is open.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par With some of the more complex data entry, such as external force sets, it is not possible to edit this information through the simple command line mode. It is however possible to work in a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 mixed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 mode of operation which although the application may have been started in command mode the more complex data dialogue boxes can still be opened and data entered in the same way as the full interactive method. This mixed mode of operation has one limitation and it is connected with scripted batch running.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard \b Scripted Batch
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20 As mentioned above a sequence of batch commands can be entered into a text file and run as a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 scripted\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 batch mode. If these scripts are intended to be completely \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 hands free\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 ; i.e. no user input, then only text commands should be used. It is anticipated that a number of customer \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 script files will be created and placed on the <install> folder to be available to users of all levels. The <install> INI file can be modified to provide on a menu a list of these standard script files, which can then be run simply by a reference number. Also applies to installations that use the <database> folder, they will overwrite any <install> scripts.
|
|
\par \pard \fs16
|
|
\par \pard \b\fs20 Report Script Files
|
|
\par \pard \plain\fs20 To provide a complete overall automated report generation process, a scripted report file has been introduced. This takes a similar script file approach to the scripted batch mode but is targeted at defining the contents of a report document.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par Report script files can produce a complete analysis report that is sent straight to the printer, written/opened to a Word document or displayed in a Rich Text editor. These reports can be a mix of user formatted text, standard results listings and graph displays.
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par The report script file supports direct text definition, (from single character, single word, single line, to complete external text file), carriage control, (space, new line, new page), batch command, scripted batch file, all standard text reports, user window graphics, visible graph, current graphics or AVI file of current graphics.
|
|
\par
|
|
\par As with the scripted batch files it is anticipated that a number of Customer \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Standard\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 report files will be created and placed on the <install> folder to be available to users of all levels. The <install> INI file can be modified to provide via a menu a list of these standard report files, which can then be run simply by a reference number. Also applies to installations that use the <database> folder, they will overwrite any <install> report scripts.
|
|
\par \pard \fs22
|
|
\par \pard\qc \fs20 \{bmc bm357.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\ri275
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up +}
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \b\fs28 Appendix 4 \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 StartUp Process Order - Flow Diagram
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \pard\ri275 \plain\b\fs28 Startup Process \plain\f0\b\fs28 \'96\f1 Main Items Identified
|
|
\par \fs24
|
|
\par \plain\fs24 Bracketed \i [--] \plain\fs24 items are optional / user specific intallation, nos match flow diagram points
|
|
\par \pard \fs20
|
|
\par \b Licenses:
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 \fs22 (1)\plain\fs22 Check out License features
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b Paths:
|
|
\par \pard\fi715 (2)\plain\fs22 Set \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 TEMP\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 directory to \plain\f0\fs22 \'93\f1 Temp_Path\plain\f0\fs22 \'94\f1 or C:\'5ctemp, \i [ Homedrive/Homepath ]\plain\fs22
|
|
\par \b (3)\plain\fs22 Set \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 WINDOWS\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 directory to \plain\f0\fs22 \'93\f1 Windir\plain\f0\fs22 \'94\f1 , \i [ Homedrive/Homepath ]\plain\fs22
|
|
\par \b (4)\plain\fs22 Set \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 STARTUP/INSTALL\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 directory to startup directory
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \b\fs20 INI file headers:
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs22 \tab \b (5)\plain\fs22 \i [ Read top of \plain\f0\i\fs22 \'91\f1 STARTUP/INSTALL\plain\f0\i\fs22 \'92\f1 INI file ]\plain\fs22
|
|
\par \tab \b (6)\plain\fs22 Look for and Read \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 SHARK_DATABASE\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 environment variable
|
|
\par \tab \b (7)\plain\fs22 Read top of \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 DATABASE\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 INI file (if defined)
|
|
\par \tab \b (8)\plain\fs22 Read top of \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 USER\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 INI file from \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 WINDOWS\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 folder
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Fill internal data values templates etc:
|
|
\par \plain\fs22 \tab \b (9)\plain\fs22 Fill internal default templates
|
|
\par \tab \b (10)\plain\fs22 Fill templates from \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 STARTUP/INSTALL\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 _User_Templates.Dat
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \tab \b (11)\plain\fs22 Fill templates from \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 DATABASE\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 _User_Templates.Dat
|
|
\par \tab \b (12)\plain\fs22 Set internal General defaults
|
|
\par \tab \b (13)\plain\fs22 Set internal default solver settings
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b INI Files:
|
|
\par \plain\fs22 \tab \b (14)\plain\fs22 \i [ Read \plain\f0\i\fs22 \'91\f1 STARTUP/INSTALL\plain\f0\i\fs22 \'92\f1 INI File ]\plain\fs22
|
|
\par \tab \b (15)\plain\fs22 Look for and Read \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 SHARK_DATABASE\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 environment variable
|
|
\par \tab \b (16)\plain\fs22 Read \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 DATABASE\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 INI File (if defined)
|
|
\par \tab \b (17)\plain\fs22 Read \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 USER\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 INI file from \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 WINDOWS\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 folder
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \b User Language:
|
|
\par \plain\fs22 \tab \b (18)\plain\fs22 Read \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 _custom.dic\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 from \plain\f0\fs22 \'91\f1 STARTUP/INSTALL\plain\f0\fs22 \'92\f1 , \i [ from \plain\f0\i\fs22 \'91\f1 DATABASE\plain\f0\i\fs22 \'92\f1 ]\plain\fs22
|
|
\par
|
|
\par \b Command Lines:
|
|
\par \plain\fs22 \tab \b (19)\plain\fs22 Check for batch or interactive via command arguments
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \b\fs28 Templates
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs20
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 All corner/axle models created in Shark refer to a particular template number. This number identifies the template that in turn specifies the definition of the model. This includes defining parts, points, graphics, connectivity (bushes) and key points in the template. Individual models map their unique point positions on to the template.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Hard coded into the program (at version 4.03i) are 32 default templates. All of these are available to any user of the software. Some are classed as Rear suspension templates only because they do not have a steerable point identified in them.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 For a server installation, on program start up the template file \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 _User_Template.dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 is searched for in the <install> folder. If it is found any template definitions identified within it are loaded and will either overwrite an existing default template (if the template number is already used by a default entry) or fill an empty slot number.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 If a Database Folder is defined, on program start up the template file \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 _User_Template.dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 is searched for in the <database> folder. If it is found any template definitions identified within it are loaded and will either overwrite an existing loaded template data.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Template definitions can be modified by individual users, thus individuals may have completely different definitions using the same template slot number. To provide a robust definition method, the specific template definition can be optionally included in the models data file. By definition this implies that when a model file is read in it can redefine a template specification, (and also that any subsequent use of the same template number will be similarly affected until the program is restarted or the templates reset).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Extra \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 custom\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 templates can be loaded at any time. Custom templates would normally have be a pre-saved set (or single) template, that may be required for occasional use but don\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 t warrant being added to the automatically loaded \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 _User_Templates.dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 file.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 To allow users to return to a set of known template definitions, menu options are provided that will re-set the template definitions to the hard coded ones only, or the hard coded ones plus the system user templates in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 _User_Templates.dat\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 file, (if it exists).
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \{bmc bm358.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 Templates - Flow Diagram
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \fs22
|
|
\par \pard\ri275\tx355 \b\fs28 INI File
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \plain\fs22
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \fs20 The INI file contains all the user specific settings. This file is read in each time the program is started. It is updated/overwritten with the current settings when the program performs a normal exit. The program has hard coded defaults for all these settings, which are overwritten by the user settings when the INI file is read. Thus to revert back to the hard coded \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 factory\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 defaults a user could delete the INI file prior to opening the application. For the standard installation the INI file is written to the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Windows\'ae\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 folder (i.e. C:\'5cWINNT), this means that individual users on the same machine could not have their own unique settings. Conversely it also meant that no two machines could expect to be set-up in the same way. An optional INI file is looked for in the <database> folder this is looked for and loaded if found prior to reading looking for the local windows INI file.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 For the user specific server installation the INI file process has an additional INI file step on startup. This provides a method that can support both a common setting on all machines and all individual user settings on the same machine. How?
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 The specific server installation uses a central server for the software install, (i.e. the software is not installed on individual machines). This single location means that an INI file can be placed in this <install> folder that is read by all users. Because this install is seen as a \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 fixed\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 file in that it is part of the initial install and then remains unchanged (primarily due to its location) a second system wide INI is required in a more flexible location. This second system wide INI file is to be identified by the <database> location. This <database> INI file can be modified by an expert user, to set common properties and settings for all users, unlike the <install> INI file which is fixed. Neither of these are written to on program close! But menu options exist to be able to write to them. These become the first two of the three INI files read. The application then looks in the specific user\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 s directory on the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Homedrive\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 in the \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Homepath\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 for the users unique INI file. This is the INI file that is overwritten when the user closes the program and thus stores their specific variation of the default server settings. An example of where \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Homedrive\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 and \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 Homepath\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 would point to is \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 C:\'5cDocuments and Settings\'5cmyusername\'5cshark.ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 . Note that the standard installation uses the \plain\f0\fs20 \'91\f1 Windows\plain\f0\fs20 \'92\f1 environment variable for this folder location.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 Users can revert back to the system wide server default settings either by deleting their local copy of \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1 shark.ini\plain\f0\fs20 \'94\f1 prior to opening the application, or once the application is open selecting the menu option \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1\i File/Re-Read <install> INI File\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'94\f1 \plain\fs20 or\i \plain\f0\fs20 \'93\f1\i File/Re-Read <database> INI File\plain\f0\i\fs20 \'94\plain\fs20 . Note that this three step process will still mean that a users individual settings are still machine specific, but they will start with the same server specific defaults on any other machine. The users could copy their own individual INI file on to a new machine if they wished to preserve all their settings.
|
|
\par \pard\tx355 \fs22
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 \fs20 \{bmc bm359.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard\qc\tx355 INI File - Flow Diagram
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \pard\tx355
|
|
\par \page
|
|
{\up $}
|
|
{\up #}
|
|
{\up >}
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 {\up K}
|
|
{\up K}
|
|
{\up K}
|
|
\b\fs28 LOTUS ENGINEERING\plain\fs28
|
|
\par \pard\qc \b\fs20
|
|
\par \{bmc bm360.bmp\}
|
|
\par \{bmc bm361.bmp\}
|
|
\par \{bmc bm362.bmp\}
|
|
\par \pard
|
|
\par \page
|
|
\pard\keepn\sb235\sa55\li715\fi-715 \fs28
|
|
\par \page
|
|
} |